0% found this document useful (0 votes)

9 views394 pages

Adams 2020 Shared Dialog Box and Appendix

Uploaded by

mert.dilekmen

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

9 views394 pages

Adams 2020 Shared Dialog Box and Appendix

Uploaded by

mert.dilekmen

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

Adams 2020

Shared Dialog Box and Appendix

Corporate Europe, Middle East, Africa
MSC Software Corporation MSC Software GmbH
4675 MacArthur Court, Suite 900 Am Moosfeld 13
Newport Beach, CA 92660 81829 Munich, Germany
Telephone: (714) 540-8900 Telephone: (49) 89 431 98 70
Toll Free Number: 1 855 672 7638 Email: europe@[Link]
Email: [Link]@[Link]

Japan Asia-Pacific
MSC Software Japan Ltd. MSC Software (S) Pte. Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F 100 Beach Road
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku #16-05 Shaw Tower
1-Chome, Shinjuku-Ku Singapore 189702
Tokyo 160-0023, JAPAN Telephone: 65-6272-0082
Telephone: (81) (3)-6911-1200 Email: [Link]@[Link]
Email: [Link]@[Link]

Worldwide Web
[Link]

Support
[Link]

Disclaimer
This documentation, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may be used only in accordance with the
terms of such license.
MSC Software Corporation reserves the right to make changes in specifications and other information contained in this document
without prior notice.
The concepts, methods, and examples presented in this text are for illustrative and educational purposes only, and are not intended
to be exhaustive or to apply to any particular engineering problem or design. MSC Software Corporation assumes no liability or
responsibility to any person or company for direct or indirect damages resulting from the use of any information contained herein.
User Documentation: Copyright © 2020 MSC Software Corporation. Printed in U.S.A. All Rights Reserved.
This notice shall be marked on any reproduction of this documentation, in whole or in part. Any reproduction or distribution of this
document, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of MSC Software Corporation is prohibited.
This software may contain certain third-party software that is protected by copyright and licensed from MSC Software suppliers.
Additional terms and conditions and/or notices may apply for certain third party software. Such additional third party software terms
and conditions and/or notices may be set forth in documentation and/or at [Link] (or successor
website designated by MSC from time to time). Portions of this software are owned by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management, Inc.
© Copyright 2020
The MSC Software logo, MSC, MSC Adams, MD Adams, and Adams are trademarks or registered trademarks of MSC Software
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries. FLEXlm and FlexNet Publisher are trademarks or registered trademarks of Flexera Software.
Parasolid is a registered trademark of Siemens Product Lifecycle Management, Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.

ADAM:V2020:Z:Z:Z:DC-F1
Documentation Feedback
At MSC Software, we strive to produce the highest quality documentation and welcome your feedback.
If you have comments or suggestions about our documentation, write to us at: documentation-
feedback@[Link].
Please include the following information with your feedback:
 Document name
 Release/Version number
 Chapter/Section name
 Topic title (for Online Help)
 Brief description of the content (for example, incomplete/incorrect information, grammatical
errors, information that requires clarification or more details and so on).
 Your suggestions for correcting/improving documentation
You may also provide your feedback about MSC Software documentation by taking a short 5-minute
survey at: [Link]

Note: The above mentioned e-mail address is only for providing documentation specific
feedback. If you have any technical problems, issues, or queries, please contact Technical
Support.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 1
Actuator Set Activity

Dialog Box - F1 Help

Actuator Set Activity
(Template Builder) Build → Actuators → Set Activity Shared Dialog Box
Sets the activity of an actuator. Learn how to Set Activity.

For the option: Do the following:

Actuator Enter the database name of the actuator.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Active Select one of the following:

 on - Actuator is active.
 off - Actuator is not active.

Actuator Set Function

(Template Builder) Build → Actuators → Set Function Shared Dialog Box
Defines actuator functions. Learn about how to Set Function.

For the option: Do the following:

Actuator Enter the database name of an actuator.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Function Define the function of the single-component forces created by the actuator you
selected.
Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For
information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.

Adams Insight: Display or Modify Experiment

Simulate → DOE Interface → Adams Insight → Display/Modify
Displays the Adams Insight graphical user interface and loads the specified experiment file. If given, the 'File
to Reuse' will be inspected for inclusion Factors & Responses. Insight attempts to promote the same
inclusions list in the loaded experiment.
2 template_based_common
Adams Insight: Load Simulation Results

For the option: Do the following:

Experiment File Enter the name of the Insight experiment file (.xml) to load in Adams Insight.
Experiment File to An existing Adams Insight experiment file from which the promoted factors and
Reuse responses will be replicated.

Adams Insight: Load Simulation Results

Simulate → DOE Interface → Adams Insight → Load Results
Loads simulation results, from Adams .res files, for the completed DOE trials. Calculates Response values for
each trial and saves the Insight Experiment. Displays the Insight graphical user interface when complete.

For the option: Do the following:

Experiment Enter the name of the Insight experiment file (.xml) to load results for. It is
assumed that trial results (.res output files) exist either in the working directory
or in subdirectories previously created in the 'run' phase.
Range The range of trials to load into the experiment. Expecting a string such as "all"
or "1,2,5-10,15".

Adams Insight: Run Experiment

Simulate → DOE Interface → Adams Insight → Run

For the option: Do the following:

Experiment File Enter the name of the Insight experiment file (.xml) to be opened. All defined
trials in the experiment will be run.
Range The range of trials to run. Expecting a string such as "all" or "1,2,5-10,15".
Analysis Mode Chooses what mode is used to process each trial when the calculator button is
selected in Insight. Interactive mode runs each trial in the current Adams Car
session. Files_only mode creates the model files (adm, acf and supporting files)
for each trial. These model files are then run from a command prompt in 'batch'
mode.
Run in Subdirectory Specify whether trials are run in the current working directory or in a
subdirectory. Value 'if_defined' inspects experiment file for this setting. It is
recommended to run trials in subdirectories to organize output results, especially
when multiple events are run per trial.
Display Insight When Display the Adams Insight interface once the experiment file has been processed.
Finished
Dialog Box - F1 Help 3
Add Database to Search

Add Database to Search

Tools → Database Management → Add to Search Shared Dialog Box
Within a session, adds Databases to search, providing a method of interactively registering a new or existing
database from your file system. This functionality provides an alternative method to hand-editing either the
shared or your private [Link] file. After the database has been added to your current session, you will be able
to access assemblies, subsystems, templates, and property files from that database.

For the option: Do the following:

Database Name Enter the name by which the database will be referenced during the session. This name
may be related or not similar to the actual file system path where it is located.
Database Path Enter the complete file system path for the new database. You can do either of the
following:

 Enter the path directly into the text box. For example, if the path for the prototype
database is located at /usr/people/gabriel/prototype_02.cdb, you enter:
/usr/people/gabriel/prototype_02.cdb

 Select and then select the desired directory.

 Enter the path to a new database, such as c:\temp\[Link]. In this case,
your template-based product creates a new empty database.
Database Info Select to display a list of the search directories, including their search level, database
name, and database path.

Add Subsystem
(Standard Interface) File → Manage Assemblies → Add Subsystem Shared Dialog Box

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Subsystem Select one or more subsystems:

 To search/browse for a subsystem, right-click the text box next to .

 To select a subsystem that is open in the current session, select . The icon

changes to and the text box is replaced by a pull-down menu from which
you can select a subsystem.
Shift Subsystems Opens the Subsystem Shift dialog where you can enter a longitudinal and vertical shift
for each subsystem specified.
4 template_based_common
Add Testrig

Add Testrig
(Standard Interface) File → Manage Assemblies → Add Testrig Shared Dialog Box
Adds a testrig into the selected assembly. Learn more.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Select the assembly from which you want to add the test rig. The menu lists all
assemblies open in the session.
Testrig Select the test rig you wish to add to the assembly.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Silent Select this option if you want to suppress the messages during the communicator
assignment process.

Animation Graphics
(Standard Interface) Tools → Animation Graphics Shared Dialog Box
Allow adding graphics to improve the animation of the simulated models. Animation parts can be fixed to
ground (environmental objects like trees, buildings, street signs, landscaping, and so on.) or moving objects
(other traffic participants like cars, pedestrians and so on.). Animation graphics will be added to the assembly
model and optionally to an existing analysis object as well.

Note: Saving the assembly in ASCII format will not retain the animation graphics. Please use a
session binary (for example, [Link]) or the binary assembly file to save animation graphics
with the assembled model.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Shows the list of valid assemblies that are currently in the database. Select the one for
which you want to add the animation graphics.
Graphics Name If creating an animation graphic, enter the name for it.

If modifying an animation graphic, enter its group name by browsing the database. If
you enter the group's object name, please omit the prefix "apg_".

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Ground Part If selected, the graphics object will be added to the ground part of the assembly.

If not selected, a new part will be created and constrained to ground with point
motions in all directions.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 5
Assembly Display

For the option: Do the following:

Geometry File Enter the name of the Wavefront .obj, Shell .shl, Stereolithography .stl or Parasolids
.x_t file that you want to import.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Scale Enter a real number to scale the size of the imported graphics.
Yaw Angle Enter a real number to orient the graphics object about the global vertical axis.
Analysis Name Enter the name of or browse the database for an existing analysis object you want to
(optional) add the graphics object to.

Note: Animation graphics can only be added to the existing analyses, if the
velocity functions (see below) are constant values, that is, do not require a
solver simulation to compute.
Position Enter real numbers to define the location offsets relative to the global origin.
X and Y
Velocity f(time) Enter the runtime function expression that will define the longitudinal and lateral
X and Y animation graphic motion.

Those expressions should be functions of time, for example, a constant velocity along
-X for another traffic participant to be overtaken.
Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For information
on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.

Assembly Display
(Standard Interface) View → Assembly Shared Dialog Box
Displays a full-vehicle or suspension assembly.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Shows the list of valid assemblies that are currently in the database. Select the one you
want to display.

Assembly Info
(Standard Interface) File → Info → Assembly Shared Dialog Box
Displays detailed information about Assemblies open in the current session.
6 template_based_common
Attach Custom Dialog Boxes

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Select the assembly whose information you want to display. The menu lists all
open assemblies.
Include Subsystem Info Select if you want the output to contain information about each subsystem
contained in the assembly.
Include Communicator Select if you want to include the results of a communicator test.
Info
Include Topology Map Select if you want the output to include a topology map.
Save information to a file Select if you want to save the assembly information to a text file. If you don't
specify a path, your template-based product defaults to storing the file in your
current working directory.
If you select Save information to a file, your template-based product enables the following option:
Text File Name Enter the name of the text file which will contain the assembly information
listing. If you don't specify a file extension, ".txt" will be appended to your
file name.
Export assembly info to a Select if you want to save the assembly information to a spreadsheet in .xlsx
spreadsheet format. If you don't specify a path, your template-based product defaults to
storing the file in your current working directory.
If you select Export assembly info to a spreadsheet, your template-based product enables the following option:
Spreadsheet File Name Enter the name of the file which will contain the assembly information. If you
don't specify a file extension, ".xlsx" will be appended to your file name.

Attach Custom Dialog Boxes

(Template Builder) Build → Custom Gui → Dialog Box → Attach Shared Dialog Box
Attaches custom dialog boxes to a template you specify. Learn about Customizing Your Product.
If you want to save a custom dialog box with a template, you must perform the attachment operation.

For the option: Do the following:

Template Name Select the template to which you want to attach the custom dialog box(es).
Dialog Box Attachments Enter the name of the dialog boxes that you want to attach to the template
you selected.
<<Add Select if you want to invoke the Database Navigator and select single or
multiple custom dialog boxes.
Clear Select if you want to remove attached dialog box(es) from the specified
template.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 7
Bumpstop

Bumpstop
Tools → Curve Manager
Generates a bumpstop property file. Learn about Working with Bumpstops.
You can create a linear bumpstop by entering a slope (stiffness), or define a force-deflection characteristic
using a mathematical formula (see Modifying Curves). You can also enter data in a spreadsheet and view and edit
the corresponding curve in the plotting window by dragging Hotpoints.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

Slope Enter the slope of the curve that defines the displacement-force relation.
Limits Enter the upper and lower x values for the curve.
Points/ Specify the number of points or segments for the curve. You can:
Segs
 Enter the number of points or segments.

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Bundle Database
Tools → Database Management → Bundle Database Shared Dialog Box
Creates a tar file of an existing Database.
Bundling a database entails grouping together in the tar file all the subdirectories and files which currently
exist below the selected database. Your template-based product writes the resulting tar file to the Default
Writable Database under the name database_name.tar. This functionality is useful when you want a snapshot
state of a database, or if you want to transfer the database files to an external file system.
8 template_based_common
Bushing

For the option: Do the following:

Database Name Select the name of a database currently in the search list. The menu reflects the
current status of the internal database, and is updated when you add or remove
databases.
compress Select if you want to also compress the resulting tar file; otherwise the tar file remains
in its default state. When you select compress, the name of the tar file becomes
database_name.tar.Z.
uuencode Select to uuencode the tar file. The resulting name of the tar file will be either
database_name.[Link] or database_name.[Link], depending on whether you also
compressed the file.
Database Info Select to display a list of the search directories, including their search level, database
name, and database path.

Note: Functionality only available on Linux platforms.

Bushing
Tools → Curve Manager
Generates a bushing property file. Learn about Working with Bushings.
You can create a linear bushing by entering a slope (stiffness/angular stiffness), or define a force-deflection
characteristic using a mathematical formula. You can also enter data in a spreadsheet and view and edit the
corresponding curve in the plotting window by dragging Hotpoints. See Modifying Curves.
A bushing property file lists:
 Six curves (three translational and three rotational characteristics)
 Six damping factors defined as constants in the three axial directions
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about Curve Manager.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 9
By Entering Size

For the option: Do the following:

Slope Enter the slope of the curve that defines the velocity-force relation.
Limits Enter the upper and lower x values for the curve.
Points/ Specify the number of points or segments for the curve. You can:
Segs
 Enter the number of points or segments.

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines

the vertical (y) values in terms of the horizontal (x) values. You can use only
one independent variable (x) to describe the functional relation. You can use
any valid FORTRAN mathematical operator, such as SIN, **2, and so on.
Damping Enter the damping values for each rotational and translational component as a real
number, or, if you want, you can compute those values as a percentage of the
stiffness (slope of the force/deflection curve) at 0.0 deflection.

Note: The pull-down menus in the upper left corner of the Curve Manager allow you to select an
active plot (translational and rotational stiffnesses) and components (x-y-z axis).

By Entering Size
(Template Builder) Build → Geometry → Elllipsoid → New/Modify → Method: by entering size Shared Dialog Box

For the option: Do the following:

General Part Enter the name of the part that will own the ellipsoid geometry.
X/Y/Z Radius Enter the ellipsoid radii in the x, y, and z directions based on the specified Coordinate
Reference location.

Calculate Installed Length

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify → Shared Dialog Box

Calculates the installed length from a desired preload value.

For the option: Do the following:

Desired Preload Enter the value of the preload for the spring. Your template-based product calculates
the corresponding installed length based on the property file values for the spring.
10 template_based_common
Calculate Mass

Calculate Mass
(Template Builder) Build → Parts → General Part → Calculate Mass
or

Create/modify dialog boxes → Shared Dialog Box

Calculates the mass and inertia of a general part. Learn about General Parts. When you use this dialog box to
set the mass properties of a general part, your template-based product uses all defined geometries that belong
to the general part to determine the correct mass and inertia properties.

For the option: Do the following:

General Part Enter the name of the general part whose mass and inertia properties you want to
modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Density Select one of the following:

 Material - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from the current density
value for the selected material.
 User-Entered - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from a user-entered
density.
If you set Density to Material, your template-based product displays the following option:
Material Type Select a material type from the list of materials currently defined. When you select a
material, your template-based product uses the density defined for that material to
calculate the general part's mass and inertia properties.
If you set Density to User-Entered, your template-based product displays the following option:
Density Value Enter a density that your template-based product will use to calculate the general
part's mass and inertia properties.

Centered Between Coordinates

Dialog boxes where you can set location dependencie Shared Dialog Box
Locates an entity at a centered distance between Coordinate References. While using two coordinate references
to define the location is most common, both three- and four-coordinate reference methods are also allowed
for defining the location dependency.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 11
Change Database Search Order

For the option: Do the following:

Centered between Select the desired number of coordinate references to be used in assigning the
location dependency. Your template-based product calculates the resultant
location by averaging the x, y, z values of the specified coordinate references.
Coordinate Reference Enter hardpoints or construction frames to be used in determining the centered
#(1,2,3,4) location. Only the number of text boxes that correspond to the selection you
made for Centered between are enabled.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Change Database Search Order

Tools → Database Management → Change Search Order Shared Dialog Box
Changes the search order of a Database.

Note: The search order is off by default. See the note in Setting Up the Search List and Order.

If you specify a file name without a full path, your template-based product searches through the defined
databases until it finds a matching file name. The search order of these databases is set in your private
configuration file, but you can change it at any time during the session.
Therefore, if two databases contain a file with the same name but different data, changing the database order
may cause your template-based product to find a different file in each case. This is advantageous in many
cases, but may produce unintended results when you change the search order without realizing that your
template-based product may be accessing different files.
12 template_based_common
Close Assembly

For the option: Do the following:

Database Name Select the database name whose current position you want to change. The menu
updates when you add or remove databases.
Level Specify the new level the database will occupy in the search list.

If the Information window currently displays the following information:

Level 1: **private .....

Level 2: *shared .....
Level 3: *gabriel .....
and you set the private database to level 2, the new search order will be as follows:

Level 1: *shared .....

Level 2: **private .....
Level 3: *gabriel .....
Database Info Select to display a list of the search directories, including their search level, database
name, and database path.

Close Assembly
(Standard Interface) File → Close → Assembly Shared Dialog Box
Closes the current assembly.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Select the assembly you want to close. The menu lists all open assemblies.
Save modified subsystems Select if you want to save the subsystems you modified in this session.

Close Subsystem
(Standard Interface) File → Close → Subsystem Shared Dialog Box
Closes the selected subsystem without first saving it to the Database.

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Name Select the subsystem you want to close. The menu lists all open subsystems.

Close Template
(Template Builder) File → Close Shared Dialog Box
Closes the selected template without first saving it to a Database.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 13
Clutch Force

For the option: Do the following:

Template Select the template you want to close. The menu lists all open templates.

Clutch Force
(Template Builder) Driveline Components → Clutch Forces → New/Modify Comprehensive Help
Defines a clutch force.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Clutch Force Name If creating a clutch force, enter a string to define its name.

If modifying a clutch force, enter the database name of an existing clutch

force.
I Part Enter the database name of a part that defines the action part of the
clutch force.
J Part Enter the database name of a part that defines the reaction part of the
clutch force.
Construction Frame Enter the name of an existing construction frame that defines both the axis
about which the clutch torque will act and along which of the clutch
forces the torque will act.
Property File Enter a property file suitable for clutch forces. You can enter a new property
file name directly in the text box, or right-click to either search the
chosen Adams Driveline database or browse for the file using the file
navigator.
Clearance Enter a nonnegative real number to define the clearance between the two
friction plates.
Adams Driveline uses the data from the next four options to create the friction versus relative slip curve.
See a plot of a typical Friction Versus Relative Slip.
Static Friction Coefficient Enter a nonnegative real number to define the static friction between the
two friction plates.
Dynamic Friction Coefficient Enter a nonnegative real number to define the dynamic friction between
the two friction plates.
Static Slip Velocity Enter a nonnegative real number to define the velocity threshold at
which the static friction becomes fully active.
Dynamic Slip Velocity Enter a nonnegative real number to define the velocity threshold at
which the dynamic friction becomes fully active.
14 template_based_common
Communicators Info

For the option: Do the following:

Effective Friction Radius Enter a nonnegative real number that defines the effective radius at
which the resulting tangent force is acting so as to calculate the clutch
torque correctly.
Select to display the Modify Entity Comments dialog box, where you can
add multi-line comments to any entity to describe its purpose and
function.

Learn about Recording Comments.

Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you
can choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Communicators Info
(Template Builder) Build → Communicator → Info Shared Dialog Box
Displays information about Communicators, to help you assess the status of communicators for one or more
templates.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 15
Connector Modification Table

For the option: Do the following:

Model Names Enter the model name(s) of one or more templates. If you choose more than one
template, your template-based product groups the communicator information into
a separate section for each template.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Type Select the type of communicator variables to be displayed in the Information
window:

 Input - Specifies that only information for input communicators will be

shown.
 Output - Specifies that only information for output communicators will be
shown.
 All - Specify that information for all the communicator variables found in each
of the specified templates will be shown.
Entity Select the type of communicator variables to be displayed in the Information
window:

 Many - Your template-based product displays many entity class options for you
to select.
 All - Your template-based product selects all entity classes.
array/bushing/ Select one or more options. Each option represents a distinct entity that has a
differential corresponding communicator variable for the type.
equation/force/...
Clear Information Select if your template-based product should clear the Information window of any
Window current information before displaying the communicator information.

Learn about Working with the Information Window.

Save Info Results to Select if your template-based product should send communicator information to a
File text file.
If you select Save Info Results to File, your template-based product displays the following option:
File Name Enter the name of the text file that will contain the results displayed in the
Information window.

Connector Modification Table

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Connector → Connector Table Shared Dialog Box
Modifies connectors. Learn about Working with Connectors.
16 template_based_common
Connector Modification Table

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Select an assembly whose connectors you want to modify. The menu lists all
open assemblies.
Subsystem Select a subsystem whose connectors you want to modify. The menu lists all
open subsystems.
Name Filter Enter a partial string to filter the connectors you want to display. You can use
multiple wildcards, such as *. For example, cnl_subframe_* would show all
connectors that begin with cnl_subframe_.
List of connector names Displays the connectors in the current model. You can use the Display option
to display different types of connectors.
Method Select one of the following:

 joint – The joint will be active, and the bushing will be inactive.
 bushing – The bushing will be active, and the joint will be inactive.
 both – The bushing and joint will both be active.
 none – The bushing and joint will both be inactive.
 kinematic flag – If the subsystem is in kinematic mode, the joint will be
active, and the bushing inactive. If the subsystem is in compliant mode,
the bushing will be active, and the joint will be inactive.
Joint Type Select one of the following joint types:

 fixed
 revolute
 spherical
 translational
Comments Displays and allows editing of the connector comments in the Standard User
Interface Subsystem context.
Display: Single and Select to display some or all of the connectors that exist in the current model.
Your template-based product always displays the single connectors. In
addition, you can select to display left or right connectors, or both.

Note: Regardless of which connectors are displayed, changing one of the

connectors in a symmetric pair automatically changes the
corresponding connector. Therefore, your template-based product
always maintains symmetry when you perform modifications using
the Connector Modification Table.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 17
Convert Database to Current Version

Convert Database to Current Version

Tools → Dialog Box → Display → dbox_too_dat_upg Shared Dialog Box
Converts entire database, class table or individual files to the current version of Adams.

For the option: Do the following:

Database Select the database which contains the files to be converted.
Convert Select the scope of the conversion, entire database, class table or single file.
If class table is selected, the following options become available:
Class Select the class (database table) to be converted.
Table Info Select to show the list of cdb tables defined in the configuration files.
If Single File selected, the following options available:
Class Select the class (database table) of the file to be converted.
Filename Select the property file which you want to convert.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

Select to modify:

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

While Curve Manager is active, you cannot perform operations in the main
window. After exiting the tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Convert template format When converting an entire database, template table or individual template file,
selecting this option will ignore the file format of the source file, and use the
selected format instead:

 Ascii - Saves the file in human-readable character format (TeimOrbit).

 Binary - Saves the file in binary format (platform-independent).
 EDS - Saves the file in a platform-independent enhanced dataset format.
18 template_based_common
Contact Definition Table

For the option: Do the following:

Convert TeimOrbit to When converting property files that are supported in both, TeimOrbit and
XML property files XML format, selecting this option will ignore the file format of the source file,
and convert TeimOrbit files to XML.

Currently supported property files classes for XML conversion are:

 spring (and linear spring)

 damper (and linear damper)
 bushing (and linear bushing)
 bumpstop
 reboundstop
 driver controls
Subsystems If selected, subsystem files will also be converted to the XML format.
Database Info Select to display a list of the search directories, including their search level,
database name, and database path.

Notes:  If the selected database is writable, the original (source) database, table directory or
individual file will be backed up at its original location, and replaced by the new entities.
 If the selected database is not writable, the converted files will be written to the current
working directory, maintaining the source database structure and internal database alias
references.

Contact Definition Table

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Contacts → Definition Table

The table like interface provides the user with an easy way of looking at a list of contacts at once and
activating/deactivating an entire selection.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 19
Convert Files in Database

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Select an assembly.
Sort by The table list can be sorted by the following attributes to make it easier to locate and
edit the desired contact(s):

 object name
 activity
 matching name
 object type
 connect type
The sort can be done in ascending or descending order.
List of contacts Displays the contacts in the current assembly.
Attributes The read-only columns Active, Matching Name, Object Type and Connect Type
provide an overview of the current contact definitions.
Activate Selection Allows activating and de-activating individual or multiple contacts by selecting the
corresponding row(s) and hitting the appropriate button.
De-activate Selection
Use the <.> button to select multiple rows.

Convert Files in Database

Tools → Dialog Box → Display → dbox_too_dat_con Shared Dialog Box
Converts old version template or subsystem files from a given database into a given database.

For the option: Do the following:

From Database Name Select the database which contains the old version files.
To Database Name Select the destination database where the new converted files are to be copied
into.
Class of Files Select template for converting template files in the original [Link]
directory.

Select subsystem for converting subsystem files in the original

[Link] directory.
Database Info Select to display a list of the search directories, including their search level,
database name, and database path.
20 template_based_common
Convert Property Files TeimOrbit to XML

Convert Property Files TeimOrbit to XML

Tools → Dialog Box → Display → dbox_too_dat_con Shared Dialog Box
Converts TeimOrbit property files to XML format.

For the option: Do the following:

Convert Select Entire Database or Single File.
If Entire Database selected, the following options available:
From Database Select the database which contains the TeimOrbit files.
To Database Select the destination database where the new converted files are to be copied
into.
If Single File selected, the following options available:
File Type Select the property file type.
Property File Select the property file which you want to convert.
To Database Select the destination database where the new converted file is to be copied
into.
Select to modify:

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

While Curve Manager is active, you cannot perform operations in the main
window. After exiting the tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

Convert v12 'shared' Database Alias

Tools → Dialog Box → Display → dbox_too_ali_con Shared Dialog Box
Converts old style database aliases of type <acar_shared> to the new style aliases
mdids://acar_shared. The new files are stored in a newly created database named as before, that is,
database_name.cdb and the existing database is renamed to database_name _v12.cdb. The
conversion log is perceivable in Command Window which is accessible by pressing F3 key.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 21
Copy File

For the option: Do the following:

Database Name Select the database which contains the old style files.
Database Info Select to display a list of the search directories, including their search level,
database name, and database path.

Copy File
Tools → File Management → Copy Shared Dialog Box
Copies a file on the file system.
Your template-based product provides a run-time interface for copying files on the file system. You can copy
files by specifying from and to directories. In addition, for many files you can take advantage of the CDB
(Car DataBase) structure to facilitate the copying. For example, you can copy a bushing property file from
one database to another. Rather than use the filesystem path (C:\Program
Files\Adams12.0\acar\shared_database.cdb\[Link]), you can use the database alias
C<shared\[Link]>, which you can access by right-clicking.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
22 template_based_common
Create Custom Push Button

For the option: Do the following:

Filename Enter the name of the file you want to copy.
New Filename Enter the destination file name.

Example input:

Filename (as entered in the text box above):

/usr/people/gabriel/[Link]/[Link]/[Link]
New Filename: prototype_2000.tpl
If copying to the old file's directory, the resultant file is
/usr/people/gabriel/[Link]/[Link]/prototype_2000.tpl

You can also right-click and select one of your databases. In this case, you will need
to provide a new file name in the Filename text box, and then select OK.
Alternatively, you can type the path and file name.
To Database Name Select from the available list of databases, which may be some or all of the databases
found in the search list (only the writable databases are valid choices for this
operation).

When you use this option, Adams requires that the file name you specified is located
under a table directory within a database structure ([Link], [Link],
plot_configs.tbl, and so on). This is because the copy file algorithm will attempt to
copy the file to the corresponding table in the selected database. For example,
<shared>/[Link]/MDI_Demo_Vehicle_lt.asy would be copied to
<private>/[Link]/MDI_Demo_Vehicle_lt.asy, if you selected <private> as the
database name.

Note: The new file name will always have the same extension as the old file name. If you input a
different extension for the new file name, your template-based product will modify it to
correspond to the extension of the old file name.

Create Custom Push Button

(Template Builder) Build → Custom Gui → Menu → Push Button → Create Shared Dialog Box
Automatically creates Push Buttons that you customize for a specific template. Push button(s) are added to the
template custom interface and they execute the commands you specify in the Commands text box. Learn
about Customizing Your Product.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 23
Create Custom Sub-Menu

For the option: Do the following:

Label Enter the text that you want to appear on the push button.
Parent Menu Select where you want to place the push button. If you specify adjust then the
push button will appear under the Build menu.
Template Name Select the template for which you want to create custom push button(s).

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Commands Define an Adams View command that will be executed when clicking on the
custom push button. Usually these commands cause your template-based
product to display a custom dialog box.
Rebuild custom menus Select if you want to display the custom entities (in this case, push buttons) at
the bottom of the Build menu in the template-builder environment for testing
purposes.
Menu Info Select if you want information about custom entities already defined in the
current template.

Create Custom Sub-Menu

(Template Builder) Build → Custom Gui → Menu → Sub Menu → Create/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Automatically creates menus that you customize for a specific template. The menus contain only entities that
exist in the template. Your template-based product adds the menus to the template's custom interface. Learn
about Customizing Your Product.

For the option: Do the following:

Label Enter the text that will appear in the custom menu.
Template Name Select the template for which you want to create custom menu(s).

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Rebuild custom menus Select if you want to update the toolbar to include the newly created
menu(s).
Menu Info Select if you want information about custom entities already defined in the
current template.

Create Hardpoint
(Template Builder) Build → Hardpoint → New Shared Dialog Box
Creates a hardpoint. Learn about Hardpoints.
24 template_based_common
Create New Database

For the option: Do the following:

Hardpoint Name Enter the name of the hardpoint.
Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define either the left or the right hardpoint, and your template-based
product creates the corresponding opposite hardpoint by default.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric hardpoint.
Location Enter the three real values that define the location of the hardpoint, separated by
commas.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

Create New Database

Tools → Database Management → Create Database Shared Dialog Box
Creates a Database on the file system and adds it to the bottom of the current database search list. Your
template-based product creates the database tables according to the table information stored in the
configuration (.cfg) files.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 25
Create/Modify 2D Spur Gear Force

For the option: Do the following:

Database Alias Enter the name by which the database will be referenced during the session. This name
may be related or not similar to the actual file system path where it is located.
Database Path Enter the complete file system path for the new database. You can do either of the
following:

 Enter the path directly into the text box. For example, if the path for the prototype
database is located at /usr/people/gabriel/prototype_02.cdb, you enter:
/usr/people/gabriel/prototype_02.cdb

 Select and then select the desired directory.

Database Info Select to display a list of the search directories, including their search level, database
name, and database path.

Create/Modify 2D Spur Gear Force

(Template Builder) Build → Timing Mechanism → Gear → 2D Spur Gear Force → New/Modify

(Adams Driveline Template Builder) Driveline Components → Gear Tool → Gear → 2D Spur Gear Force → New/Modify Shared
Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a 2D Spur Gear Force.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Gear Force Name If creating a gear force, enter a name for it.

If modifying a gear force, enter its database name.

Gear 1 Enter the name of the first gear.

For the option: Do the following:

Force Exponent Specify the force exponent of the contact-force formulation. The force exponent
is typically larger than 1.
Scale Factor Specify the scale factor of the contact-force formulation. The scale factor is in
length units.
Damping Specify the damping coefficient of the contact-force formulation. The damping is
in force units * time units.
Penetration Depth Specify the penetration depth of the contact-force formulation. The penetration
depth is in length units.
Friction Enabled Select one of the following:

 Yes - Turns the friction on.

 No - Turns the friction off, that is, friction parameters = 0.
Static Coefficient Enter the static friction coefficient of the contact, which is the maximum value of
the friction.
Slip Velocity Enter the velocity limit, when the friction is at its maximum.
Dynamic Coefficient Enter the dynamic friction coefficient of the contact.
Transition Velocity Enter the velocity limit, when friction transitions into dynamic friction only.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you
want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Note: The order in which you specify the gears is important because it maintains the parametric
orientation of the gears, therefore ensuring proper meshing. The gear force icon is positioned
at the center of the first gear, Gear 1.

Use the pitch diameter variable (pitch_diameter) of each gear to parameterize the location of
one gear to the location of the other gear, to ensure proper meshing. The gears pitch circles
should tangent.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 27
Create/Modify Adjustable Force

Create/Modify Adjustable Force

(Template Builder) Build → Adjustable Force → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies an adjustable force. Learn about Adjustable Forces.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Adjustable Force Name If creating an adjustable force, enter a name for it.

If modifying an adjustable force, enter its database name.

I/J Part Enter the name of the I part/J part on which the adjustable force will act.
I/J Coordinate Reference Enter a Coordinate Reference to locate the point on the I part/J part at which
the adjustable force will act.
Adjustment Type Select one of the following:

 camber
 toe
 caster
Note: For creating caster type adjustable force first you need to set
suspension parameter array (Build > Suspension Parameters >
Characteristics Array > Set)
I Measure Part Enter the name of the part measured by the adjustable force. For example,
in a toe adjustment, you can set the I measure part to the wheel carrier part.
I Measure Const Frame Enter the construction frame the adjustable force uses to evaluate the
desired quantity (toe or camber or caster). For example, you could enter a
spin axis construction frame.
Measured relative to: Select one of the following:

 Ground coordinate system

 User-entered coordinate system
If you set Measured relative to: to User-entered coordinate system, your template-based product enables the
following two options:
J Measure Part Enter the name of the J part that your template-based product uses to
evaluate the measure.
J Measure Const Frame Specify the construction frame that your template-based product will use
to evaluate the measurement that the adjustable force is to seek as its goal.
28 template_based_common
Create/Modify Aerodynamic Force

For the option: Do the following:

Pattern Enter an array of ones (on) and zeros (off ) to control the sequence of
adjustment for multiple adjustable forces.

For example, if you enter 0,0,1,0, your template-based product performs

four initial static equilibrium simulations for adjusting the suspension, but
the adjustable force acts during the third static equilibrium Simulation only.
You should coordinate the pattern of all forces in all templates.
Desired Value Enter the toe or camber or caster angle.
Stiffness Enter the stiffness used in the adjustable force formulation.
Damping Enter the damping used in the adjustable force formulation.
Lock with Motion Select one of the following:

 yes
 no
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to
any entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based
product displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity
type for which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface,

Create/Modify Aerodynamic Force

(Template Builder) Build → Forces → Aerodynamics → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies an Aerodynamic Force. Learn about GFORCE: Aerodynamic Modeling.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 29
Create/Modify Aerodynamic Force

For the option: Do the following:

Aerodynamics If creating an Aerodynamic force, enter a name for it.
Force Name
If modifying an Aerodynamic force, enter its database name.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Application Part 1 Enter the name of the part on which the aerodynamic force will act.
Application Part 2 Enter the name of the part on which the aerodynamic force will act.

Note: You only require to specify this when you have two point property file
selected and application of second force on the different part. Possible use
case scenario could be 'two body configuration'.
Property File If creating an aerodynamic force, note that the text box by default contains the file
mdids://acar_concept/aero_forces.tbl/aerodynamic_forces_2loc.xml. You can use
this file or select another one from your databases.

If modifying an aerodynamic force, specify the property file that contains the coefficient
data for the aerodynamic force.

The property files for aerodynamic force are classified into four types as shown in
below table:
Property File Type Aerodynamic Force Coefficients Spline Type
Single Point 2D Single location  Drag 2D
 Side Force
 Lift
 Roll
 Pitch
 Yaw
30 template_based_common
Create/Modify Aerodynamic Force

For the option: Do the following:

Two Point 2D Two Locations  Drag 2D
 Side Force Front
 Side Force Rear
 Lift Front
 Lift Rear
 Roll
Single Point 3D Single location  Drag 3D
 Side Force
 Lift
 Roll
 Pitch
 Yaw
Two Point 3D Two Locations  Drag 3D
 Side Force Front
 Side Force Rear
 Lift Front
 Lift Rear
 Roll
Also property files contains float parameters which stores constant value for each
coefficient.
Location 1 (Always enabled for single point and two point 2D/3D aerodynamic force property file)
Dialog Box - F1 Help 31
Create/Modify Aerodynamic Force

For the option: Do the following:

With any of the above options, Location defines the initial Cartesian coordinates of
the origin of the part's Body Coordinate System (BCS) with respect to the Global
Coordinate System (GCS).

If application part 1 is flexible body, select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Located At Flexible Body Node
If you select Delta Location From Coordinate, you must specify the node(s) of the flexible
body at which you wish to react the attachment loads. The attachment location does
not have to be coincident with the selected node(s). Note that you may select more
than one node to react the load (C++ Solver only).
Location 2 (Only enabled for two point 2D/3D property)
32 template_based_common
Create/Modify Aerodynamic Force

For the option: Do the following:

With any of the above options, Location defines the initial Cartesian coordinates of
the origin of the part's Body Coordinate System (BCS) with respect to the Global
Coordinate System (GCS).

If application part 2 is flexible body, select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Located At Flexible Body Node
If you select Delta Location From Coordinate, you must specify the node(s) of the flexible
body at which you wish to react the attachment loads. The attachment location does
not have to be coincident with the selected node(s). Note that you may select more
than one node to react the load (C++ Solver only).
Dialog Box - F1 Help 33
Create/Modify Aerodynamic Force

For the option: Do the following:

Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.

While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window. After
exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
34 template_based_common
Create/Modify Anti-Roll Bar

Create/Modify Anti-Roll Bar

(Template Builder) Build → Anti-Roll Bar → New/Modify
(Standard Interface) Adjust → Anti-Roll Bar

For the option: Do the following:

Anti-Roll Bar Name If creating an anti-roll bar, enter the name of the anti-roll bar.

If modifying an anti-roll bar, enter its database name.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Type If creating an anti-roll bar, select one of the following:

 left/right - Define either the left or the right anti-roll bar part, and your
template-based product creates the corresponding opposite anti-roll bar
part by default.
 single - Define a single anti-roll bar part.
If you select Method tab, Adams Car displays the following options:
Method Select one of the following:

 Simple -The left and right rigid part are connected via a revolute joint and
torsional spring. Supports only left/right symmetry type.
 Beam - Use for high fidelity modelling. Anti-Roll bar will be constructed
using a series of rigid parts that are connected by beam forces.
 FE Part - Use FE part(s) to create an anti-roll bar.
If you select Beam Method, Adams Car displays the following option:
Beam Formulation Select Linear, Nonlinear or String Beam Formulation type.

For more information, see BEAM statements.

Material Select the anti-roll bar material. Your template-based product determines the
mass properties according to the density of the material you selected.
Geometry Select Solid or Hollow (only circular cross-section supported).
Dialog Box - F1 Help 35
Create/Modify Anti-Roll Bar

For the option: Do the following:

Continuous Select if you want to create continuous anti-roll bar for left/right symmetry
type.

If you select continuous option for simple method then left and right rigid
bodies are connected via a revolute joint and torsional spring.

If you select continuous option for beam method then a center part of type
single will be created which will be connected to left and right parts by beam
forces.

This option is not available for FE part method.

Diameter Specify the diameter of the anti-roll bar.
If you select Hollow Geometry, Adams Car displays the following option:
Wall Thickness Specify the wall thickness of the anti-roll bar.
If you select Simple Method, Adams Car displays the following option:
Torsional Stiffness Enter the torsional stiffness for the simple method anti-roll bar.
Damping Ratio Specify the fraction of the stiffness matrix that contributes to the damping
(Stiffness) matrix.
Damping Ratio (Mass) Specify the fraction of the mass matrix that contributes to the damping matrix.
Sprung Mass % Enter percentage contribution of part total mass into sprung mass. (Used only
for SVC event)
If you select Centerline tab, Adams Car displays the following options:
Profile Definition Select Table, Outline or B-Spline to specify the centerline profile of the anti-
roll bar.
If you select Table profile, Adams Car displays the following options:
Insert Will insert the specified numbers of row(s) into location table before the
current selection.
Delete Will delete the specified numbers of row(s) of location table from the current
selection.
If you select Outline profile, Adams Car displays the following option:
Outline Specify the database name of the outline.
If you select B-Spline profile, Adams Car displays the following option:
36 template_based_common
Create/Modify Arm Geometry

For the option: Do the following:

B-Spline Specify the database name of the b-spline.
Color Select a color for the anti-roll bar.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Arm Geometry

(Template Builder) Build → Geometry → Arm → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies arm geometry. Learn about Arm Geometry.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Arm Name If creating arm geometry, enter a name for it.

If modifying arm geometry, enter its database name.

General Part Enter the name of the part that will own the arm geometry.
Coordinate Reference Specify three Coordinate References to define the corners of the triangle
#1/2/3 representing the arm.
Thickness Specify the thickness of the arm geometry.
Color Select a color for the arm geometry graphic.
Calculate Mass Properties Select to calculate the mass properties of the general part.
of General Part
If you select Calculate Mass Properties of General Part, your template-based product enables the following
option:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 37
Create/Modify Bspline Geometry

For the option: Do the following:

Density Select one of the following:

 Material - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from the current
density value for the selected material.
 User-Entered - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from a user-
entered density.
This calculates the mass and inertia based on the dimensions of the arm.
If you set Density to Material, your template-based product displays the following option:
Material Type Select a material type from the list of materials currently defined. When you
select a material, your template-based product uses the density defined for that
material to calculate the general part's mass properties.
If you set Density to User-Entered, your template-based product displays the following option:
Density Value Enter a density that your template-based product will use to calculate the
general part's mass properties.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Bspline Geometry

(Template Builder) Build → Geometry → Bspline → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies B-spline Geometry.
38 template_based_common
Create/Modify Bspline Geometry

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Bspline Name If creating bspline geometry, enter a name for it.

If modifying bspline geometry, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define either the left or the right bspline geometry, and your
template-based product creates the corresponding opposite bspline
geometry by default.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric bspline geometry.
Reference Coordinates Specify Coordinate Reference, to define the control points of the Bspline. You
must enter at least four coordinate references to define a valid bspline
geometry.
Close Select if the bspline geometry should close on itself, that is, connect the last
coordinate reference with the first coordinate reference entered.
Color Select a color for the Bspline geometry graphic.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 39
Create/Modify Bumpstop

For the option: Do the following:

Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.
While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main
window. After exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main
window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Create/Modify Bumpstop
(Template Builder) Build → Forces → Bumpstop → New/Modify
Creates or modifies a bumpstop. Learn about Working with Bumpstops.
40 template_based_common
Create/Modify Bumpstop

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Bumpstop Name If creating a bumpstop, enter a name for it.

If modifying a bumpstop, enter its database name.

Bumpstop Type Select the type of bumpstop:

 Internal - Select this option to create a line-of-sight force, typically used

when the bumpstop is installed internal to a shock or strut.
 External - Select this option to create a force vector, typically used when
the bumpstop is installed separate from a shock or strut.
I Part Enter the name of the I part on which the bumpstop will act.
J Part Enter the name of the J part on which the bumpstop will act.
I Coordinate Reference Specify a Coordinate Reference to locate the point on the I part at which the
bumpstop will act.
If you selected Bumpstop Type: Internal, the following option is shown:
J Coordinate Reference Specify a coordinate reference to locate the point on the J part at which the
bumpstop will act.
If you selected Bumpstop Type: External, the following option is shown:
J Construction Frame Specify a construction frame to locate and orient the plane on the J part at
which the bumpstop will act. The Z-axis of the construction frame defines
the plane normal. Note that the positive Z-axis should point toward the I
Coordinate Reference, though they do not need to be perfectly aligned.
Property File If creating a bumpstop, note that the text box by default contains the file
mdids://acar_shared/[Link]/mdi_0001.bum. You can use
this file or select another one from your databases.

If modifying a bumpstop, specify the property file that contains the force-
deflection relationship for the bumpstop.

Learn About Bumpstop Property Files.

Clearance/Impact Length Select a method to specify when the bumpstop force activates:

 Clearance - Specify the distance of the I coordinate reference can travel

towards the J coordinate reference before the bumpstop force activates.
 Impact Length - Specify how close I coordinate reference can approach
the J coordinate reference before the bumpstop force activates.
Color Select a color for the bumpstop graphic.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 41
Create/Modify Bumpstop

For the option: Do the following:

Bumpstop Diameter Slider Select the diameter of the bumpstop graphic. Note that the slider actually
defines the ratio of the diameter to the length.

Note: Because the bumpstop is not a part itself, and solely defines the
force-displacement relationship between two parts, changing the
bumpstop graphic diameter does not translate into different
bumpstop properties.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.
While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main
window. After exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main
window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
42 template_based_common
Create/Modify Bushing Attachment

Create/Modify Bushing Attachment

(Template Builder) Build → Attachments → Bushing → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a bushing. Learn about Working with Bushings.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Bushing Name If creating a bushing, enter a name for it.

If modifying a bushing, enter its database name.

I Part Enter the name of the part on which the bushing will act.
J Part Enter the name of the part on which the bushing will react.
Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define one of the bushings, and your template-based product creates
the corresponding opposite bushing.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric bushing.
Inactive Select if the bushing will become inactive in the kinematic mode. Generally, a
bushing becomes inactive in kinematic mode if a joint is created which models the
kinematic motion of the bushing, and you want to use the joint in place of the
bushing in the Analysis of the system.
Geometry Length Enter the length of the bushing geometry graphic.
Geometry Radius Enter the radius of the bushing geometry graphic.
Property File If creating a bushing, note that the text box by default contains the file
mdids://acar_shared/[Link]/mdi_0001.bus. You can use this file or select
another one from your databases.

If modifying a bushing, specify the property file that contains the force data for the
bushing.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 43
Create/Modify Bushing Attachment

For the option: Do the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

If you select Located At Flexible Body Node, the attachment will be reacted at the selected
node. It will be located at the selected node and offset by the vector you specify,
relative to the flexible body's Local Body Reference Frame. Note that you may only
select one node.

See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.

If you set Location Dependency to Delta location from coordinate and one or both of the parts are flexible bodies,
the following option is shown:
Selected Node, Select the method to define the attachment reaction node(s). If you select Selected
Closest Node, Node, you must specify the node(s) manually, and the attachment will be hardcoded
Closest Interface to these node IDs. If you select Closest Node, an expression will be used to
Node parameterize the attachment to the closest node on the flexible body. If you select
Closest Interface Node, an expression will be used to parameterize the attachment
to the closest interface node on the flexible body.
44 template_based_common
Create/Modify Bushing Attachment

For the option: Do the following:

Orientation Select one of the following:
Dependency
 Delta Orientation From Coordinate
 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
See a Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.
Preload Enter the initial translational force loading on the bushing, defined along the x-, y-
, and z-axis of the bushing.
Tpreload Enter the initial torsional force loading on the bushing, defined about the x-, y-, and
z-axis of the bushing.
Offset Enter the initial translational displacement of the bushing, defined along the x-, y-,
and z-axis of the bushing.
Roffset Enter the initial rotational displacement of the bushing, defined about the x-, y-,
and z-axis of the bushing.
Stiffness Scale Factor Enter the X, Y, Z translational scale factors for the stiffness components.
(trans)
Stiffness Scale Factor Enter the X, Y, Z rotational scale factors for the stiffness components.
(rot)
Damping Scale Enter the X, Y, Z translational scale factors for the damping components.
Factor (trans)
Damping Scale Enter the X, Y, Z rotational scale factors for the damping components.
Factor (rot)
Tolerance in Select one of the following:

 local - specifies the marker tolerance relative to the bushing's orientation

For the option: Do the following:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.
While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window.
After exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
46 template_based_common
Create/Modify Condition Sensor

Create/Modify Condition Sensor

(Template Builder) Build → Condition Sensors → New/Modify
Defines a condition sensor.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Condition Sensor If creating a condition sensor, enter a name for it.

If modifying a condition sensor, enter its database name.

Variable Enter a database object of type data_element variable or measure solver computed.
Label Enter a label string for the condition sensor. This label string will be used in event files
(.xml) to select a condition sensor for end conditions. Learn about Working with Event
Files (.xml).
Units Select units for the condition sensor. The standard driver interface (SDI) uses this
information to convert the trigger values and error tolerances between different unit
systems. If you select no_units, Adams Car does not perform a conversion.
Scale Factor Enter a scalar real number, which is multiplied to the variable object function by the
SDI. This scale factor is mutually exclusive with predefined unit types, and can be
used to used to enter trigger values and error tolerances in a different units system than
that being used in the model (and therefore calculated by the variable object).
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

Create/Modify Connector Attachment

(Template Builder) Build → Attachments → Connector → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a connector. Learn about Working with Connectors.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 47
Create/Modify Connector Attachment

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes
Connector If creating a connector, enter a name for it.

If modifying a connector, enter its database name.

Bushing Enter the name of the existing bushing you wish to convert to a connector.
If creating a connector, select to create a new bushing.

If modifying a connector, select to modify the associated bushing.

Method Select one of the following:

 joint – The joint will be active, and the bushing will be inactive.
 bushing – The bushing will be active, and the joint will be inactive.
 both – The bushing and joint will both be active.
 none – The bushing and joint will both be inactive.
 kinematic flag – If the subsystem is in kinematic mode, the joint will be
active, and the bushing inactive. If the subsystem is in compliant mode,
the bushing will be active, and the joint will be inactive.
48 template_based_common
Create/Modify Construction Frames

For the option: Do the following:

Joint Type Select one of the following joint types:

 fixed
 revolute
 spherical
 translational
Design Option Select this option to create a new design option that will control the connector
Method. If the design option is evaluates to 0, the Method will be joint. If the
design option evaluates to 1, the Method will be bushing. The design option
will be given the same name as the connector.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Construction Frames

(Template Builder) Build → Construction Frame → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies construction frames. Learn about Construction Frames.
When you want only location and no orientation information, a hardpoint is the correct element to use.
Learn about Hardpoints.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 49
Create/Modify Construction Frames

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Frame If creating a construction frame, enter a name for it.

If modifying a construction frame, enter its database name.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Type Construction frames exist either as symmetric or single. When defining a symmetric
construction frame, either the left or right construction frame may be defined in the
dialog box, with the corresponding opposite construction frame created by default.
Choosing type single allows a nonsymmetric construction frame to be defined.
50 template_based_common
Create/Modify Contact Definition

For the option: Do the following:

Location Select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located At Flexible Body Node
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options
Orientation Select one of the following:

 Delta Orientation From Coordinate

 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis To Point
 Orient Axis Along Line
 User entered values
 Orient About Axis
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
See a Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Contact Definition

(Template Builder) Build → Contact Definitions → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a contact definition. Learn about contact definitions.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 51
Create/Modify Contact Definition

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Contact Name If creating a contact definition, enter a name for it.

If modifying a contact definition, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define either the left or the right contact, and your template-based
product creates the corresponding opposite contact by default.
 single - Define a non-symmetric contact.
Select one of the following options:
I Contact Solid Enter the name of an existing geometry object valid for use in a contact.
I Flexible Body Enter the name of an existing flexible body.
Select one of the following options:
J Contact Solid Enter the name of an existing geometry object valid for use in a contact.
J Flexible Body Enter the name of an existing flexible body.
J Matching Name Enter the name of the object that will be matched either at assembly or runtime.
Road Graphics N/A. This selection will create a contact with the road object after the model has
been assembled.
If you selected J Matching Name & I Flex Body, the following options will be available:
J Object Type Select one of the following:

 Contact Solid
 Flexible Body
Force Display Select to create dynamic force graphics for animation. If this option is selected,
choose the color of the force graphics.
If creating a new contact definition, the following options will be available:
Contact Parameters Select one of the following:

 Create - Define the contact parameters.

 Use Existing - Select an existing contact parameters array.
52 template_based_common
Create/Modify Contact Definition

For the option: Do the following:

Normal Force Type Select either:

 Impact Force - To define the normal force based on an impact using the
IMPACT function.
 Poisson Force - To define the normal force as restitution-based. This option is
not available with Flex Body to Solid and Flex Body to Flex Body type of
contacts.
 User Defined - To define the force based on a User-written subroutine.
Learn about the types of Contact Force Algorithms and also see Learning More about the
Contact Detection Algorithm.
If you select Impact Force, the following four options will be available:
Stiffness Enter a material stiffness that is to be used to calculate the normal force for the
impact model. In general, the higher the stiffness, the more rigid or hard the bodies
in contact are.

Note: When changing the length units in Adams View, stiffnesses in contacts
are scaled by (length conversion factor**exponent). When changing the
force unit, stiffness is only scaled by the force conversion factor.
Force Exponent Adams Solver models normal force as a nonlinear springdamper. If the damping
penetration, below, is the instantaneous penetration between the contacting
geometry, Adams Solver calculates the contribution of the material stiffness to the
instantaneous normal forces as:

STIFFNESS * (PENALTY)**EXPONENT
For more information, see the IMPACT function in the Adams Solver online help.
Damping Enter a value to define the damping properties of the contacting material.
Consider a damping coefficient that is about one percent of the stiffness
coefficient.
Penetration Depth Enter a value to define the penetration at which Adams Solver turns on full damping.
Adams Solver uses a cubic STEP function to increase the damping coefficient from
zero, at zero penetration, to full damping when the penetration reaches the
damping penetration. A reasonable value for this parameter is 0.01 mm. For more
information, see the IMPACT function in the Adams Solver online help.
If you select Poisson Force, the following two options will be available:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 53
Create/Modify Contact Definition

For the option: Do the following:

Penalty Enter a penalty value to define the local stiffness properties between the contacting
material.

A large penalty value ensures that the penetration of one geometry into another
will be small. Large values, however, will cause numerical integration difficulties.
A value of 1E6 is appropriate for systems modeled in Kg-mm-sec. For more
information on how to specify this value, see the Extended Definition for the CONTACT
statement in the Adams Solver online help.

Note: The penalty value of 1.0E+06 is recommended value for users who have
no prior experience with restitution based contacts. Experienced users
will find values that are both smaller and larger that are applicable to
their models.
Restitution Enter the coefficient of restitution, which models the energy loss during contact.
Coefficient
 A value of zero specifies a perfectly plastic contact between the two
colliding bodies.
 A value of one specifies a perfectly elastic contact. There is no energy loss.
The coefficient of restitution is a function of the two materials that are coming into
contact. For information on material types versus commonly used values of the
coefficient of restitution, see the table for the CONTACT statement in the Adams
Solver online help.
If you select User Defined, the following two options will be available:
User function Specify the user parameters to be passed to a User-written subroutine CNFSUB. For
more on user-written subroutines, see the Adams Solver online help.
Routine Specify an alternative library and name for the user subroutine. Learn about
ROUTINE Argument.
The following option is available for all choices:
Friction Force Select to model the friction effects at the contact locations using the Coulomb
friction model, no friction, or as user-defined subroutine. The Coulomb friction
model models dynamic friction but not true stiction.

For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In addition,
read the information for the CONTACT statement in the Adams Solver online help.
If you selected Coulomb for Friction Force, define the following options:
Coulomb Friction Specify whether the friction effects are to be included at run time:

 On
 Off
 Dynamics Only
54 template_based_common
Create/Modify Contact Definition

For the option: Do the following:

Static Coefficient Specify the coefficient of friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is smaller
than the value for Static Transition Vel. For information on material types versus
commonly used values of the coefficient of static friction, see Material Contact
Properties Table.

Excessively large values of Static Coefficient can cause integration difficulties.

Range: Static Coefficient 0

Dynamic Coefficient Specify the coefficient of friction at a contact point when the slip velocity is larger
than the value for Friction Transition Vel.

For information on material types versus commonly used values of the

coefficientof the dynamic coefficient of friction, see Material Contact Properties Table.

Excessively large values of Dynamic Coefficient can cause integration difficulties.

Range: 0 Dynamic Coefficient Static Coefficient

Stiction Transition Enter the stiction transition velocity.
Vel.
For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In addition,
read the information for the CONTACT statement in the Adams Solver online help.

Range: 0 < Static Transition Vel. Friction Transition Vel.

Friction Transition Enter the friction transition velocity.
Vel.
For more on friction in contacts, see Contact Friction Force Calculation. In addition,
read the information for the CONTACT statement in the Adams Solver online help.

Range: Friction Transition Vel. Static Transition Vel. > 0

If you selected User Defined for Friction Force, define the following two options:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 55
Create/Modify Cylinder Geometry

For the option: Do the following:

User function Specify the user parameters to be passed to a user-written subroutine. For more on
user-written subroutines, see Adams Solver online help.
Routine Enter the name of the function to call. The default is CNFSUB.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want
to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Cylinder Geometry

(Template Builder) Build → Geometry → Cylinder → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies cylinder geometry. Learn about Link and Cylinder Geometry.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Cylinder Name If creating cylinder geometry, enter a name for it.

If modifying cylinder geometry, enter its database name.

General Part Enter the name of the part that will own the cylinder geometry.
Construction Frame Specify a construction frame to define the cylinder. Learn about Construction
Frames.
Radius Specify the radius of the cylinder geometry.
Length In Positive Z Enter the offset length of the cylinder geometry in the positive Z direction of
(optional) the selected construction frame.
Length In Negative Z Enter the offset length of the cylinder geometry in the negative Z direction of
(optional) the selected construction frame.
Color Select a color for the cylinder geometry graphic.
Calculate Mass Select to calculate the mass and inertia properties of the general part.
Properties of General
Part
If you select Calculate Mass Properties of General Part, your template-based product enables the following option:
56 template_based_common
Create/Modify Damper

For the option: Do the following:

Density Select one of the following:

 Material - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from the current
density value for the selected material.
 User-Entered - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from a user-
entered density.
If you set Density to Material, your template-based product displays the following option:
Material Type Select a material type from the list of materials currently defined. When you
select a material, your template-based product uses the density defined for that
material to calculate the general part's mass properties.
If you set Density to User-Entered, your template-based product displays the following option:
Density Value Enter a density that your template-based product will use to calculate the
general part's mass properties.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Damper
(Template Builder) Build → Forces → Damper → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a damper. Learn about Working with Dampers.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Damper Name If creating a damper, enter a name for it.

If modifying a damper, enter its database name.

I Part Enter the name of the part on which the damper will act.
J Part Enter the name of the part on which the damper will react.
I Coordinate Reference Specify a Coordinate Reference to locate the point on the I part at which the
damper will act.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 57
Create/Modify Damper

For the option: Do the following:

J Coordinate Reference Specify a hardpoint or a construction frame to locate the point on the J part at
which the damper will act.
Property File If creating a damper, note that the text box by default contains the file name
<shared>/[Link]/mdi_shk_0001.dpr.

If modifying a damper, specify the property file that contains the force-velocity
relationship for the damper.
Color Select a color for the damper graphic.
Damper Diameter Select the diameter of the damper graphic. Note that the slider actually defines
the ratio of the diameter to the length.

Note: Because the damper is not a part itself, and solely defines the force-
velocity relationship between two parts, changing the damper graphic
diameter does not translate into different damper properties.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.
While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window.
After exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
58 template_based_common
Create/Modify Dyno

Create/Modify Dyno
(Adams Driveline Template Builder) Build → Dyno → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a Dyno.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Dyno Name If creating a dyno, enter a name for it.

If modifying a dyno, enter its database name.

Attachment To  Part - Specify a part and a construction frame. Learn about Construction Frames.
Your template-based product creates a marker on the attachment part at the
location and with the same orientation as the construction frame. (Learn about
Markers.) The marker is the J marker of the joint.
 Marker - Specify a marker. The marker is the J marker of the joint.
If you set Attachment To to Part, your template-based product displays the following options:
I Attachment Part Enter the name of the I-part that the dyno should act on.
J Attachment Part Enter the name of the J-part that the dyno should act on.
Coordinate Specify the location and orientation of the dyno by entering the name of a
Reference construction frame.
If you set Attachment To to Marker, your template-based product displays the following options:
I Marker Name Specify the marker that should be used as the I-marker for the dyno.
J Marker Name Specify the marker that should be used as the J-marker for the dyno.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 59
Create/Modify Dyno

For the option: Do the following:

Function Type Select one of the following:

 Series - Specify the function of the dyno as a Fourier Sine series, by specifying the
mean value, order, magnitude, phase shift, and angle multiplier. You also specify
the direction of rotation. See Function Type: Series.
 Constant - The input to the dyno is a constant value. The value will have the
units corresponding to the choice of actuator (angular_velocity when choosing
motion, and torque when choosing torque). See Function Type: Constant.
 Curve - Specify the function of the dyno as a spline depending on time or angle
and angular velocity. You also specify the direction of rotation. See Function Type:
Curve.
 User-Entered - Lets you create a user-specified function. Note that if you want to
specify a velocity function, functions for motions must always use radians. See
Function Type: User-Entered.
If you are working in Adams Driveline and have set the Dyno Type to Torque, the
following options are also available:

 Torque Demand - The driving torque is expressed as a function of the Adams

Solver variable torque_demand. Adams Driveline defines this variable according
to the type of analysis you select.
 Throttle Demand - The driving torque is expressed as a function of engine
rotations per minute (rpm) and the solver variable throttle demand. The output
torque is evaluated using an engine-map property file. See Function Type: Throttle
Demand
Active Set the activity of the dyno to be either on or off.
Geometry Scaling Adjust the size of the dyno geometry.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Ellipsoid Geometry

(Template Builder) Build → Geometry → Ellipsoid → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies Ellipsoid Geometry.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Ellipsoid Name If creating ellipsoid geometry, enter a name for it.

If modifying ellipsoid geometry, enter its database name.

Coordinate Reference Specify the Coordinate References to define the center location of the ellipsoid.
Method Option Select one of the following:

 By Entering Size
 Scaled Off Link
Color Select a color for the ellipsoid geometry graphic.
Calculate Mass Select to calculate the mass and inertia properties of the general part, based on
Properties of General the dimensions of the ellipsoid.
Part
If you select Calculate Mass Properties of General Part, your template-based product enables the following
option:
Density Select one of the following:

 Material - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from the current density
value for the selected material.
 User-Entered - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from a user-entered
density.
If you set Density to Material, your template-based product displays the following option:
Material Type Select a material type from the list of materials currently defined. When you
select a material, your template-based product uses the density defined for that
material to calculate the general part's mass properties.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 61
Create/Modify FE Part

For the option: Do the following:

If you set Density to User-Entered, your template-based product displays the following option:
Density Value Enter a density that your template-based product will use to calculate the general
part's mass properties.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify FE Part
(Template Builder) Build → Parts → FE Part → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies an FE part. Learn about FE Parts.

For the option: Do the following:

FE Part Name If creating an FE part, enter the name of the FE part.

If modifying an FE part, enter its database name.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Type Select one of the following:
(only in create mode)
 left/right - Define either the left or the right FE part, and your template-
based product creates the corresponding opposite FE part by default.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric FE part.
Formulation
Material Select the material. Your template-based product determines the mass properties
according to the density of the material you selected.
Beam Type Specify the specific type of FE Part to be modeled: 3D Beam, 2D Beam XY, 2D
Beam YZ, or 2D Beam ZX.
Damping Ratio Specify the fraction of the stiffness matrix that contributes to the damping
(Stiffness) matrix.
Damping Ratio (Mass) Specify the fraction of the mass matrix that contributes to the damping matrix.
62 template_based_common
Create/Modify FE Part

For the option: Do the following:

Centerline
Define By Select the method to define the FE part's centerline: New B-Spline, Existing B-
Spline, Existing Outline, or Line From Two Points.

Important: An FE Part may not close on itself. When selecting a closed

curve for the centerline the FE Part will behave as if there is a thin gap
between the start and end of the structure.
If you set Define By to New B-Spline, the following options are displayed:
Spline Enter the name for the new Spline.
Locations Specify four or more Coordinate References to define the FE part's centerline. Select
the Generate Spline button to create the spline before proceeding to the Nodes
tab.
External Geometry Select and specify a Shell file if you want to use imported geometry rather than
the default geometry generated based on Section data. The shell will be located
and oriented relative to the FE Part's Centerline_Marker. If the shell was not
generated in this coordinate system, it may not import correctly.
Nodes
Node Label Set the node labels if you want to override the default numbering.
Distance (S) Specify the position along the length of the centerline; 0 is the start and 1 is the
end.

Details about how the number and location of nodes can influence extruded geometry.
Angle (deg) A node's X-axis will be oriented in the direction of the curve's instantaneous
tangent at the node location. For "Angle," specify the rotation about the node's
X-axis defining the orientation of the normal and binormal (that is, the node's
Y and Z axes). If this value is zero Adams will, by default, orient the node
according to the following rules:

 Node's X-axis will be tangent to curve at node's location

 Node's Y-axis and Z-axis will be perpendicular to each other with no twist
angle about X-axis.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 63
Create/Modify FE Part

For the option: Do the following:

Section Specify the Section object that will be used to define the cross-sectional
properties of the FE Part at the node.

Solid geometry creation for the FE Part can also be defined via the Section
definition.

Note: The following section types do not yet support solid geometry
creation (only the centerline geometry will be visible and animate):
• Hollow rectangle
• Hollow circle
• Generic cross-sections where the section will end up as a hollow
geometry. Only closed polyline sections are allowed.
Uniform Section Apply the section defined in the first row to all rows.
Section Editor Opens the Create Section dialog box.
Evenly Distribute Reset all cells in the "Distance (S)" column so as to evenly space the nodes from
Start to End.
Sort by S Sort and rename all nodes so that they are sequentially ordered by their "Distance
(S)" values.

Note: This will overwrite the names of any manually named nodes.
Uniform Angle Set all Angle cells to match the value in the Start row.
Evenly Rotate Reset all cells in the "Angle" column so as to evenly rotate the nodes from Start
to End between the current values in the Start and End rows.
Faceting Tolerance Specify a real value to control the mesh density for visualizing the FE Part. The
default Faceting Tolerance is 300.0. Increasing this value will result in a finer
mesh of triangles, which gives a more accurate representation of curved surfaces.
Increasing the tolerance, however, also increases the memory requirements of the
geometry engine and adds to the computational overhead, which makes it run
slower. Maximum limit is 5000.0.
If you set Define By to New B-Spline, Existing B-Spline, or Existing Outline, the following options are displayed:
Curve Control Points The table will be populated with rows corresponding to each of the spline’s
control points’ positions. All existing nodes/rows will be replaced.
Parameterize Select this option to enforce a persistent link between the curve control point
locations and node locations.
The Contour Plots and Datum Node options are available while modifying the FE part.
Contour Plots Select this checkbox to enable color contour plotting during animation for the
FE Part. The Datum Node can be selected only if the Contour Plots checkbox
is selected.
64 template_based_common
Create/Modify Flexible Body

For the option: Do the following:

Datum Node The color contour plot of "deformation" is defined by the displacement of the
geometry vertices relative to the datum node. By default the datum node is the
node at S=0. To use a different FE Part node please select it here. Note that
during the simulation the colors may appear differently than in post-processing
animation because the entire extent of deformation throughout the simulation
is not yet known, thus the color scale can change.
Preview Select to generate a temporary FE Part. This option is useful for checking the
shape of your geometry near centerline bends or Section transitions.
Color Select a color for the FE Part.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Flexible Body

(Template Builder) Build → Parts → Flexible Body → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a flexible body. Learn about Flexible Bodies and modal flexibility, your template-based
product's method of modeling flexible bodies.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 65
Create/Modify Flexible Body

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Flexible Body Name If creating a flexible body, enter a name for the flexible body part.

If modifying a flexible body, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:
(only in create mode)
 left/right - Define either the left or the right flexible body, and your
template-based product creates the corresponding opposite flexible body by
default.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric flexible body.
 Bulk Data File (BDF) - For a nonlinear flexible body.
Location Dependency Select one of the following:

 User-entered Location
 Delta Location From Coordinate
 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
Orientation Select one of the following:
Dependency
 Delta Orientation From Coordinate
 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis Along Line
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
See a Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.
If you set Type to left or right, your template-based product enables the following options:
66 template_based_common
Create/Modify Friction Element

For the option: Do the following:

Left/Right Modal Select an MNF file that represents the part.
Neutral File
If you set Type to single, your template-based product enables the following option:
Modal Neutral File Select an MNF file that represents the part.
Sprung Mass % Enter percentage contribution of part total mass into sprung mass.

(Used only for SVC event)

If Bulk Data File (BDF) option is selected the following options displayed:
Mass, Force, Length, If the BDF does not specify its modeling units, they must be specified here. If
Time the BDF does specify its modeling units, they will be shown here. If the BDF
units differ from those of the Adams model, Adams View will scale the geometry
and mass properties appropriately in session; however, it does not edit the values
within the BDF to reflect the Adams model units
Color Specify the color to represent the flexible body.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Test Modal Select to display a utility that allows you to generate a modal neutral file from
(only in create mode) Test Modal Model (Universal file format data). For help on translating files, see
the Adams Flex online help.
Select to display the Flexible Body Mode Manager, where you can
visualize/animate mode shapes and perform other operations, such as define the
deformation scale factor, the inertia modeling, or enable/disable modes.
(only in modify mode)

Create/Modify Friction Element

(Template Builder) Build → Friction → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Refer to the documentation on the friction element in the Adams Solver online help.

Note: If you are creating friction on a joint active only in kinematic mode, be aware that when you
select compliant mode, the friction force will be disabled along with the joint.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 67
Create/Modify Gear

Create/Modify Gear
(Adams Driveline Template Builder) Driveline Components → Gear Tool → Spur/Helical Gear Element → New/Modify Shared
Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a Gear.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Gear Name If creating a gear, enter a name for it.

If modifying a gear, enter its database name.

Property File Example Gear Property File.

You can:

 Part - Specify a part and a construction frame. Learn about Construction Frames.
Your template-based product creates a marker on the attachment part at the
location and with the same orientation as the construction frame. (Learn
about Markers.) The marker is the J marker of the joint.
 Marker - Specify a marker. The marker is the J marker of the joint.
If you set Attachment To to Part, your template-based product displays the following options:
Attachment Part Enter the name of the part to which the gear will be constrained.
Coordinate Reference Specify the location and orientation of the gear by entering the name of a
construction frame.
If you set Attachment To to Marker, your template-based product displays the following option:
Coordinate Reference Specify the location and orientation of the gear by entering the name of a marker.
68 template_based_common
Create/Modify Gear

For the option: Do the following:

Geometry tab
Module* Enter the module of the gear. The module is equal to 1/diametral pitch.
Number of Teeth* Enter the number of teeth of the gear. Your template-based product computes the
pitch diameter based on the equation:

pitch diameter = module * number of teeth

Tooth Angle* Enter the tooth angle of the gear. This angle is also referred to as the pressure angle.
Your template-based product uses this angle to specify the tooth profile, which is
based on the involute function.
Helix Angle* Enter the helix angle of the gear. For straight gears, enter 0.

The helix angle must be: -50d helix angle 50d

Gear Width* Enter the width of the gear.
Addendum Factor* Enter the addendum factor. Your template-based product uses this factor to
compute the tip (outer) diameter of gear:

tip diameter = pitch diameter + 2 * module * (addendum factor + addendum

modification coefficient)
Dedendum Factor* Enter the dedendum factor. Your template-based product uses this factor to
compute the root (foot) diameter of the gear:

root diameter = pitch diameter - 2 * module * (dedendum factor - addendum

modification coefficient)
Addendum Mod. Enter the addendum modification coefficient. Your template-based product uses
Coefficient* this coefficient to describe the profile shift of the gear.
Delta Tooth Enter the delta tooth thickness of the gear. This thickness is the deviation of
Thickness* circular thickness at the pitch circle from the standard tooth thickness of an ideal
gear.
Mass Properties tab
Mass* Enter the mass of the gear part.
The part is located in the center of the gear, with the z-axis as the rotational axis.
Ixx/Iyy/Izz* Enter the values that define the principal mass-inertia components of the gear
part.
Ixy/Izx/Iyz* Enter the values that define the deviational (cross-product) mass-inertia
components of the gear part.
CM Location Relative Enter the x, y, and z values of the location offset. You can offset the center of mass
to Part* (optional) and inertia markers of the gear part a specified distance from the gear part's
location.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 69
Create/Modify Gear

For the option: Do the following:

Torsional Spring tab

The following torque function defines the rotational spring-damper:

T = - az * Torsional Stiffness - wz * Torsional Damping

where:

 az - Angular displacement
 wz - Angular velocity
Torsional Stiffness Enter the stiffness of the rotational spring-damper. The stiffness is in force units *
(optional) length units/angle units.
Torsional Damping Enter the damping coefficient of the rotational spring-damper. The damping is in
(optional) force units * length units * time units/angle units.
Fixed Gear Select one of the following:

 Yes - Fixes the gear to the attach part.

 No - Constrains the gear to the attach part with a rotational joint.
Activate Torsional Select one of the following:
Spring (enabled if gear
is not fixed)  Yes - Adds a torsional spring to the rotational joint.

 No - No torque is acting on gear rotational axis.

Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you
want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based product
displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to
display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
70 template_based_common
Create/Modify General Parameter

Note: *Parameter values are stored in the property file. You can only update these values when
Editable is selected.

Create/Modify General Parameter

(Template Builder) Build → General Data Elements → Parameter → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a general parameter. Learn about General Parameters.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
General Parameter Name If creating a general parameter, enter a name for it.

If modifying a general parameter, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define either the left or the right parameter, and your
template-based product creates the corresponding opposite parameter by
default.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric parameter.
Property File Name You can:

For the option: Do the following:

Attribute Name Enter the name of an Attribute from the property file. This name is found
within the datablock specified above.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Create/Modify General Part

(Template Builder) Build → Parts → General Part → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a general part. Learn about General Parts.
72 template_based_common
Create/Modify General Part

For the option: Do the following:

General Part Name If creating a general part, enter the name of the general part.

If modifying a general part, enter its database name.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Type Select one of the following:
(only in create mode)
 left/right - Define either the left or the right general part, and your template-
based product creates the corresponding opposite general part by default.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric general part.
Location Dependency Select one of the following:

 User-entered Location
 Delta Location From Coordinate
 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
With any of the above options, Location defines the initial Cartesian coordinates
of the origin of the part’s Body Coordinate System (BCS) with repect to the Global
Coordinate System (GCS).
Orientation Select one of the following:

 Delta Orientation From Coordinate

For the option: Do the following:

Ixx/Iyy/Izz Enter the values that define the moments of inertia components of the general
part. The inertia reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of mass (CM)
location.
Off-Diagonal Terms Select to display and undisplay the Ixy/Izx/Iyz text boxes.
Sprung Mass % Enter percentage contribution of part total mass into sprung mass. (Used only for
SVC event)
If you select Off-Diagonal Terms, your template-based product displays the following options:
Ixy/Izx/Iyz Enter the values that define the products of inertia components of the general part.
(optional) The inertia reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of mass (CM) location.
CM Location Relative Enter the x, y, and z values of the location offset. You can offset the center of mass
to Part (optional) and inertia markers of the general part a specified distance from the general part's
Body Coordinate System location. Learn about Markers.
If you set Density to Material, your template-based product displays the following option:
Material Type Select a material type from the list of materials currently defined. When you select
a material, your template-based product uses the density defined for that material
to calculate the general part's mass and inertia properties.
If you set Density to User-Entered, your template-based product displays the following option:
Density Value Enter a density that your template-based product will use to calculate the general
part's mass and inertia properties.
Select to display the calculated mass and inertia into the respective fields. See
Calculate Mass dialog box help.

(only in create mode)

Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want
to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify General Spline

(Template Builder) Build → General Data Elements → Spline → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a general spline. Learn more about General Splines.
74 template_based_common
Create/Modify General Spline

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
General Spline Name If creating a general spline, enter a name for it.

If modifying a general spline, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define either the left or the right spline, and your template-based
product creates the corresponding opposite spline by default.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric spline.
Property File Name You can:

 y=f(x)(2D) - Defines the general spline as two dimensional.

 y=f(x,z)(3D) - Defines the general spline as three dimensional.
The type of spline that you create depends on the contents of the property file: you
can create a 2D spline in your model basing it on the Z_DATA or XY_DATA
subblock of the desired property file, but you cannot successfully create a 3D
spline if the spline definition on the property file is two dimensional.
If you set Spline Type to y=f(x)(2D), your template-based product displays the following option:
XY Subblock Name Identify the data subblock in the property file. Data subblocks are enclosed in
parentheses.
If you set Spline Type to y=f(x,z)(3D), your template-based product displays the following option:
XY Subblock Name Identify the data subblock in the property file. Data subblocks are enclosed in
parentheses.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 75
Create/Modify General Variable

For the option: Do the following:

Z Subblock Name Identify the data subblock in the property file. Data subblocks are enclosed in
parentheses.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you
want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based product
displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to
display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Create/Modify General Variable

(Template Builder) Build → General Data Elements → Variable → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a general variable. Learn more about General Variables.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
General Variable Name If creating a general variable, enter a name for it.

If modifying a general variable, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define either the left or the right variable, and your template-
based product creates the corresponding opposite variable by default.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric variable.
76 template_based_common
Create/Modify Input Communicator

For the option: Do the following:

Property File Name You can:

 Use an existing property file by specifying the name of the property file that
contains the parameter values of the component.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
When you specify a property file, your template-based product
automatically updates the dialog box with the values from the property file.
 Create a new property file by specifying a new name. When you specify a
new name, your template-based product displays the database path that it
will use to create the new file.
Your template-based product always creates a new property file in the default
writable database.
Datablock Name Enter the name of a data block from the property file. Data blocks are enclosed
in square brackets within the property file.
Attribute Name Enter the name of an Attribute from the property file. This name is found within
the datablock specified above.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Create/Modify Input Communicator

(Template Builder) Build → Communicator → Input → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies an input communicator.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 77
Create/Modify Input Communicator

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Input Communicator Name If creating a communicator, enter a name for it.

If modifying a communicator, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - When defining a symmetric input communicator, you can

define either the left or right communicator. Your template-based
product creates the corresponding opposite communicator.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric communicator. Because some entity
classes do not have symmetry, your template-based product defaults
Type to single and disables it.
If modifying a communicator, note that this text box is disabled, because you
cannot change the type after the communicator is defined.
Matching Name(s) Enter one or more identifiers for this input. One of these identifiers must
be identical to a matching name identifier for the corresponding output
communicator. If left blank, the matching name defaults to the input
communicator name.

When modifying a communicator, when you select an input communicator

variable for the input communicator name, your template-based product
automatically updates the Matching Name(s) text box with the
corresponding value(s).
Entity Select an entity class for the input communicator.

If modifying a communicator, note that this text box is disabled, because you
cannot change the entity class to which the communicator refers after the
communicator is defined.
From Minor Role Specify the communicator minor role for this input, which should match the
minor role of a corresponding output. The minor role any, matches to any
output, regardless of its minor role. If minor role = inherit, your template-
based product determines the minor role from the role of the subsystem
owning the input.
If you set Minor Role to parameter integer or parameter real, your template-based product enables the following
option:
78 template_based_common
Create/Modify Instrumentation

For the option: Do the following:

Initial Value Enter the initial value for the parameter input communicator.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to
any entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based
product displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity
type for which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
List Outputs Select to display a list of output communicators. This option is useful when
you work on many templates simultaneously, because it allows you inspect
the communicators on other open templates or subsystems.

Create/Modify Instrumentation
(Template Builder) Build → Instrumentation → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies an instrumentation. Learn about Instrumentation.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Instrumentation Name If creating an instrumentation, enter a name for it.

If modifying an instrumentation, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define either the left or the right instrumentation, and your
template-based product creates the corresponding opposite instrumentation
by default.
 single - Define a non-symmetric instrumentation.
Sensor Type Select one of the following:
 Acceleration
 Height (w.r.t. tire ref )
 Ride Height
 StringPot
 Velocity
Dialog Box - F1 Help 79
Create/Modify Instrumentation

For the option: Do the following:

Tire Compression Option is only available when sensor type StringPot selected.
Laser
Select one of the following :
 Yes
 No
If yes is selected this will add additional sensor's lumped mass to the model to
calculate tire compression or wheel deflection.
Ay Calculation Option is only available when sensor type Velocity selected.
Method
Select one of the following:
 Corrected for roll and pitch. Ay in body frame, corrected with respect to roll
and pitch (Ay as Adams measures)
 Uncorrected for roll and pitch. Ay in body frame, uncorrected (Ay as an
accelerometer would measure)
This will calculate lateral acceleration (an additional request "vehicle statistics"
added at I location) with and without accelerometer gravity effect.
By default (option 1) the acceleration is output without gravity effects. This
acceleration is measured in the body reference frame. Option 2 corresponds to
acceleration as an accelerometer would measure. This value is higher than that
from option 1, because it contains an additional component due to angular
orientation of the body, roughly equal to sin(Roll).
Select one of the following options:
I matching Name Enter the name of the object that will be matched either at assembly or runtime.
I Reference Part Enter the name of an existing part or flexible body.
If you select sensor type as Ride height, Stringpot or Velocity following option will be available.
Select one of the following options:
J matching Name Enter the name of the object that will be matched either at assembly or runtime.
J Reference Body Enter the name of an existing part or flexible body.
Minor Role Select the minor role for the instrumentation object if 'I Matching Name' or 'J
Matching Name' option selected.
I Location (for all Sensor type)
80 template_based_common
Create/Modify Instrumentation

For the option: Do the following:

Location Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
If one or both of the I and J parts are flexible bodies, select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Located At Flexible Body Node
If you select Delta Location From Coordinate, you must specify the node(s) of the
flexible body at which you wish to react the attachment loads. The attachment
location does not have to be coincident with the selected node(s). Note that you
may select more than one node to react the load (C++ Solver only).

If you select Located At Flexible Body Node, the attachment will be reacted at the
selected node. It will be located at the selected node and offset by the vector you
specify, relative to the flexible body's Local Body Reference Frame. Note that you
may only select one node.

See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.

J Location (for sensor type as Ride height, Stringpot (without tire compression) or Velocity)
Dialog Box - F1 Help 81
Create/Modify Instrumentation

For the option: Do the following:

Location Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
If one or both of the I and J parts are flexible bodies, select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Located At Flexible Body Node
If you select Delta Location From Coordinate, you must specify the node(s) of the
flexible body at which you wish to react the attachment loads. The attachment
location does not have to be coincident with the selected node(s). Note that you
may select more than one node to react the load (C++ Solver only).

If you select Located At Flexible Body Node, the attachment will be reacted at the
selected node. It will be located at the selected node and offset by the vector you
specify, relative to the flexible body's Local Body Reference Frame. Note that you
may only select one node.

See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.

If you select sensor type as Stringpot and tire compression as Yes following option will be available.
Inside Location
Offset from wheel Enter wheel carrier location from wheel center location
center
Outside Location
Offset from wheel Enter body side location from wheel center
center
Laser Properties
Swivel Height Enter swivel height
Mass Enter mass of the following laser assembly parts:

 Platform
 Data cable
 Inside Laser
 Outside Laser
 Anti Rotation Support
82 template_based_common
Create/Modify Interface Part

For the option: Do the following:

If you select sensor type as Velocity following option will be available.
Reference Frame
Coordinate Reference Enter a hardpoint or construction frame where sideslip angle to be calculated.

If hardpoint selected then the marker will create at that location with global
orientation 0.0, 180.0, 0.0. If construction frame selected then marker created
will orient as per the construnction frame's orientation.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Note: For Velocity sensor I location and J location must be apart.

Create/Modify Interface Part

(Template Builder) Build → Parts → Interface Part → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies an interface part. Learn about Interface Parts.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Interface Part Name If creating an interface part, enter a name for it.

If modifying an interface part, enter its database name.

Type Select the type of interface part you want to create.
(only in create mode)
Dialog Box - F1 Help 83
Create/Modify Joint Attachment

For the option: Do the following:

Flexible Body Enter the database name of a flexible body part. Your template-based product
connects the interface part(s) to the specified flexible body through a fixed joint at
the node ID location you specify.
Left/Right/ Node Id Select the node ID to use for the location parameterization of the interface part:
right-click the text box, point to Pick Flexbody Node, and then select the node
from the model.
Geometry Length Specify the radius of the ellipsoid that represents the interface part.
Color Select a color for the interface part.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want
to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Joint Attachment

(Template Builder) Build → Attachments → Joint → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a joint attachment. Learn about Joints.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Joint Name If creating a joint, enter a name for it.

If modifying a joint, enter its database name.

I/J Part Enter the name of the i part/j part on which the joint will act.
Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define either the left or the right joint, and your template-based
product creates the corresponding opposite joint by default (for example,
wheel bearing).
 single - Define a nonsymmetric joint (for example, steering column universal
joint).
84 template_based_common
Create/Modify Joint Attachment

For the option: Do the following:

Joint Type Select the type of joint you want to use between the two parts.

Note: The lower part of this dialog box changes based on the type of joint
you select. Types of Joints explains the options available for the different
types of joints.
Active Select if the joint will only be active in the kinematic mode. Generally, a joint
becomes inactive in dynamic mode if a bushing is created which models both
motion and stiffness/damping of the two parts, and the joint is used only in the
kinematic (motion) Analysis.
Location Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
If one or both of the I and J parts are flexible bodies, select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Located At Flexible Body Node
If you select Delta Location From Coordinate, you must specify the node(s) of the
flexible body at which you wish to react the attachment loads. The attachment
location does not have to be coincident with the selected node(s). Note that you
may select more than one node to react the load (C++ Solver only).

If you select Located At Flexible Body Node, the attachment will be reacted at the
selected node. It will be located at the selected node and offset by the vector you
specify, relative to the flexible body's Local Body Reference Frame. Note that you
may only select one node.

See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.

If you set Location Dependency to Delta location from coordinate and one or both of the parts are flexible
bodies, the following option is shown:
Selected Node, Closest Select the method to define the attachment reaction node(s). If you select
Node, Closest Interface Selected Node, you must specify the node(s) manually, and the attachment will
Node be hardcoded to these node IDs. If you select Closest Node, an expression will
be used to parameterize the attachment to the closest node on the flexible body.
If you select Closest Interface Node, an expression will be used to parameterize
the attachment to the closest interface node on the flexible body.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 85
Create/Modify Joint Force Actuator

For the option: Do the following:

To set the orientation of the joint, see Types of Joints for explanation of the options available.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to enter friction properties for your joint. If you are creating a new joint,
first select Apply to register the joint in the database. Displays the Create/Modify
Friction Element dialog box.

You can create friction for the following types of joints:

 Translational
 Revolute
 Cylindrical
 Universal
 Spherical
 Hooke

Create/Modify Joint Force Actuator

(Template Builder) Build → Actuators → Joint Force → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a joint-force actuator. Learn about Joint-Force Actuators.
86 template_based_common
Create/Modify Joint Force Actuator

For the option: Do the following:

Actuator Name If creating a joint force actuator, enter a name for it.

If modifying a joint force actuator, enter its database name.

Joint Enter the name of the database joint used in the definition of the Single-Component
Force.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

You can enter a joint from three options. See Options for Joint.

The number of single-component forces that your template-based product creates

depends on the type of joint you select:

 Single joint - Creates a force of type single located on the joint.

 Left/right joint - Creates corresponding left and right single-component forces.
The following option changes, depending on the type of joint you selected in the Joint text box.
Type of Freedom If you selected a cylindrical joint, select to create a revolute or translational single-
component force.
Application Enter a string for the application area.
(optional)
Identifier (optional) Enter a string for the identifier.
Left/Right/ Enter the function that defines the left/right single-component force created by the
Function actuator.

If you selected a joint of type single, you define only one function for the force that
will be created.
Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For
information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.
Force Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the force limits of the actuator(s).
(optional)
Displacement Enter a numerical string that defines the displacement limits of the actuator(s).
Limits (optional)
Velocity Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the velocity limits of the actuator(s).
(optional)
Acceleration Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the acceleration limits of the actuator(s).
(optional)
Dialog Box - F1 Help 87
Create/Modify Joint Motion Actuator

For the option: Do the following:

Units (optional) Enter a literal string to identify the units used in the actuator definition. This string
is currently not used.
Active Select one of the following:

 on - Actuator is active.
 off - Actuator is not active.
You can also use the Actuator Set Activity dialog box to define the activity of any
actuator.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want
to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Note: The limits are not used in the current version of your template-based product. They are
optional and create string variables under the actuator user-defined element (ude) definition;
the same applies to the unit, application, and identifier strings.

Create/Modify Joint Motion Actuator

(Template Builder) Build → Actuators → Joint Motion → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a joint motion actuator. Learn about Joint-Motion Actuators.
88 template_based_common
Create/Modify Joint Motion Actuator

For the option: Do the following:

Actuator Name If creating a joint motion actuator, enter a name for it.

If modifying a joint motion actuator, enter its database name.

Joint Enter the name of the database joint used in the definition of the motion generator.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

You can enter a joint from three options. See Options for Joint.

The type of motion generators that your template-based product creates depends
on the type of joint you select:

 Single joint - Creates a motion of type single located on the joint.

 Left/right joint - Creates corresponding left and right motion generators.
The following option changes, depending on the type of joint you selected in the Joint text box.
Type of Freedom If you selected a cylindrical joint, select to create a revolute or translational motion
generator.
Application Enter a string for the application area.
(optional)
Identifier (optional) Enter a string for the identifier.
Left/Right/ Enter the function that defines the motion generator(s) the actuator(s) created.
Function
If you selected a joint of type single, you define only one function for the force that
will be created.
Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For
information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.
Time Derivative Select a time derivative.
Force Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the force limits of the actuator(s).
(optional)
Displacement Enter a numerical string that defines the displacement limits of the actuator(s).
Limits (optional)
Velocity Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the velocity limits of the actuator(s).
(optional)
Acceleration Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the acceleration limits of the actuator(s).
(optional)
Dialog Box - F1 Help 89
Create/Modify Leaf Spring

For the option: Do the following:

Units (optional) Enter a literal string to identify the units used in the actuator definition. This string
is currently not used.
Active Select one of the following:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Leaf Spring

Template Builder) Build → Leaf Spring → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a leaf spring..

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Leaf Spring Name If creating a leaf spring, enter a string that defines its name.

If modifying a leaf spring, select a part of the leaf spring parts.

Leaf Spring Select a leaf spring property file (.ltf ).
Property
90 template_based_common
Create/Modify Leaf Spring

For the option: Do the following:

Select to display the contents of the property file in the Information window.

Select to modify the leaf spring property file in the Leaf Spring Editor.

The following toggle button is available if major role of template is "leaf_spring".

Include Axle If toggle button is selected then mount part ("mt[lr]_axle") and input communicator
Connection (ci[lr]_axle) will be created. This mount part is connected to leafseat through
bushing.

By default, toggle button is unselected, an output communicator

("co[lr]_leaf_to_axle") of type mount will be created. This will be used to
communicate with the mount part (axle) from the suspension template.
The following field is active if major role of template is "suspension".
Axle Part Specify the part that Adams Car should attach to the center of the leaf
("lf[lr]_leafseat").
Coordinate Enter the coordinate reference locations that will define the front and rear connection
References points to the chassis. In modify mode, it is only possible to modify the locations
themselves, not the references.
Connection Enter the bushing property files that define the three bushings in the leaf spring
Specification model. These bushings connect the leaf spring to the frame, leaf spring to the shackle,
and shackle to the frame. In modify mode, it is only possible to modify the property
themselves.
Color Select the color for the nonlinear beam graphics.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 91
Create/Modify Link Geometry

For the option: Do the following:

If you are modifying a leaf spring, the following field is active:
Regenerate Leaf Select from the following options:
Spring Topology
 Yes: Regenerates leaf spring topology
 No: Do not regenerate leaf spring topology
 Auto: Let Adams Car determine whether topology should be regenerated
This option gives the user control over the process of regenerating the leaf spring
topology. For example, by selecting the “Auto” option, the Adams Car will not
regenerate only if the color or axle part are changed.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Link Geometry

(Template Builder) Build → Geometry → Link → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies link geometry. Learn about Link and Cylinder Geometry.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Link Name If creating link geometry, enter a name for it.

If modifying link geometry, enter its database name.

General Part Enter the name of the part that will own the link geometry.
Coordinate Specify two Coordinate References to define the ends of the link.
Reference #1/2
Radius Specify the radius of the link geometry.
Color Select a color for the link geometry graphic.
92 template_based_common
Create/Modify Loading

For the option: Do the following:

Calculate Mass Select if you want to calculate the mass and inertia properties of the general part.
Properties of
General Part
If you select Calculate Mass Properties of General Part, your template-based product enables the following option:
Density Select one of the following:

 Material - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from the current density
value for the selected material.
 User-Entered - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from a user-entered
density.
If you set Density to Material, your template-based product displays the following option:
Material Type Select a material type from the list of materials currently defined. When you select a
material, your template-based product uses the density defined for that material to
calculate the general part's mass properties.
If you set Density to User-Entered, your template-based product displays the following option:
Density Value Enter a density that your template-based product will use to calculate the general
part's mass properties.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Loading
(Template Builder) Build → Loading → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a loading object. Learn about Loading.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 93
Create/Modify Loading

For the option: Do the following:

Loading Name If creating a Loading object, enter a new name.

If modifying a Loading object, enter loading part database name.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

If you select Part tab, your template-based product displays the following options:
Loading Type Select one of the following:

 Cargo - Defines the loading type as cargo, which has default location type as 'cg'.
 Occupant - Defines the loading type as occupant.
If you set Loading Type to Occupant, your template-based product displays the following option:
Location Type Select one of the following:

 cg - The occupant CG is placed at the specified location.

 h-point - The occupant CG is offset from the specified location.
If you set Location Type to h-point, your template-based product displays the following options:
Occupant Type Select one of the following:

 NHTSA - The CG is offset by distance {-62.55,0.0,181.8}mm

 User Defined - The occupant CG is offset by user specified distance.
H-Point to CG Enter the x, y, and z values of the CG offset.
Distance
Location Select one of the following:
Dependency
 User-entered Location
 Delta Location From Coordinate
 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
With any of the above options, Location defines the initial Cartesian coordinates of
the origin of the part's Body Coordinate System (BCS) with respect to the Global
Coordinate System (GCS).
94 template_based_common
Create/Modify Loading

For the option: Do the following:

Orientation Select one of the following:
Dependency
 Delta Orientation From Coordinate
 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis Along Line
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
See a Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.
Mass Enter the mass of the loading part.
Ixx/Iyy/Izz Enter the values that define the moments of inertia components of the loading part.
The inertia reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of mass (CM) location.
Off-Diagonal Select to display and undisplay the Ixy/Izx/Iyz text boxes.
Terms
If you select Off-Diagonal Terms, your template-based product displays the following options:
Ixy/Izx/Iyz Display/enter the values that define the products of inertia components of the
(optional) loading part. The inertia reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of mass
(CM) location.
CM Location Enter the x, y, and z values of the location offset. You can offset the center of mass
Relative to Part and inertia markers of the loading part a specified distance from the loading part's
(optional) Body Coordinate System location. Learn about Markers.

This field will be non-editable if you select Location type as h-point.

If you select Attachment tab, your template-based product displays the following options:
Attachment Select one of the following:

 Joint - Fixed joint is created between loading and mount (attachment) part
 Bushing - Bushing is created between loading and mount (attachment) part
If template major role is loading, your template-based product displays the following option:
Matching Name Enter identifier for this input. Identifier must be identical to a matching name
identifier for the corresponding output communicator. If left blank, the matching
name defaults to the loading name.
If template major role is loading, your template-based product displays the following option:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 95
Create/Modify Loading

For the option: Do the following:

Attachment Part Enter the name of the part on which the attachment will act/react.
If you select Bushing, your template-based product displays the following options:
Add Bushing Select to add additional bushing between loading and mount (attachment) part
If creating or adding additional bushing while modifying, your template-based product displays the following
option:
Bushing Suffix Enter the suffix for bushing. Suffix will be appended to loading name for creating a
bushing.
If modifying, your template-based product displays the following option:
Bushing Name Enter the suffix for bushing. Suffix will be appended to loading name for creating a
bushing.
If modifying, your template-based product displays the following option:
Bushing Name Displays its database name.
Preload Enter the initial translational force loading on the bushing, defined along the x-, y-,
and z-axis of the bushing.
Tpreload Enter the initial torsional force loading on the bushing, defined about the x-, y-, and
z-axis of the bushing.
Offset Enter the initial translational displacement of the bushing, defined along the x-, y-,
and z-axis of the bushing.
Roffset Enter the initial rotational displacement of the bushing, defined about the x-, y-, and
z-axis of the bushing.
Property File If creating a bushing, note that the text box by default contains the file
mdids://acar_shared/[Link]/mdi_0001.bus. You can use this file or select
another one from your databases.

If modifying a bushing, specify the property file that contains the force data for the
bushing.
Location Select one of the following:
Dependency
 Delta Location From Coordinate
 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
96 template_based_common
Create/Modify Loading

For the option: Do the following:

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.
While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window. After
exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Note: The loading object is created as a single entity and hence doesn't supports symmetric options.

Create/Modify Loading Configuration

(Template Builder) Build → Loading → Configuration → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a loading configuration. Learn about Loading Configuration.

For the option: Do the following:

Configuration If creating a Loading Configuration, enter the name of the Loading Configuration.
Name
If modifying a Loading Configuration, select the desired loading configuration from
the list.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

> Include/Add the selected loading object(s) from available loading object(s) table into
current configuration.
< Exclude/Remove the selected loading object(s) from the current configuration.

Create/Modify Marker
(Template Builder) Build → Marker → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies markers. Learn about Markers.

For the option: Do the following:

Marker If creating a marker, enter a name for it.

If modifying a marker, enter its database name.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Type Select one of the following:
(only in create
mode)  left/right - Define one of the markers, and your template-based product creates
the corresponding opposite marker.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric marker.
Part -
98 template_based_common
Create/Modify Mount Part

For the option: Do the following:

Location Select one of the following:
Dependency
 User-entered Location
 Delta Location From Coordinate
 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
Orientation Select one of the following:
Dependency
 Delta Orientation From Coordinate
 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis Along Line
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
See a Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Mount Part

(Template Builder) Build → Parts → Mount → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a mount part. Learn about Mount Parts.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 99
Create/Modify Nonlinear Beam

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Mount Name If creating a mount part, enter a name for it.

If modifying a mount part, enter its database name.

Coordinate Reference Enter a Coordinate Reference to define the location for the mount part and the fixed
joint related to it.

The type of the coordinate reference also defines the type of the mount. If you
enter a left or right coordinate reference, your template-based product creates a
symmetric mount part pair (that is, both a left and a right mount part). If you
enter a single coordinate reference, your template-based product creates a
nonsymmetric (single) mount part.
From Minor Role Select a minor role for the mount part.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which
you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Nonlinear Beam

(Template Builder) Build → Parts → Nonlinear Beam → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a nonlinear beam.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Nonlinear Beam Name If creating a nonlinear beam, enter a string that defines its name.

If modifying a nonlinear beam, enter its database name.

Beam Method Select a beam method. Default is set to Discrete Flexible Link.
100 template_based_common
Create/Modify Nonlinear Beam

For the option: Do the following:

Coordinate References Enter the points that define the ends of the cylinders that comprise the
(available in create mode nonlinear beam. For every two coordinates you enter, your template-based
only) product defines a segment of the nonlinear beam. The series of hardpoints or
construction frames you enter in the Coordinate Reference text box defines a series
of segments. This series of segments comprise the chain that is the nonlinear
beam.
Shape Select a shape for the beam.

 cylindrical
 rectangular
Properties Select a mass property method:

 Auto Calculate
 User Entered
Type of Beam  flexible
 rigid
If you set Shape to cylindrical, your template-based product enables the following options:
Outer Radius Specify the outer radius of the nonlinear beam.
Inner Radius Specify the inner radius of the nonlinear beam.
If you set Shape to rectangular, your template-based product enables the following options:
Height Specify the height of the nonlinear beam.
Width Specify the width of the nonlinear beam.
If you set Properties to User Entered, your template-based product enables the following options:
Ixx Enter the area moment of inertia.
Iyy Enter the area moment of inertia.
Izz Enter the area moment of inertia.
Area Enter the cross-sectional area.
If you set Type of Beam to flexible, your template-based product enables the following option:
Damping Ratio Enter the damping ratio for the beam elements for the flexible nonlinear beam.
Material Type Select the nonlinear beam material. Your template-based product determines
the mass properties according to the current density for the material you
selected.
Beam Formulation Specifies the theory to be used to define the force this element will apply. By
default the LINEAR theory is used. If the NONLINEAR option is used, the
full non linear Euler-Bernoulli theory is used. If the STRING option is used, a
simplified non linear theory is used. The simplified non linear theory may speed
up your simulations with little performance penalties.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 101
Create/Modify Nonlinear Beam

For the option: Do the following:

If FE Part method is selected, the following options will be displayed:
Coordinate References Enter the points that define the ends of the cylinders that comprise the
(available in create mode nonlinear beam. For every two coordinates you enter, your template-based
only) product defines a segment of the nonlinear beam. The series of hardpoints or
construction frames you enter in the Coordinate Reference text box defines a series
of segments. This series of segments comprise the chain that is the nonlinear
beam.
Shape Select a shape for the beam.

 cylindrical
 rectangular
Properties Select a mass property method:

 Auto Calculate
 User Entered
If you set Shape to cylindrical, your template-based product enables the following options:
Outer Radius Specify the outer radius of the nonlinear beam.
Inner Radius Specify the inner radius of the nonlinear beam.
If you set Shape to rectangular, your template-based product enables the following options:
Height Specify the height of the nonlinear beam.
Width Specify the width of the nonlinear beam.
Damping Ratio Enter the damping ratio as a function of stiffness.
(Stiffness)
Damping Ratio (Mass) Enter the damping ratio as a function of mass.
Evenly Spaced Nodes Select to evenly space the nodes.
If you set Properties to User Entered, your template-based product enables the following options:
Iyy Enter the area moment of inertia.
Izz Enter the area moment of inertia.
Iyz Enter the area moment of inertia.
Jxx Enter the area moment of inertia.
Area Enter the cross-sectional area.
102 template_based_common
Create/Modify Outline Geometry

For the option: Do the following:

Material Type Enter the material type.
Color Select the color for the nonlinear beam graphics.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Outline Geometry

(Template Builder) Build → Geometry → Outline → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies Outline Geometry.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Outline Name If creating outline geometry, enter a name for it.

If modifying outline geometry, enter its database name.

General Part Enter the name of the part that will be associated with the outline geometry.
Reference Coordinates Specify Coordinate References, separated by commas, to define the vertices of the
outline. You must enter at least two coordinate references to define a valid outline
geometry.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 103
Create/Modify Output Communicator

For the option: Do the following:

Close Select if the outline geometry should close on itself, that is, connect the last
coordinate reference with the first coordinate reference entered.
Color Select a color for the outline geometry graphic.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Output Communicator

(Template Builder) Build → Communicator → Output → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies an output communicator.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Output Communicator If creating an output communicator, enter a name for it.
Name
If modifying an output communicator, enter its database name.
Matching Name(s) Enter one or more identifiers for this output. One of these identifiers must be
identical to a matching name identifier for the corresponding input. If you leave
it blank, the matching name defaults to the output communicator name.
Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - When defining a symmetric output communicator, you can

define either the left or right communicator. Your template-based product
creates the corresponding opposite communicator.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric communicator. Because some entity classes
do not have symmetry, your template-based product defaults Type to single
and disables it.
If modifying a communicator, note that this text box is disabled, because you
cannot change the type after the communicator is defined.
104 template_based_common
Create/Modify Parameter Variable

For the option: Do the following:

Entity Select an entity class for the output communicator.

If modifying a communicator, note that this text box is disabled, because you
cannot change the entity class the communicator refers to after the
communicator is defined.
To Minor Role Specify the minor role for this output, which should match the minor role of a
corresponding input. The minor role any, matches to any input, regardless of its
minor role. If minor role is inherit, your template-based product determines the
minor role from the role of the subsystem owning the output.
Object name Enter the name of a database object, of the selected Entity class. Note that you
may use an expression in order to parameterize the output communicator.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
List Inputs Select to display a list of input communicators. This option is useful when you
work on many templates simultaneously, because it allows you inspect the
communicators on other open Templates, Subsystems, or test rigs.

Create/Modify Parameter Variable

(Template Builder) Build → Parameter Variable → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a parameter variable.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 105
Create/Modify Parameter Variable

For the option: Do the following:

Parameter Variable Name If creating a parameter variable, enter a name for it.

If modifying a parameter variable, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:
(only in create mode)
 left/right - Define either the left or the right parameter variable, and your
template-based product creates the corresponding opposite parameter
variable by default.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric parameter variable.
String/Integer/Real Value Enter a value for the parameter variable. Make sure that the value is of the same
type as the option displayed. For example, if the option is Integer, enter an
integer value.
If you are creating or modifying a parameter variable of type real, your template-based product displays the
following option:
Units Select a unit.
Hide from standard user Select to hide the parameter variable from standard users, preventing them
from accessing it from the Modify Parameter Variable dialog box in Standard
Interface.

The parameter variables' database names reflect their visibility status:

 A hidden parameter variable has a ph[lrs]_* prefix.

 A visible parameter variable has a pv[lrs]_* prefix.
106 template_based_common
Create/Modify Point Force Actuator

For the option: Do the following:

If you are creating or modifying a parameter variable of type integer, your template-based product displays
the following option:
Custom Macro Select a macro from the database. This is useful to execute list of Adams View
commands depending on the value of the parameter variable. The custom macro
gets executed when you modify parameter variable of type integer in the
Standard Interface. This field is non editable, preventing standard users from
accessing it from the Modify Parameter Variable dialog box in Standard Interface.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Point Force Actuator

(Template Builder) Build → Actuators → Point Force → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a point-force actuator. Learn about point-force actuators.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Actuator Name If creating a point force actuator, enter a name for it.

If modifying a point force actuator, enter its database name.

Force Orientation Select one of the following:

 Line of Sight
 Moving with Body
 Space Fixed
I Part/J Part Enter the name of the body that the force will act upon.
Application (optional) Enter a string for the application area.
Identifier (optional) Enter a string for the identifier.
Function Enter the function that defines the translational force.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 107
Create/Modify Point Force Actuator

For the option: Do the following:

Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For
information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.
Force Limits (optional) Enter a numerical string that defines the force limits of the actuator(s).
Displacement Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the displacement limits of the actuator(s).
(optional)
Velocity Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the velocity limits of the actuator(s).
(optional)
Acceleration Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the acceleration limits of the actuator(s).
(optional)
Units (optional) Enter a literal string to identify the units used in the actuator definition. This
string is currently not used.
Active Select one of the following:

 on: Actuator is active.

 off: Actuator is not active.
You can also use the Actuator Set Activity dialog box to define the activity of any
actuator.
If you set Force Orientation to "Line of Sight", the following options are shown:
I/J Coordinate Reference Enter a Coordinate Reference to locate the point on the I part/J part at which
the single component force will act.
If you set Force Orientation to "Moving with Body" or "Space Fixed", the following options are shown:
Location Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
If you set Location Dependency to "Delta location from coordinate" and one or both of the parts are flexible
bodies, the following option is shown:
108 template_based_common
Create/Modify Point Force Actuator

For the option: Do the following:

Selected Node, Closest Select the method to define the attachment reaction node(s).
Node, Closest Interface
Node  If you select Selected Node, you must specify the node(s) manually, and
the attachment will be hardcoded to these node IDs.
 If you select Closest Node, an expression will be used to parameterize the
attachment to the closest node on the flexible body.
 If you select Closest Interface Node, an expression will be used to
parameterize the attachment to the closest interface node on the flexible
body.
Orientation Select one of the following:
Dependency
 Delta Orientation From Coordinate
 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis Along Line
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
See a Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Point Torque Actuator

(Template Builder) Build → Actuators → Point Torque → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a point-torque actuator. Learn about point-torque actuators.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Actuator Name If creating a point torque actuator, enter a name for it.

If modifying a point torque actuator, enter its database name.

I Part Enter the name of the database part that the torque will act on.
J Part Enter the name of the database part that the torque will react upon.

If you want an action-only type of rotational force, your template-based

product disables the J Part text box, and deactivates the corresponding
reaction.
Type Define the actuator as left, right, or single.
Action Only Select one of the following:

 on - No reaction is applied.
 off - Reaction of the torque is applied on a marker that belongs to Part J.
Learn about Markers.
Application (optional) Enter a string for the application area.
Identifier (optional) Enter a string for the identifier.
Left/Right/ Function Enter the function that defines the rotational force(s) the actuator created.

If you selected an actuator of type single, you define only one function for the
torque that will be created.
Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For
information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.
Force Limits (optional) Enter a numerical string that defines the force limits of the actuator(s).
Displacement Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the displacement limits of the
(optional) actuator(s).
Velocity Limits (optional) Enter a numerical string that defines the velocity limits of the actuator(s).
Acceleration Limits Enter a numerical string that defines the acceleration limits of the actuator(s).
(optional)
Units (optional) Enter a literal string to identify the units used in the actuator definition. This
string is currently not used.
110 template_based_common
Create/Modify Point Torque Actuator

For the option: Do the following:

Active Select one of the following:

 on - Actuator is active.
 off - Actuator is not active.
You can also use the Actuator Set Activity dialog box to define the activity of any
actuator.
Location Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
If you set Location Dependency to Delta location from coordinate and one or both of the parts are flexible
bodies, the following option is shown:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 111
Create/Modify Reboundstop

For the option: Do the following:

Selected Node, Closest Select the method to define the attachment reaction node(s). If you select
Node, Closest Interface Selected Node, you must specify the node(s) manually, and the attachment
Node will be hardcoded to these node IDs. If you select Closest Node, an expression
will be used to parameterize the attachment to the closest node on the flexible
body. If you select Closest Interface Node, an expression will be used to
parameterize the attachment to the closest interface node on the flexible body.
Orientation Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Orientation From Coordinate

 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis Along Line
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
See a Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Reboundstop
(Template Builder) Build → Forces → Reboundstop → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a reboundstop. Learn about reboundstops.
112 template_based_common
Create/Modify Reboundstop

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Reboundstop Name If creating a reboundstop, enter a string that defines its name.

If modifying a reboundstop, enter its database name.

I Part Enter the name of the part on which the reboundstop will act.
J Part Enter the name of the part on which the reboundstop will react.
I Coordinate Reference Specify a Coordinate Reference to locate the point on the I part at which the
reboundstop will act.
J Coordinate Reference Specify a Coordinate Reference to locate the point on the J part at which the
reboundstop will act.
Property File If creating a reboundstop, note that the text box by default contains the file
name <shared>/[Link]/mdi_0001.reb.

If modifying a reboundstop, specify the property file that contains the force-
deflection relationship for the reboundstop.
Clearance/Impact Length Select a method to specify when the reboundstop force activates:

 Clearance - Specify the distance the I coordinate reference can travel -

Specify the distance the I coordinate reference can travel away from the J
coordinate reference, measured from the I coordinate, before the
reboundstop force activates.
 Impact Length - Specify the distance the I coordinate reference can travel
away from the J coordinate reference, measured from the J coordinate,
before the reboundstop force activates.
Color Select a color for the reboundstop graphic.
Reboundstop Diameter Select the diameter of the reboundstop graphic. Note that the slider actually
defines the ratio of the diameter to the length.

Note: Because the reboundstop is not a part itself, and soley defines the
force-displacement relationship between two parts, changing the
reboundstop graphic diameter does not translate into different
reboundstop properties.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 113
Create/Modify Request

For the option: Do the following:

Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to modify the property file in the Curve Manager. While the Curve
Manager is active, you cannot perform operations outside the Curve Manager;
after exiting the Curve Manager, you can resume working in your product.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Create/Modify Request
(Template Builder) Build → Request → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a request statement and auxiliary variables.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Request Name Enter a name for the request.
Comment Enter comments for your request. Comments associated with requests appear in the
postprocessing environment.
114 template_based_common
Create/Modify Request

For the option: Do the following:

Define Using... Select a method to define the request:

 Define Using Type and Markers - Specify the output type and the markers used
for the computation of the output. Learn about Markers.
 Define Using Subroutine - Define the request statement as a user-defined
request.
 Define Using Function Expression - Explicitly specify the function used in the
definition of the request. Learn about Modifying requests to remove component
function.
If you select Define Using Type and Markers, your template-based product displays the following options:
Output Type Select the type of output that will be calculated by Adams Solver. The output type is
referred to the I and J markers.
I/J Marker Name Select a marker.
R Marker Name Identifies the marker with respect to which you want to resolve information.

Note: Angular displacements are not affected by the reference marker, because
finite angular rotations are not vector quantities.
If you select Define Using Subroutine, your template-based product displays the following options:
User Function Enter a string that defines the user-function parameter list.
Title Enter a title for your user-defined request.
If you select Define Using Function Expression, your template-based product displays the following options:
F1,8 Define the function of the corresponding component written to the request file.
Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For
information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.
Title Enter a title for your user-defined request.
Result Set Name Enter a name for the result set.

Your template-based product uses this, together with the component names,
described next, in the generation of the .nam File.
MAG/X/Y/Z/AMA Enter the strings that correspond to the output requests and identify the
G/R1/R2/R3 components. Your template-based product uses these strings when it generates the
.nam file. The strings appear in the plotting environment, in the Component text
box.
Units Select a unit for each component so the plots created in the postprocessing
environment will have the proper units on the axes.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 115
Create/Modify Ride Height Sensor

Create/Modify Ride Height Sensor

(Template Builder) Build → Parts → Truck Ride Height Sensor → New/Modify Comprehensive Help
Modifies the time constant and deadband of the ride height sensor. Learn about Ride Height Sensors.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Ride Height Sensor If creating a sensor, enter a name for it.

If modifying a sensor, enter its database name.

The Axle and Frame parts can be general, mount, switch, or interface parts. Learn about Parts.
Axle Part Select a suspension part to attach.
Frame Part Select a part on the vehicle's body or frame.
Sensor Mount Location Specify a Coordinate Reference to locate the attachment between the sensor arm
and the frame part.
Sensor Arm Endpoint Specify a Coordinate Reference to locate the attachment between sensor arm and
link.
Sensor Link Endpoint Specify a Coordinate Reference to locate the attachment between the sensor link
and the axle part.
Time Constant Enter a time constant (time units) to tune the first-order lag built into the
sensor's response.
Deadband Enter a deadband (angle units) to tune the amount of free travel the
suspension will be allowed before the air spring trim load is adjusted.

Create/Modify Runtime Clearance

(Template Builder) Build → Runtime Clearance→ New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a runtime clearance. Learn about runtime clearance.
116 template_based_common
Create/Modify Runtime Clearance

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Clearance Name If creating a runtime clearance, enter a name for it.

If modifying a runtime clearance, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:
 left/right - Define either the left or the right clearance, and your template-based
product creates the corresponding opposite clearance by default.
 single - Define a non-symmetric clearance.
Select one of the following options:
I Contact Solid Enter the name of an existing geometry object valid for use in a contact.
I Flex Body Enter the name of an existing flexible body.
Select one of the following options:
J Contact Solid Enter the name of an existing geometry object valid for use in a contact.
J Flex Body Enter the name of an existing flexible body.
J Matching Name Enter the name of the object that will be matched either at assembly or runtime.
Road Graphics N/A.
If you selected J Matching Name, the following option will be available:
J Object Type Select one of the following:

 Contact Solid
 Flexible Body
Threshold Optional field to allow the user to specify a maximum distance for which the
clearance calculations will not be computed. Set to 0.0 by default.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Spring
(Template Builder) Build → Forces → Spring → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a spring. Learn about springs.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Spring Name If creating a spring, enter a name for it.

If modifying a spring, enter its database name.

The I and J parts can be general, mount, switch, or interface parts. Learn about Parts.
I Part Enter the name of the I part on which the spring will act.
J Part Enter the name of the J part on which the spring will act.
I Coordinate Enter a Coordinate Reference to locate the point on the I part at which the spring will
Reference act.
J Coordinate Enter a Coordinate Reference to locate the point on the J part at which the spring will
Reference act.
Preload/ Select the desired install method:
Installed Length/
Use Hardpoints  Preload - Enter the desired spring load at the current position of the I and J
coordinate references.
 Installed Length - Enter the length of the spring at the current position of the I
and J coordinate references.
 Use Hardpoints - Your template-based product disables the text box and displays
the length of the spring, which equals the distance between the I and J
coordinate references.
DM(iCoord,jCoord) Select to display the displacement between the specified coordinate references.
Property File Specify the property file that specifies the spring free length and force-displacement
characteristic (either linear or nonlinear).

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Learn About Spring Property Files.

Color Select a color for the spring graphic.
Spring Diameter Select the diameter of the spring graphic. Note that the slider actually defines the
ratio of the diameter to the length.

For the option: Do the following:

Number of Coils Select the number of coils for the spring graphic.

Note: Since the spring is not a part itself, and solely defines the force-
displacement relationship between two parts, changing the spring
graphic diameter does not translate into different spring properties.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.
While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window.
After exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Create/Modify Switch Part

(Template Builder) Build → Parts → Switch → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a switch part. Learn about Switch Parts.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 119
Create/Modify Three Phase Gear Force

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Switch Part Name If creating a switch part, enter a name for it.

If modifying a switch part, enter its database name.

Coordinate Reference Enter a Coordinate Reference to define the location for the switch part and the part
to which it is fixed. The type of the coordinate reference also defines the type of
the switch:

If you enter a left or right coordinate reference, your template-based product

creates a symmetric switch part pair; that is, both a left and a right switch part.

If you enter a single coordinate reference, your template-based product creates a

nonsymmetric (single) switch part.
Parts List Enter at least two parts to which the switch part can be assigned.
Switch to Part Specify the part, from the Parts List, to which the switch part will be fixed.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you
want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Three Phase Gear Force

(Template Builder) Build → Timing Mechanism → Gear → Three Phase Gear Force Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a Three-Phase Gear Force.
120 template_based_common
Create/Modify Three Phase Gear Force

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Gear Force Name If creating a gear force, enter a name for it.

If modifying a gear force, enter its database name.

Gear 1 Enter the name of the first gear.

The order in which the gears are specified is relevant in terms of the parametric
orientation which is created based on the number of teeth and the relative position of
both gears. If you build a chain of gears, do not use each gear more than once as Gear
2.
Gear 2 Enter the name of the second gear.
Learn about Contact Force Formulation Based on Oilfilm Thickness Theory.
Stiffness Enter the desired stiffness.
Damping Specify the damping coefficient of the contact-force formulation.
Oilfilm Thickness Specify the oilfilm thickness of the contact-force formulation.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

Notes:  The order in which you specify the gears is important because it maintains the parametric
orientation of the gears, therefore ensuring proper meshing. The gear force icon is
positioned at the center of the first gear, Gear 1.
 Use the pitch diameter variable (pitch_diameter) of each gear to parameterize the location
of one gear to the location of the other gear, to ensure proper meshing. The gears pitch
circles should tangent.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 121
Create/Modify Torsion Beam Spring

Create/Modify Torsion Beam Spring

(Template Builder) Build → Forces → Torsion Beam Spring → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Create and modify a torsion beam spring. See Torsion Beam Springs.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Torsion Spring Name If creating a torsion beam spring, enter a string to define its name.

If modifying a torsion spring, enter the database name of an existing torsion

beam spring.
I Part Enter the name of the I part on which the torsion spring will act.
J Part Enter the name of the J part on which the torsion spring will act.
I Coordinate Reference Enter a Coordinate Reference to locate the point on the I part at which the spring
will act.
J Coordinate Reference Enter a Coordinate Reference to locate the point on the J part at which the spring
will act.
Finish Angle Enter the finish angle, which is the bar windup required to achieve the desired
ride height, should be determined by adjusting the full vehicle model.
Property File Specify the property file that contains material properties, inner and outer radius,
and active length for the torsion spring.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Learn about Torsion Beam Springs Property Files.

Color Select a color for the spring graphic.
Adjuster arm assembly properties
Mass Enter the mass of the Adjuster arm assembly.
Ixx/Iyy/Izz Enter the values that define the moments of inertia components of the Adjuster
arm assembly. The inertia reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of
mass (CM) location.
122 template_based_common
Create/Modify Torsional Joint Attachment

For the option: Do the following:

Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Adams Car displays the Modify
Comment dialog box.

Learn about Recording Comments.

Select to modify:

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.

While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window.
After exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Create/Modify Torsional Joint Attachment

(Template Builder) Build → Attachments → Torsional Joint → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a torsional joint.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Torsional Joint If creating a torsional joint, enter a name for it.
Name
If modifying a torsional joint, enter its database name.
I Part Enter the name of the part on which the torsional joint will act.
J Part Enter the name of the part on which the torsional joint will react.
Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define one of the torsional joints, and your template based product
creates the corresponding opposite torsional joint.
 single - Define a non-symmetric torsional joint.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 123
Create/Modify Torsional Joint Attachment

For the option: Do the following:

Torque Preload Z Enter the initial translational torque loading on the torsional joint, defined along
the Z axis of the torsional joint.
Rotational Stiffness Enter the rotational stiffness along X Y and Z axis of the torsional joint.
XYZ
Location Select one of the following:
Dependency
 Delta Location From Coordinate
 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
If one or both of the I and J parts are flexible bodies, select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.

If you set Location Dependency to Delta location from coordinate and one or both of the parts are flexible bodies,
the following option is shown:
124 template_based_common
Create/Modify Truck Air Spring

For the option: Do the following:

Selected Node, Select the method to define the attachment reaction node(s). If you select Selected
Closest Node, Node, you must specify the node(s) manually, and the attachment will be hardcoded
Closest Interface to these node IDs. If you select Closest Node, an expression will be used to
Node parameterize the attachment to the closest node on the flexible body. If you select
Closest Interface Node, an expression will be used to parameterize the attachment
to the closest interface node on the flexible body.
Orientation Select one of the following:
Dependency
 Delta Orientation From Coordinate
 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
See a Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Truck Air Spring

(Template Builder) Build → Forces → Truck Air Spring → New/Modify Comprehensive Help
Creates or modifies a Truck air spring. Learn about Truck Air Springs.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 125
Create/Modify User-Function Feedback Channel

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Air Spring Name If creating a spring, enter a name for it.

If modifying a spring, enter its database name.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Preload Function Enter a function to define the air spring trim load. Note that this will be
overwritten by the value in the subsystem.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Adams Car displays the Modify
Comment dialog box.

Learn about Recording Comments.

Select to modify the property file in the Property File Editor.

Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based

product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Create/Modify User-Function Feedback Channel

(Template Builder) Build → Feedback Channels → User Function → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a feedback channel. Learn about Feedback Channels.
126 template_based_common
Create/Modify Variable Actuator

For the option: Do the following:

Fchannel Name If creating a feedback channel, enter a name for it.

If modifying a feedback channel, enter its database name.

Type Select the type of feedback channel.
Application Enter a string that defines the application area. This string is currently not used.
Identifier Enter a string that identifies the feedback channels. This string is currently not
used.
Left/Right/ Function Enter the function that defines the left/right feedback channel.

If you selected a feedback channel of type single, you define only one function.
Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For
information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.
Offset You can offset the raw signal of the feedback channel with a real value.
Offset Compensate Select on or off to indicate if you want to offset the raw signal of the feedback
channel by a desired real value.
Units String Enter a literal string to identify the units used in the feedback channel definition.
This string is currently not used.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want
to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Variable Actuator

(Template Builder) Build → Actuators → Variable → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a variable actuator. Learn about Variable Actuators.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 127
Create/Modify Vibration Input Channel

For the option: Do the following:

Actuator Name If creating a variable actuator, enter a name for it.

If modifying a variable actuator, enter its database name.

Type Define the actuator as left, right, or single.
Application (optional) Enter a string for the application area.
Identifier (optional) Enter a string for the identifier.
Left/Right/ Function Enter the function that defines the left/right data element variable created by the
actuator.

If you selected a variable actuator of type single, you define only one function for
the data element variable that will be created.
Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For
information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.
Limits (optional) Enter a numerical string that defines the limits of the actuator(s).
Units (optional) Enter a literal string to identify the units used in the actuator definition. This
string is currently not used.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Vibration Input Channel

(Template Builder) Build → Adams Vibration → Input Channel → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a Vibration Input Channel.
128 template_based_common
Create/Modify Vibration Input Channel

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Vibration Input Channel If creating a vibration input channel, enter a name for it.

If modifying a vibration input channel, enter its database name.

Input Part Enter the name of the I part on which the vibration actuator will act.
Mode Select one of the following:

 Translational - Applies a force.

 Rotational - Applies a torque.
Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define one of the input channels, and your template-based

product creates the corresponding opposite input channel.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric input channel.
Location Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 129
Create/Modify Vibration Output Channel

For the option: Do the following:

Orientation Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Orientation From Coordinate

 Swept Sine
 Rotating Mass
 PSD
 User
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Vibration Output Channel

(Template Builder) Build → Adams Vibration → Output Channel → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a Vibration Output Channel.
130 template_based_common
Create/Modify Vibration Output Channel

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Vibration Output Channel If creating a vibration output channel, enter a name for it.

If modifying a vibration output channel, enter its database name.

Output Function Type Select one of the following:

 Predefined - Gets global coordinates x, y, z, and the magnitude for an

output channel.
 User - Gets the frequency response in a local frame or a force-output
component.
If you set Output Function Type to Predefined, your template-based product displays the following options:
Output Part Enter the name of the output part to which the vibration output channel is
connected.
Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define one of the channels, and your template-based product

creates the corresponding opposite channel.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric channel.
Location Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
Global Component Select the output component type and the component.
If you set Output Function Type to User, your template-based product displays the following options:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 131
Create/Modify Wheel

For the option: Do the following:

Output Channel Function Enter an output function. For a symmetric pair of vibration output channels,
you specify a left and a right function.
Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For
information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create/Modify Wheel
(Template Builder) Build → Wheel → New/Modify Shared Dialog Box
Creates or modifies a wheel. Learn about Wheels.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Wheel Name If creating a wheel, enter a name for it.

If modifying a wheel, enter its database name.

Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define one of the wheels, and your template-based product creates
the corresponding opposite wheel.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric wheel.
Cm Offset Enter the center of mass (cm) offset of the wheel part from the wheel location
defined in Location Dependency. The center of mass will be located along the z-
axis of the wheel; the z-axis orientation is defined in the Orientation.
Mass Enter the mass of the wheel part.
Ixx Iyy Enter values that define the Ixx and Iyy mass-inertia components of the wheel part.
Izz Enter a value that defines the Izz mass-inertia component of the wheel part.
132 template_based_common
Create/Modify Wheel

For the option: Do the following:

Wheel Center Offset Enter the offset of the wheel-center geometry along the z-axis of the wheel part.
(Optional)
Property File If creating a wheel, note that the text box by default contains the file name
<shared>/[Link]/mdi_tire01.tir.

If modifying a wheel, specify a property file that contains the data for the tire.
High Performance When selecting a PAC2002 tire property file, the High Performance mode allows
the model to run at a high speed with a slight reduced accuracy, see High Performance
switch in Adams Car.
Wheel Select one of the following:
Configuration
 Single / Dual Outside - Defines the wheel or (left/right wheel pair) to be
the only, or outside wheel of a dual wheel configuration.
 Dual Inside - Defines the wheel or (left/right wheel pair) to be the inside
wheel of a dual wheel configuration.
Outside Wheel For "Wheel Configuration" = "Dual Inside", select the matching outside wheel.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 133
Create Motor

For the option: Do the following:

Location Select one of the following:
Dependency
 Delta Location From Coordinate
 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
Orientation Select one of the following:
Dependency
 Delta Orientation From Coordinate
 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis Along Line
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
See a Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want
to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Create Motor
(Template builder) Build → Motor → New/Modify
Creates or modifies a motor
134 template_based_common
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Motor Name If creating a Motor, enter a name for it.

If modifying a Motor, enter its database name.

Method Select one of the following

 Analytical
 Curve based
 External
Note: Inputs in the parameters tab vary for each method.
Motor type Select one of the following

 AC Synchronous
 DC
 Brushless DC
 Stepper
Note: Motor type option is available only for analytical method.
Direction Select one of the following

 Clockwise: The rotor part of the motor rotates in clockwise direction

 Counter-clockwise: The rotor part of the motor rotates in the counter-clockwise
direction.
Attachment tab
Rotor Attach Part Enter a part of the model to connect with the rotor part, via a fixed joint.

Note: Rotor cannot be attached to the Ground as it cannot be stationary.

Stator Attach Part Enter a part of the model to connect with the stator part, via a fixed joint.
Force Display Select the part(s) on which a force vector should be displayed.
Type Define the motor as left, right, or single.
Location Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Location From Coordinate

 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
Dialog Box - F1 Help 135
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

Orientation Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Orientation From Coordinate

 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis Along Line
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
Mass/Inertia
Create Rotor Stator Parts Select to create Rotor and Stator Parts. If turned off, parts are not created and hence an
SFORCE is created between Rotor and Stator Attach Part.
Rotor Length Enter the length of the cylinder geometry to be created on the rotor part. This parameter
is for visualization purpose.
Rotor Radius Enter the radius of the cylinder geometry to be created on the rotor part. This parameter
is for visualization purpose.
Stator Length Enter the length of the box geometry to be created on the stator part (that is, the
dimension parallel to the rotor axis of rotation). This parameter is for visualization
purpose.
Stator Width Enter the width of the box geometry to be created on the stator part. (Note cross-section
will be a square: this value will be used for both dimensions perpendicular to the rotor
axis of rotation). This parameter is for visualization purpose.
Define Mass By Select one of the following options for mass and inertia properties of rotor/stator:

 Geometry and Material Type

 Geometry and Density
 User Input
If you selected Geometry and Material Type, the following option appears:
Material Type Enter the type of material for the rigid body. Learn about Standard Material Properties.
If you selected Geometry and Density, the following option appears:
Density Enter the density of the part. Your template-based product uses the part's density and the
volume of the geometry to calculate its mass and inertia.
If you selected User Input, the following options appear:
Mass Enter the mass of the part.
136 template_based_common
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

Ixx/Iyy/Izz Enter the values that define the moments of inertia components of the part. The inertia
reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of mass (CM) location.
Off-Diagonal Terms Select to display and undisplay the Ixy/Izx/Iyz fields.
If you select Off-Diagonal Terms, your template-based product displays the following option:
Ixy/Izx/Iyz Enter the values that define the products of inertia components of the part. The inertia
(optional) reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of mass (CM) location.

For the option Do the following

Parameters
Curve Based Method
Spline File name Provide a file that contains a curve of torque vs. speed.

Note: In .mtr file, the independent axis (angular velocity) should be in

RPM units. The ordinate axis (torque) units must be as per the
model units.
Analytical Method
Dialog Box - F1 Help 137
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

AC Synchronous

The torque for a AC Synchronous motor is calculated as,

Please see the Torque Angle() Calculation and Pole Slipping for Torque angle calculation and pole slipping details.
Note: In actual implementation Er is calculated as magnitude (Er = SQRT (Re(Er) ^2 + Im(Er) ^2)) and not as
complex number.
Where:
138 template_based_common
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

 T = Motor Torque  P = Poles
 V = Supply voltage
 Er = Rated Back EMF
 K = BEMF constant
 s = Angular velocity
 φ = Power Factor Angle
 Vr = Rated Voltage
 δΕ = ElectricalTorque Angle
 Ir = Rated Current
 δ = Torque Angle
 Ra = Armature Resistance
 X = Reactance
 φ = Rated Power Factor Angle
 E = Back EMF
 Xr = Rated Reactance
 ωr = Rotor angular velocity
 fr = Rated Frequency
 f = Supply Frequency
 PFr = Rated Power Factor
 L = Inductance
Supply Voltage (V) Enter the supply voltage.
Rated Current (A) Enter the value of current that flows through the motor circuit.
Resistance (Ohms) Enter the resistance value of the windings in the motor.
Power Factor Enter the power factor. The power factor of an AC system is defined as the
ratio between the real power flowing to the load and the apparent power in the
circuit. It is a dimensionless number between -1 and 1.
Frequency (Hz) Enter the AC frequency.
Inductance (mH) Enter the inductance. Inductance is the behavior of a coil in resisting any
change of electric current through it. According to Faraday's law, inductance
has an influence on the emf generated to oppose a given change in current.
Poles Enter the number of poles in the stator field.
Synchronous Speed (RPM) Enter the initial speed of the rotor in which it rotates in step with the rotating
magnetic field of the stator.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 139
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

DC Shunt Motor

The torque for a D.C. Shunt motor is calculated as

T = KφI a

For the option Do the following

DC Series Motor

The torque for a DC Series motor is calculated as:

2
T = K 1 KI

ZP Es – Eb ZφNP
K = ---------- I a = ----------------- E b = ---------------
2πa Ra 60a
Where
 T = Torque developed in N-m
 K = Torque constant
 K1 = Series motor constant

 φ = Flux per pole in Webers

 I = Armature current in Amps
 Z = Number of conductors
 P = Number of Poles
 a = Number of parallel paths in the Armature.
 Es = Source Voltage in Volts
 Eb = Back emf induced in Volts
 Ra= Armature resistance in ohms
 N = Revolutions per Minute
No. of conductors Enter the number of conductors.
Flux Per Pole (Wb) Enter the flux per pole. It is the measure of the quantity of magnetism, that is,
the total number of magnetic lines of force passing through a specified area in
a magnetic field.
Source Voltage (V) Enter the source voltage.
No. of Paths Enter the number of parallel armature winding paths.
Armature Resistance (Ohms) Enter the armature resistance, the resistance offered by the windings in the
moving part of the motor to current flow in the coils.
No. of Poles (P) Enter the number of poles in the stator field.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 141
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

DC Type  Shunt
A shunt wound DC motor connects the armature and field windings in
parallel or shunt with a common DC power source.
 Series
Enter Series Motor Constant. A series wound DC motor connects the
armature and field windings in series with a common DC power source.
If you selected Series, the following option appears:
Series Motor Constant Enter torque constant for the motor. This represents the proportionality
between motor torque and motor current.
142 template_based_common
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

Brushless DC

The torque for a BLDC motor is calculated as

T = k d k p k s mnBLRI

Eb – Es ZφNP
I a = ----------------- E b = ---------------
Ra 60a
Where
 kd = Distribution Factor
 kp = Coil pitch Factor
 ks = Slot Skew Factor
 m = Number of Teeth per phase
 n = Number of Turns per phase
 B = Strength of the permanent Magnetic field
 L = Length of rotor windings
 R = Radius of Armature
 I = Current in the Motor winding
 T = Torque developed in N-m
 φ = Flux per pole in Webers
 Z = Number of conductors
 P = Number of Poles
 a = Number of parallel paths in the Armature
 Es = Source Voltage in Volts
 Eb = Back emf induced in Volts
 Ra = Armature resistance in ohms
 N = Revolutions per Minute
Distribution Factor Enter the distribution factor. The distribution factor kd reflects the fact that the
winding coils of each phase are distributed in a number of slots.
Coil Pitch Factor Enter the coil pitch factor. The pitch factor kp reflects the fact that windings
are often not fully pitched, that is, the individual turns are reduced in order to
decrease the length of the end-turns and do not cover a full pole-pitch (also
called chorded).
Slot Skew Factor Enter the skew factor. The skew factor ks reflects the fact that the winding is
angularly twisted, which results in an angular spread and reduced emf.
Teeth per Phase Count Enter the number of teeth per phase present in the motor.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 143
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

No. of Turns per Phase Enter the number of turns per phase in the armature winding.
Armature Resistance (Ohms) Enter the armature resistance, the resistance offered by the windings in the
moving part of the motor to current flow in the coils.
No. of Poles Enter the number of poles in the stator field.
Strength of PM Field (T) Enter the strength of permanent magnetic field of the stator.
Length of the Rotor Windings Enter the effective length of rotor windings.
Radius of Armature Enter the radius of the armature winding.
Flux Per Pole (Wb) Enter the flux per pole. It is the measure of the quantity of magnetism, that is,
the total number of magnetic lines of force passing through a specified area in
a magnetic field.
No. of Conductors Enter the number of conductors.
No. of Paths Enter the number of parallel armature winding paths.
Maximum Torque The maximum torque indicated by the user within which the output torque of
the motor is to be controlled.
Max. Ang. Velocity The Max. Angular velocity indicated by the user such that Rated Torque =
Tmax - Tmax * (Actual Angular Velocity/ Max. Angular Velocity).
Control Method  Speed Control - Controls output speed of the rotor shaft based on user
spline input.
 Position Control - Controls angular displacement of the rotor shaft based
on user spline input.
Enter Spline File Provide a file which contains a curve of speed vs time or angle vs time based on
control method.
Friction Torque Enter a constant opposing torque that does not vary with velocity.
Damping Coefficient Specify a constant which is multiplied by angular velocity to define a damping
torque. It represents the combined electromagnetic and viscous damping.
Gain Specify the gain value used to calculate the speed gain. This speed gain is used
in the PID controller.
P Gain Specify the proportional gain applied to the input signal.
I Gain Specify the gain applied to the integral of the input signal.
D Gain Specify the gain applied to the derivative of the input signal.
144 template_based_common
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

Stepper

The torque for a Stepper motor is calculated as,

π
T 1 = HSin   --- ⁄ S θ
2

π
T 2 = HCos   --- ⁄ S θ
2
Where
 T1 = Torque on the first winding.
 T2 = Torque on the Secondary winding.
 H = Holding Torque in N-m.
 S = Step Angle in radians.
 θ = Shaft Angle in radians.
Holding Torque Enter holding torque. The amount of torque required to keep the motor shaft
in a particular position.
Control Type  One Phase On-Full Step Drive
 Two Phase On-Full Step Drive
Step Angle (Degrees) Enter the step angle by which the rotor will rotate when a signal is passed.
Friction Torque Enter a constant opposing torque that does not vary with velocity.
Damping Coefficient Enter a constant damping coefficient which is multiplied by angular velocity
to define a damping torque. It represents the combined electromagnetic and
viscous damping.
Input Type To indicate the type of data in the input file.

 PPS vs Time - Pulse per second vs time. The Stepper motor rotates by its
step angle when a pulse is received.
 Target Angle vs Time - Target angle is the end position of rotor shaft where
the user desires the motor to stop.
Input File Provide a file which contains a curve of speed vs time or angle vs time based on
input type.
External Method
External Method  External System Library Import
 Co-Simulation
If External System Library Import is selected, the following options will be displayed:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 145
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

Plant Input/Output  Standard
Standard method creates the GSE equation, by importing the
External System Library and using the default input and output state
variables.
 User Defined
User-Defined method follows the same method as that of Standard
method except it allows the user to select input and output state
variables.
If Standard is selected, the following options will be displayed:
General State Equation Name Enter the name of the GSE to be created.
External System Library Enter the name of the external system library. If the extension entered is .fmu,
Adams will expect an FMU that conforms to the FMI standard.
Generate External Model Specifications Click this button to do a plant export using whatever is specified for plant i/o
above, for the controls software of your choice:

 Easy5
 MATLAB
 FMU
If User Defined is selected, the following options will be displayed:
General State Equation Name Enter the name of the GSE to be created.
External System Library Enter the name of the external system library. If the extension entered is .fmu,
Adams will expect an FMU that conforms to the FMI standard.
Import I/O Signals from Existing Select to display the Database Navigator, where you can select an existing
Controls Plant controls plant from which output and input signals are to be imported.
Input Signal(s) Enter names of state variables that you want to use as plant inputs. Select From
Pinput to use state variables from existing plant inputs.
Output Signal(s) Enter names of state variables that you want to use as plant outputs. Select
From Poutput to use state variables from existing plant outputs.
Static Hold Select one of the following:

 Off: Turns static hold off.

 On: Turns static hold on.
146 template_based_common
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

Generate External Model Specifications Click this button to do a plant export using whatever is specified for plant i/o
above, for the controls software of your choice:

 Easy5
 MATLAB
 FMU
Use External Library Error Tolerance Check to apply the error tolerance values of the continuous states of ESL to the
GSE during integration. The ESL error tolerance values change the
computation of the local integration error that is computed after the corrector
as converged. If the estimated error is greater than the specified integration
ERROR the integrator rejects the solution. See the INTEGRATOR statement
for more details about ERROR. You may want to use this feature to help refine
the accuracy of your ESL states, but just like any INTEGRATOR setting, this
may require tuning. This feature only applies to the C++ Solver, and only
Easy5 models currently report error tolerance values.

Error Scale Factor:

 Values > 0 will scale all of the ESL error tolerance values in order to tighten
or loosen these values, that is, Final GSE error tolerance = Error Scale
Factor * ESL error tolerance
 Values <= 0 will disable using the ESL error tolerance values, and the
default computation for the local integration error will be used.
Information Check to display verbose information about the general state equation (GSE)
that the controls system import created.
Visibility This option is only available for External System Libraries of type FMU.
Visibility means the FMU runs in interactive mode. Turn it off if you want to
run it in batch mode. In order for this option to work in Adams, visibility
needs to be supported by the specified FMU.
Communication Interval This option is only available for External System Libraries of type FMU. To
co-simulate with the FMU you need to specify the communication interval.
Sample the FMU at least two times faster than the highest frequency of interest
(refer to Nyquist frequency).
If Co-Simulation is selected, the following options will be displayed:
Plant Input/Output  Standard
Standard method creates the GSE by importing the External System
Library and using the default input and output state variables.
 User Defined
User-Defined method follows the same method as that of Standard
method except it allows the user to select input and output state variables.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 147
Create Motor

For the option Do the following

If Standard is selected, the following option will be displayed:
Target Software Select one of the following:

 Easy5
 MATLAB
 FMU
If User Defined is selected, the following options will be displayed:
Controls Plant Name Enter the name of the Controls Plant to be created
File Prefix Enter the prefix for the .adm, .cmd, .acf, .m, and .inf files that Adams Controls
creates.
Initial Static Analysis Select one of the following:

 Yes: Performs initial static analysis.

 No: Does not perform initial static analysis.
Note: If Initial Static Analysis is set to Yes and Analysis Type is set to
linear, Adams Controls performs a static analysis before the linear
analysis. Otherwise, Adams Controls performs an initial conditions
analysis.
Initialization Command Check if you want to enter Adams View or Adams Solver non-time advancing
(NTA) commands that you want to execute before the co-simulation or
function evaluation starts. In the text box that appears, enter one NTA
command. To execute more than one NTA command, create an .acf file and
refer to it using the FILE/COMMAND = command_file_name string in this
text box.
Import Settings From Existing Controls Select to display the Database Navigator, where you can choose an existing
Plant controls plant whose settings you want to use in your current plant.
Input Signal (s) Enter names of state variables that you want to use as plant inputs. Select From
Pinput to enter state variables from existing plant inputs.
Output Signal (s) Enter names of state variables that you want to use as plant outputs. Select
From Poutput to enter state variables from existing plant outputs
Target Software Select one of the following:

 Easy5
 MATLAB
 FMU
148 template_based_common
Curve Manager

For the option Do the following

Analysis Type Select one of the following:

 linear - Creates a linearized representation of the model in terms of (A, B,

C, D) matrices. A linear analysis is performed. For Target Software of
FMU, this option is not supported.
 non_linear - Exports plant for dynamic analysis.
User Defined Library Name Enter the name of the user-defined library.
Adams Host Name Enter the name of the host machine from which the Adams plant is being
exported. This host name is used if you choose TCP/IP-based communication
to perform co-simulation or function evaluation between Adams and
MATLAB, Easy5 or FMU.
Multiplication factor
Multiply Select one of the following:

 Scale Factor
 Step Function
 Expression
If Scale Factor is selected, the following option is displayed:
Scale Factor Enter a constant scale factor to apply to the motor torque.
If Step Function is selected, the following options are displayed:
Start Time Enter start time.
End Time Enter end time.
Start Value Enter start value.
End Value Enter end value.
If Expression is selected, the following option is displayed:
Expression Enter a run-time expression to scale the motor torque.

Curve Manager

Tools → Curve Manager Shared Dialog Box

The Curve Manager provides a graphical interface to define and modify curves for certain property files.
Learn Modifying Curves.
You can use the Curve Manager to modify property files for the following components:
 Bushing
Dialog Box - F1 Help 149
Curve Manager

 Frequency Bushing (if the Ride plugin is loaded)

 General Bushing (if the Ride plugin is loaded)
 Bumpstop
 Reboundstop
 Spring
 Damper
 Wheel Envelope
 Differential
 Torsion Spring
 Motor
 Bearing (if the Driveline plugin is loaded)
 Clutch Force (if the Driveline plugin is loaded)
 Wet Clutch (if the Driveline plugin is loaded)
 Complex Spring (if the Driveline plugin is loaded)
 Ride Tire (if the Driveline plugin is loaded)
 Torque Converter (if the Driveline plugin is loaded)
 Dyno Motion Series (if the Driveline plugin is loaded)
 Dyno Curve (angle) (if the Driveline plugin is loaded)
 Dyno Curve (time) (if the Driveline plugin is loaded)

About the Curve Manager Views

There are four possible views in the Curve Manager:
 Plot View
 Data Table View
 Plot and Data Table View
 Property Table View
In each of these views you can:
 Switch to the other view. From the View menu, select Plot, Data Table, Plot and Data Table, or
Property Table.
 Edit the data:
• Plot view - You can manually adjust the profile of the curve by selecting an appropriate hotpoint
and dragging that point in either the positive or negative vertical direction. Note that you cannot
drag Hotpoints horizontally. Certain elements (such as the Complex Spring) contain 3D curves. In
those cases you can choose whether to visualize the data as a 2D or 3D plot.
• Data Table view - You can insert or delete rows of data. You can also enter new values for your
plot data by highlighting the text box you want to modify and typing the new values.
150 template_based_common
Curve Manager

• Plot and Data Table view - You can interact with both the plot and the data table, and update one
from the other.
• Property Table view - Certain property files enable this option, such as Adams Ride bushings.
This mode allows you to manually change multiple parameter values stored in the property file.
 Set units - From the Settings menu, select Units. (see Set File Units dialog box help)

About the Curve Manager Interface

Note: Note that the two pull-down menus at the top left of the Curve Manager are informational
(except when working with property files that contain more than one curve, such as bushings):

 The first menu displays the type of component with which you are working. For bushings, you can
display data for translational or rotational bushings.
 The second menu displays the component characteristic for which the Curve Manager displays data.
For bushings, you can display data for the x, y, or z characteristics.
In both views, along the left side of the window, are options that are shared by both views and options that
are specific to each view:
 For information on the options shared by both views, see the help for the different components.
 For information on the options specific to each view, see Curve Manager Plot View or Curve Manager Table
View.

Torsion Spring
Tools → Curve Manager
Create or modify a Torsion Spring Property File (*.tsf ). Learn about Torsion Springs.
You can create a linear spring (torque vs. angular displacement) by entering a slope, or define any torque-
angle relation using a mathematical formula. See Modifying Curves.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 151
Curve Manager

For the option: Do the following:

Slope Enter the slope of the curve that defines the torque-angle relation.
Limits Enter the upper and lower x values for the curve.
Points/Segs Specify the number of points or segments for the curve. You can:

 Enter the number of points or segments.

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines

Bearing
Tools → Curve Manager

Create or modify a Bearing Property File (*.bea). Learn about Bearings.

You can create a linear relationship (combined load factor vs. combined load) by entering a slope, or define
any non-linear relation using a mathematical formula. See Modifying Curves.
Besides the Combined Load Factor curve, the Curve Manager lets you edit a bearing property file's:
 G1
 Mu
 K Factor
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

Slope Enter the slope of the curve that defines a linear relation.
Limits Enter the upper and lower x values for the curve.
Points/ Specify the number of points or segments for the curve. You can:
Segs
 Enter the number of points or segments.

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Clutch Force
Tools → Curve Manager
Create or modify a Clutch Force Property File (*.clu). Learn about Clutch Forces.
You can create a linear spring (torque vs. angular displacement) by entering a slope, or define any torque-
angle relation using a mathematical formula. See Modifying Curves.
Besides the force vs. displacement curve, the Curve Manager lets you edit a clutch force property file's linear
damping rate.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Wet Clutch
Tools → Curve Manager

Modify a Wet Clutch Property File (*.wcf ). Learn about the conceptual Wet Clutch.
You can create a linear relationship (pressure vs. time) by entering a slope, or define any non-linear relation
using a mathematical formula. See Modifying Curves.
Besides the pressure vs. time curve, the Curve Manager Property Table lets you edit a wet clutch property
file's parameters and mass properties.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 153
Curve Manager

For the option: Do the following:

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Complex Spring
Tools → Curve Manager

Modify a Complex Spring Property File (*.csp). Learn about the Complex Springs.
You can create a linear relationship (torque vs. angle) by entering a slope, or define any non-linear relation
using a mathematical formula. See Modifying Curves.
The complex spring defines two separate three-dimensional loading and unloading curves. Thus the Curve
Manager gives you the option in Plot View to visualize the data as a 2D or 3D plot.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Ride Tire
Tools → Curve Manager

Modify a Ride Tire Property File (*.rti). Learn about Ride Tires.
154 template_based_common
Curve Manager

You can create a linear relationship (friction vs. slip) by entering a slope, or define any non-linear relation
using a mathematical formula. See Modifying Curves.
Besides the friction vs. slip curve, the Curve Manager Property Table lets you edit a ride tire property file's
geometry, stiffness, damping, and mass properties.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Torque Converter
Tools → Curve Manager

Modify a Torque Converter Property File (*.tcf ). Learn about Torque Converters.
You can create a linear relationship by entering a slope, or define any non-linear relation using a mathematical
formula. See Modifying Curves.
Besides the capacity factor vs. speed ratio and torque ratio vs. speed ratio curves, the Curve Manager lets you
edit a torque converter property file's lockup clutch properties.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 155
Curve Manager

For the option: Do the following:

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Dyno Motion Series

Tools → Curve Manager

Modify a Dyno Motion Series Property File (*.dyn). Learn about Dyno.
You can create a linear relationship by entering a slope, or define any non-linear relation using a mathematical
formula. See Modifying Curves.
Besides the torque magnitude vs. order and phase shift vs. order curves, the Curve Manager lets you edit a
dyno property file's mean torque value and angle multiplier.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Dyno Curve (angle)

Tools → Curve Manager

Modify a Dyno Curve (angle) Property File (*.dav). Learn about Dyno.
156 template_based_common
Curve Manager

You can create a linear relationship by entering a slope, or define any non-linear relation using a mathematical
formula. See Modifying Curves.
A Dyno Curve (angle) file defines a three-dimensional curve of either motion or torque as a function of angle
and angular velocity. Thus the Curve Manager gives you the option in Plot View to visualize the data as a 2D
or 3D plot.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Dyno Curve (time)

Tools → Curve Manager

Modify a Dyno Curve (time) Property File (*.dti). Learn about Dyno.
You can create a linear angular velocity or torque vs. time relationship by entering a slope, or define any non-
linear relation using a mathematical formula. See Modifying Curves.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager. Learn about the Curve Manager.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 157
Curve Manager Plot View

For the option: Do the following:

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Curve Manager Plot View

Tools → Curve Manager → View → Plot Shared Dialog Box
Use the plot view of the Curve Manager to change the graphical representation of property files.
Learn more about the Curve Manager.
To go to the Curve Manager table view, select View → Table.
In the plot view you can perform the following operations:
 Create, open, and save property files
 Edit plot data
 Set units and appearance
 Manage plots
 Print plots

Creating, Opening, and Saving Property Files

Use the File menu to create, open, and save property files:
 New File
 Open File
 Save File
 Save File As

Editing Plot Data

Edit plot data:
158 template_based_common
Curve Manager Table View

 Plot mode - You can manually adjust the profile of the curve by selecting an appropriate hotpoint
and dragging that point in either the positive or negative vertical direction. Note that you cannot
drag Hotpoints horizontally.
 Table mode - You can insert or delete rows of data. You can also enter new values for your plot data
by highlighting the text box you want to modify and typing the new values.

Setting Units and Appearance

Use the Settings menu to set units and appearance:
 Set File Units
 Modify Curve Appearance

Managing Plots
The Curve Manager has several tools you can use to manage your plots.

Printing Plots
To print your plots, select File → Print.

Curve Manager Table View

Tools → Curve Manager → View → Table Shared Dialog Box
Use the table view of the Curve Manager to enter or modify the numerical data of a property file curve, using
a spreadsheet table editor.
Learn more about the Curve Manager.
To go to the plot view, select View → Plot.
In table view you can:
 Edit plot data:
• Plot mode - You can manually adjust the profile of the curve by selecting an appropriate hotpoint
and dragging that point in either the positive or negative vertical direction. Note that you cannot
drag Hotpoints horizontally.
• Table mode - You can insert or delete rows of data. You can also enter new values for your plot
data by highlighting the text box you want to modify and typing the new values.
 Set File Units - From the Settings menu, select Units.
After you modify the tabular data, return to the plot view (see Curve Manager Plot View), where you can view
the changes you made, as well as save and print your plot.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 159
Damper

For the option: Do the following:

For the option: Do the following:
Select to erase the content of selected cells.

Select to decrease the column width.

Select to increase the column width.

Starting Row Enter the row number at which you want to start inserting or deleting rows.
Number of Rows Enter the number of rows you want to insert or delete.
Insert Rows Select to insert rows.
Delete Rows Select to delete rows.
Filter Select a format by which to filter the data.
Sort Sort the data in ascending order.

Damper
Tools → Curve Manager
Generates a Damper Property File. Learn about dampers.
You can create a linear damper by entering a slope, or define a force-velocity relation using a mathematical
formula. See Modifying Curves.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Data Editor/Viewer

Select Shared Dialog Box

In Adams Driveline, the Data Editor/Viewer lets you view data as plots or as tabular data.

Note: The Data Editor/Viewer has a different name depending on where you opened it from. If in
editor mode, Editor is part of the title. If in viewer mode, Viewer is part of the title.

If the Data Editor/Viewer is in editor mode, you can make changes to your data. To modify a component
and its property file with new data, make sure you select OK or Apply, in the Data Editor/Viewer and in the
dialog box from which you launched it.

For the option: Do the following:

View as Select to view the data as plot or table.
If you set View as to Plot, your template-based product displays the following option:
Spline Curves Select to view the AKISPLINE curve of the data. This option is enabled only for
specific components. The spline curve is solid.
Slope Curves Select to view the slope (derivative) of a curve. This option is enabled only for
specific components. The slope curve is dotted.
If you set View as to Plot, and the Curve Editor is displayed in editor mode, your template-based product displays
the following option:
Memory Curves Select to retain the original curve as you edit the data points. Your template-
based product resets the memory curve when you select OK or Apply. The
memory curve is dashed.
Data Reference File Read in new data from a file. The file must contain the correct number of
Name columns of data.
If you set View as to Tabular Data, and the Curve Editor is displayed in editor mode, your template-based
product displays the following options:
Append row to X and Y Add one row to the beginning of the data table.
data
Prepend row to X and Y Add one row to the end of the data table.
data
Insert Row After Specify a row number after which to insert a row.
Remove Row Specify a row number to remove.
Data Reference File Read in new data from a file. The file must contain the correct number of
Name columns of data.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 161
Define Design Options

Define Design Options

Template Builder) Build → Custom Gui → Design Options
Set or promote the available integer parameter variable of type single to the design options. This can be useful
when you want to easily make changes to groups of entities in the standard interface.
Integer parameter variables can be used for different purposes. For example, you might use an integer
parameter variable to control a group's activity. The design options are very template specific and vary based
on the modeling practice you may have. Refer to Design Options to set up design options in the Template
Builder.

For the option: Do the following:

Parameter Name Select a parameter variable from the list.

See parameter variable.

Choices Enter a list of names for the corresponding values in the Values field.
Values Enter integer values for the corresponding names in the choices field. These are the
values of the parameter variable to be set using Design Options in the Standard Interface.
Dependent Enter the parameter variable name to associate it with the design options parameter.
Variable Name This gets displayed in the Standard Interface.

Delete File(s)
Tools → File Management → Delete Shared Dialog Box
Deletes files from the file system.
When specifying the file names, you can take advantage of the database alias naming conventions. Therefore,
if the <private> database is located at /usr/people/gabriel/[Link], then either of the following file name
specifications will work:
/usr/people/gabriel/[Link]/[Link]/[Link]
or
<private>/[Link]/[Link]

For the option: Do the following:

Filename(s) Enter the file name(s) you want to delete.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

162 template_based_common
Delete Objects

Note: Your template-based product will not prompt you for a confirmation of the file deletion: it
assumes that because you are using the dialog box, the file names you enter are those you want
to delete.

Delete Objects
(Template Builder) Build → Component name → Delete Shared Dialog Box
Deletes one or more objects. The name of this dialog box corresponds to the object from which you launched
it. For example, if you launched it from Build → Hardpoint → Delete, the name of the dialog box will be
Delete Hardpoints.

For the option: Do the following:

Entity type Enter the name(s) of the object you want to delete.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Delete Variants
(Standard Interface) File → Manage → Assemblies/Subsystems → Delete Variant
Deletes one or more variants from an assembly or subsystem in session. The same dialog box is used when
operating on subsystems and assemblies.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly/Subsystem Select the desired assembly/subsystem from the option menu.
Select one of the following two options:
Delete all variants Removes all variant definitions from the selected assembly.
Delete one variant Allows you to select a single variant definition to delete.
If you selected "Delete all variants", or only one variant exists, the following two options are enabled:
Return to previous default The model will be returned to its original default state, and all variant
definitions will be deleted.
Current state is new default After deleting all variant definitions, the current model state will be
saved as the new default variant.
If you selected "Delete one variant", the following option is enabled:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 163
Delta Location From Coordinate

For the option: Do the following:

Variant Select the variant you wish to delete.
If you are operating on assembly variants, the following option is enabled:
Also delete subsystem variants Select this option if you wish to delete subsystem variants as well as
assembly variants.

Delta Location From Coordinate

Dialog boxes where you can set location dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Locates an entity at an offset distance from a Coordinate References. You can express the offset distance local to
the coordinate reference, or global, expressed in the Origo Reference Frame.

For the option: Do the following:

Coordinate Reference Enter a hardpoint or construction frame from which the location offset will be
applied.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Location Specify the location offset from the coordinate reference, defined along the x-, y-
, z-axis specified in Location in.

If the entity you are orienting is a construction frame, you can parameterize the
location offset. You can, for example, use a parameter variable to define the location
offset.

Example: (pvs_length), 0.0, 0.0

Location in Select to offset either in a local or global reference frame:

 local - Specify only when the Coordinate Reference text box contains a
construction frame.
 global - Specify when the Coordinate Reference text box contains either a
construction frame or a hardpoint. Because hardpoints contain only location
and no orientation information, if you select local when the Coordinate
Reference contains a hardpoint, Location in will default to using the global
reference frame.

Delta Orientation From Coordinate

Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Orients an entity at an offset rotation from a construction frame's orientation. Learn about Construction
Frames.
164 template_based_common
Design of Experiment: Export Insight Experiment

Note: Because hardpoints have no orientation, you cannot use them to define this type of orientation
dependency. Learn about Hardpoints.

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Frame Enter the name of the construction frame from which you want to apply the
orientation offset.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Orientation Specify the orientation offset from the construction frame, defined about the x-, y-
, z-axis of the construction frame.

If the entity you are orienting is a construction frame, you can parameterize the
orientation offset. You can, for example, use a parameter variable to define the
orientation offset.

Example: (pvs_angle), 0.0, 0.0

Design of Experiment: Export Insight Experiment

Simulate → DOE Interface → Adams Insight → Export
Exports all factors (parameters) and responses (objectives) in the current vehicle model to an Adams Insight
experiment (.xml) file. Optionally loads the Adams Insight graphical user environment.

For the option: Do the following:

Experiment Filename Enter the name of the Insight experiment file (.xml) to be created. If no path is
given then this file is created in the current working directory.
Analysis Prefix Output prefix used to create model files for each trial.
Event(s) / Event Set / Choose an existing Event(s), Event Set or Simulation Script(s) in the current
Simulation Script(s) Adams Car session. An Event is created by running, at minimum, a 'files-only'
simulation. This is the Event/Event Set/Simulation script that is used to run
each trial of the study.
Display Insight Display the Adams Insight interface once the experiment file has been created.
Expose Solver Settings Include Solver settings (ERROR, HMAX and so on) for this Event in the list of
available Factors in Insight.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 165
Differential

Differential
Tools → Curve Manager
Create or modify a Differential Property File (*.dif ). Learn about differentials.
You can create a linear viscous differential (torque vs. angular velocity) by entering a slope, or define any
torque-velocity relation using a mathematical formula. See Modifying Curves.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

Slope Enter the slope of the curve that defines the velocity-force relation.
Limits Enter the upper and lower x values for the curve.
Points/Segs Specify the number of points or segments for the curve. You can:

 Enter the number of points or segments.

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines

Display Subsystem
(Standard Interface) View → Subsystem Shared Dialog Box
Displays an open subsystem. Learn about subsystems.

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Select the name of the subsystem you want to display. The menu lists all open
subsystems.

Display Template
(Template Builder) View → Template Shared Dialog Box
Displays a template that is open.

For the option: Do the following:

Template Select the name of the template you want to display. The menu lists all open templates.
166 template_based_common
Eigen Solution Calculation

Eigen Solution Calculation

(Standard Interface) Simulate → DOE Interface → Simulation Script → New → Script Type: Adams Solver Commands Shared
Dialog Box

Simulation → Create a new Simulation Script → Script Type: Adams Solver Commands
Specifies options for creating ACF command for Eigen Solution Calculation.

For the option: Value Type Do the following:

Include Damping Yes/No Option to include damping.
Plant State Name Existing plant state Name of the Plant State already existing in the
name model to be used for Eigen analysis.
Reference Marker Existing marker Reference marker for Eigen analysis. Based on the
settings, the relative coordinates are created.

Without RM all default linearization coordinates

are global. Using RM all default coordinates are
relative to the RM marker.

The RM option is useful in linearizing helicopter

blades, turbines and so on. If no RM option is
used, the computed frequencies reflect a
dependency on the rotation frequency, hiding the
frequencies of interest. When the RM option is
used, Adams Solver (C++) selects a subset x of the
coordinates shown in the table above to perform
the linearization.

For more details see section Using the RM option.

Compute Eigenvalues and string Specify if only eigenvalues are to be calculated or
Eigenvectors / compute of both eigenvalues and eigenvectors should be
Eigenvalues only calculated.
Frequency Range /Mode string Specify if results should be output for only a
Range subset of the system modes. Define the subset
either as the set of modes which lie within a given
frequency range (frequency range) or as a range of
specific mode numbers (mode range).
Dialog Box - F1 Help 167
Eigen Solution Calculation

For the option: Value Type Do the following:

Energy Of Modes Integer Range i1[,i2] of mode energy distribution. If you
do not specify the number of modes you want to
compute, Adams Vibration automatically chooses
a suitable number of modes based on the model
size. This options shows only if F77 solver is
selected.

Range: i2 > i1 > 0

Coordinates Of Modes Real/Integer Range i1[,i2] of coordinates for
modes/frequencies.

Range:

 i2 > i1 > 0 when Mode Range is selected.

 r2 > r1 > 0.0 when Frequency Range is
selected.
Dissipative Energy Real/Integer Range i1[,i2] of dissipative energy distribution for
modes/frequencies.

Range:

 i2 > i1 > 0 when Mode Range is selected.

 r2 > r1 > 0.0 when Frequency Range is
selected.
Kinetic Energy Real/Integer Range i1[,i2] of kinetic energy distribution for
modes/frequencies.

Range:

 i2 > i1 > 0 when Mode Range is selected.

 r2 > r1 > 0.0 when Frequency Range is
selected.
168 template_based_common
Entity Comments

For the option: Value Type Do the following:

Strain Energy Real/Integer Range i1[,i2] of strain energy distribution for
modes/frequencies.

Range:

 i2 > i1 > 0 when Mode Range is selected.

 r2 > r1 > 0.0 when Frequency Range is
selected.
Names Yes/No If selected, this will list the energy contribution
results by Adams View object name instead of
Adams Solver ID. This options shows only if C++
solver is selected.
Table Precision Integer Specify the number of decimal places to be used in
the energy table output. This options shows only
if C++ solver is selected.

Entity Comments

Shared Dialog Box

Allows standard users to add comments to an entity (also referred to as component).

For the option: Do the following:

Entity name Displays the database name of an entity. You cannot edit this text box. To
add a comment to a different entity, you must first bring up the
appropriate Modify dialog box for the corresponding entity.
Entity type Displays the entity type of the entity listed in the Entity name text box.
Template Builder Comments Displays any comments added to the entity when created in the Template
Builder.
User Comments Enter the comments you want to associate with the entity.
Append Timestamp Select to include a timestamp with the comment.

Entity Information
(Standard Interface) Tools → Model Diagnostics → Entity Info Shared Dialog Box
Provides an overview of a subsystem.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 169
Entity Information

For the option: Do the following:

Information about Select the entity type whose information you want to display:

 All Entities - Your template-based product displays information about all

entities found in the subsystem.
 Hardpoints, Parts, and so on - Your template-based product displays
information about all entities of the type you specified. Learn about
Hardpoints.
Subsystem Select the subsystem whose entity information you want to display.
Save information to a file Select if you want to save the entity information to a text file.
If you select Save information to a file, your template-based product enables the following option:
File Name Enter the name of the text file that will contain the results shown in the
Information window.

Entity Information
(template Builder) Build → Component Name → Entity Info Shared Dialog Box
Provides general information for a specified class of entities in your template to help you understand the
topology of the model.

For the option: Do the following:

Information about Select the entity type whose information you want to display:

 All Entities - Your template-based product displays information about all

entities found in the subsystem.
 Hardpoints, Parts, and so on - Your template-based product displays
information about all entities of the type you specified. Learn about
Hardpoints.
Template Name Select the template whose entity information you want to display.
Save information to a file Select if you want to save the entity information to a text file.
If you select Save information to a file, your template-based product enables the following option:
File Name Enter the name of the text file that will contain the results shown in the
Information window.

Export Assembly to Adams Insight

(Standard Interface) Simulate → DOE Interface → Adams Insight → Export Shared Dialog Box
Exports an assembly to Adams Insight.
170 template_based_common
Feedback Database

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Select the assembly you want to export. The menu lists all open assemblies.
Experiment Enter the name under which you want to save the design of experiments (DOE)
parameters. Your template-based product automatically saves this file, so you can
reference it later to either repeat or modify your experiment.

Adams Insight appends the suffix .xml to the name (see XML File Format). For example,
if you named your experiment trial1, Adams Insight saves it in your default directory
as [Link].
Simulation Script Enter a Simulation Script. Adams Insight uses the simulation script to provide the
simulation details and parameters to Adams Insight.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Feedback Database
[Link]
In an effort to continually improve our products and meet customer requirements, MSC Software provides
a feedback database. If you have access to the Internet, the feedback database provides a quick and easy
method to report problems and request enhancements. If you do not have Internet access, contact your local
MSC Software office who can submit feedback on your behalf.
When providing feedback, be as detailed as possible and include examples of how to reproduce the problem.
This allows us to respond more quickly. To include examples, you can upload files (log files, Datasets, Adams
commands) to the feedback database.
When MSC Software receives your feedback, it automatically assigns it a change request (CR) number and
e-mails you a copy of the response. Do not reply to these e-mails, but rather use the Web interface, because
responding to a CR using reply is not currently supported and MSC Software staff will not see your response.

File Management
(Standard Interface) File → Info → Modified Files Shared Dialog Box
Displays modified assemblies and subsystem in the current session. The table lists only those subsystems and/or
assemblies that have been modified since their last save.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 171
Frequency Bushing

For the option: Do the following:

Diff… Hit this button to launch a graphical difference tool to investigate the changes since
the last save.
Select All Select this toggle to select all of the subsystems/assemblies displayed in the table.
Original Select this toggle to save the files to their original database(s). If you de-select this
Database(s) toggle, the files will be saved to the default writable database.
If you de-select Original Database(s), your template-based product enables the following option:
Default Writable Select the database into which all files will be saved.
Database
Save Selected Files Hit this button to save selected files to disk.
Close Close the dialog box without making any changes.

Frequency Bushing
Tools → Curve Manager
Generate or edit a frequency bushing property file. Learn about Working with Frequency Bushing.
You can create a frequency bushing property file by specifying stiffness curves, loss angles, and scale factors
for all six directions. You can also enter data in the Property Table view. See Modifying Curves.
Besides the Property Table, the Curve Manager lets you edit a frequency bushing property file's:
 Six stiffness curves (three translational and three rotational characteristics)
 Six loss angles
Bushing shape
 Rectangular - No interaxial coupling in force/torque calculations.
 Cylindrical - Forces/torques in x and y directions are coupled. Force/torque in z direction is
independent.
 Spherical - Forces/torques in and about all three directions are coupled.
The following table explains the options that are available in the Curve Manager plot view. Learn about Curve
Manager.
172 template_based_common
Gear Pair

For the option: Do the following:

 Enter the number of points or segments.

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines

Note: The pull-down menus in the upper left corner of the Curve Manager allow you to select an
active plot (translational and rotational stiffnesses) and components (x-y-z axis).

Gear Pair
(Standard Interface) Driveline Components → Gear Pair ...
Modifies a Gear Pairs.

For the option: Do the following:

Gear Pair Name Enter a string that defines the name of the gear pair.
Configuration Select the type of connection for the gear-pair component:

 Input Gear to Shaft - The input gear is permanently engaged to

the input shaft and the synchronizer is located on the output
shaft.
 Output Gear to Shaft - The output gear is permanently engaged
to the output shaft and the synchronizer is located on the input
shaft.
 Input and Output Gear to Shaft - Both input and output gears
are permanently engaged to the shafts and the synchronizer is
deactivated in this case when the hair component contain such a
element.
For more information on the following four parameters, see About Rotational Backlash components.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 173
General Actuation Analysis - Actuator Table

For the option: Do the following:

Backlash Enter a real number that defines the rotational backlash allowed in the
gear mesh. Adams Driveline uses this value to model the contact force
between the two gear parts.

Adams Driveline always applies backlash on the output shaft.

Contact Stiffness Enter a real number that defines the contact stiffness. Adams Driveline
uses this value to model the contact force between the two gear parts, once
the maximum allowed backlash is reached.
Contact Damping Enter a real number that defines the contact damping. Adams Driveline
uses this value to model the contact force between the two gear parts, once
the maximum allowed backlash is reached.
Sharpness Factor Enter a real number that defines the Sharpness Factor. Adams Driveline
uses this value to model the contact force between the two gear parts, once
the maximum allowed backlash is reached.
Invert output direction from Specify if you want the two gear parts to rotate in the same direction or
input direction not.
If the explicit Reduction Ratio Method was chosen for the template, Adams Driveline displays and enables the
following option:
Ratio Specify the gear ratio as a real number. Adams Driveline updates the gear
graphics accordingly.
If a synchronizer component exists in the gear pair, Adams Driveline displays the following two fields and options:
Synchronizer Name The (short) name of the attached synchronizer is shown. The user can
change the synchronizer input data via the modify button on the right
side of the field.
Synchronizer Active If set to yes, the synchronizer shown in the synchronizer name field gets
activated and the perpendicular primitive joint which permanently
engages the gear to the shaft gets deactivated. It is vice versa if the option
is set to no.

General Actuation Analysis - Actuator Table

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Actuators →Table
The table like interface provides the user with an easy way of looking at a list of actuators at once and
activating/deactivating an entire selection.
174 template_based_common
General Actuation Analysis - Actuator Wizard

For the option: Do the following:

Actuation Assembly Select an assembly.
Show Application Filter the contents of the table based on the application area strings defined in
the actuator objects. The option menu values correspond to the actuators
found in the selected assembly.
Sort by The table list can be sorted by the following attributes to make it easier to lo-
cate and edit the desired actuator(s):

 actuator name
 activity
 application
 identifier
The sort can be done in ascending or descending order.
List of actuators Displays the actuators in the current assembly.
Attributes The read-only columns Active, Application, Identifier and Function Expres-
sions provide an overview of the current actuator definitions.
Activate Selection Allows activating and de-activating individual or multiple actuators by select-
ing the corresponding row(s) and hitting the appropriate button.
De-activate Selection
Use the <Ctrl> button to select multiple rows.
Edit selection in wizard Allows editing individual actuators by selecting the corresponding row and
switching to the actuator wizard layout.

If multiple rows are selected upon pressing this button, the data for the first
selected row will be used to open the wizard.

General Actuation Analysis - Actuator Wizard

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Actuators → Wizard
The user is provided with the option of using a wizard of a tabular interface for editing actuator data.

For the option: Do the following:

Actuation Assembly Select an assembly.
Actuator Select the actuator to be modified.
If Activity Status set ‘On’ following options available:
Scale Factor Enter a real number to scale the channel data or function expression.
Offset Enter a real number to offset the channel data or function expression.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 175
General Bushing

For the option: Do the following:

Input Type Select whether to use RPC file data or a function expression as actuator input.
If you select Runtime Function following options available:
Runtime Function Ex- Enter the runtime function expression that will define the actuator.
pression
Expressions for motion actuators should be functions of time.
Select to use the Function Builder to define the function.

For information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.

If you select RPC file following options available”
RPC Input file Enter the name of the RPC file containing the input data.
RPC Channel Set the channel from which to take the data. This option is for use with time
response data in RPC III files only. For more information, see Adams Durability
online help.
Time Offset Enter a real number to define the time offset for the RPC data channel.
Switch Table Switches from the Wizard to the Actuator Table widget.

General Bushing
Tools → Curve Manager
Edit a general bushing property file (*.gbu). Learn about General Bushing.
You can edit a general bushing property file by modifying the static stiffness curves, loss angles, shape and
coupling options. You can also enter data in the Property Table view. See Modifying Curves.
Besides the Property Table, the Curve Manager lets you edit a general bushing property file's:
 Six static stiffness curves (three translational and three rotational characteristics)
 Six loss angles
Bushing shape
 Rectangular - No interaxial coupling in force/torque calculations.
 Cylindrical - Forces/torques in x and y directions are coupled. Force/torque in z direction is
independent.
 Spherical - Forces/torques in and about all three directions are coupled.
Coupling
 Uncoupled - Uncouple Bouc-Wen force from linear stiffness force.
 Coupled - Couple Bouc-Wen force with linear stiffness force.
 Revised - Revised Bouc-Wen force with linear stiffness force.
The following table explains the options that are available in the Curve Manager plot view. Learn about Curve
Manager.
176 template_based_common
General Part Wizard

For the option: Do the following:

 Enter the number of points or segments.

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines

Note: The pull-down menus in the upper left corner of the Curve Manager allow you to select an
active plot (translational and rotational stiffnesses) and components (x-y-z axis).

General Part Wizard

(Template Builder) Build → Parts → General Part → Wizard Shared Dialog Box
Creates a general part and its geometry all within one step. Learn about General Parts.
The wizard provides an easier interface than specifying the entities separately.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
General Part Name Enter a name for the general part.
Type Select one of the following:

 left/right - Define either the left or the right general part, and your
template-based product creates the corresponding opposite general part by
default.
 single - Define a nonsymmetric general part.
Geometry Type Select one of the following:

 Arm. Learn about arm geometry.

 Link. Learn about link geometry.
If you set Geometry Type to Arm, your template-based product displays the following options:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 177
Hardpoint Modification Table

For the option: Do the following:

Coordinate Reference Specify three Coordinate References to define the corners of the triangle
#1/2/3 representing the arm.
Thickness Specify the thickness of the arm part.
Color Select a color for the arm part graphic.
If you set Geometry Type to Link, your template-based product displays the following options:
Coordinate Reference Specify two hardpoints or construction frames to define the ends of the link.
#1/2
Radius Specify the radius of the link part.
Color Select a color for the link part graphic.
Density Select one of the following:

 Material - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from the density value
for the material you selected.
 User Entered - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from a user-entered
density.
If you set Density to Material, your template-based product displays the following option:
Material Type Select a material type your template-based product should use to calculate the
general part's mass and inertia properties.
If you set Density to User Entered, your template-based product displays the following option:
Density Value Enter the density your template-based product should use to calculate the
general part's mass and inertia properties.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Hardpoint Modification Table

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Hardpoint → Table Shared Dialog Box
Modifies hardpoints. Learn about Hardpoints.
178 template_based_common
Hardpoint Modification Table

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Select an assembly whose hardpoints you want to modify. The menu lists all
open assemblies.
Subsystem Select a subsystem whose hardpoints you want to modify. The menu lists all
open subsystems.
Name Filter Enter a partial string to filter the hardpoints you want to display. You can use
multiple wildcards, such as *. For example, hpl_subframe_* would show all
hardpoints that begin with hpl_subframe. For the
MDI_FRONT_SUSPENSION subsystem, the hardpoints shown would be
hpl_subframe_front and hpl_subframe_rear.
List of hardpoint names Displays the hardpoints in the current model. You can use the option, Display:
Single and to display different types of hardpoints.
loc_x/loc_y/ loc_z Display and allow editing the numeric location values for the listed hardpoints.
remarks Displays and allows editing of the hardpoint comments in the Standard User
Interface Subsystem context.
Sort By Select which column is used for sorting the table objects
Display: Single and Select to display some or all of the hardpoints that exist in the current model.
Your template-based product always displays the single hardpoints. In addition,
you can select to display left or right hardpoints, or both.

Note: Regardless of which hardpoints are displayed, changing one of the

Hardpoint Modification Table

(Template Builder) Build → Hardpoint → Table Shared Dialog Box
Displays a table for all hardpoints for a given subsystem or template that you can modify. Learn about
Hardpoints.
To apply the changes you make in the table, select OK or Apply.

For the option: Do the following:

List of hardpoint names Displays the hardpoints in the current model. You can use the option, Display:
Single and to display different types of hardpoints.
loc_x/loc_y/ loc_z Display and allow editing the numeric location values for the listed hardpoints.
remarks Displays and allows editing of the hardpoint comments in the Template Builder
context.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 179
Highlight Connectivity

For the option: Do the following:

Sort By Select which column is used for sorting the table objects
Display Select to display some or all of the hardpoints that exist in the current model.
Your template-based product always displays the single hardpoints. In addition,
you can select to display left or right hardpoints, or both.

Note: Regardless of which hardpoints are displayed, changing one of the

hardpoints in a symmetric pair automatically changes the
corresponding hardpoint. Therefore, your template-based product
always maintains symmetry when you perform modifications using
the Hardpoint Modification Table.
Filter Enter a partial string to filter the hardpoints you want to display. You can use
multiple wildcards, such as *.

Highlight Connectivity
Tools → Model Diagnostics → Highlight Connectivity Shared Dialog Box
Helps you view the connectivity of various components.

For the option: Do the following:

Joint/Bushing/Spring/... Select the entity whose connectivity you want to view.
Entity Name Enter the database name of an entity.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Instrumentation Table
(Standard Interface) Adjust → Instrumentation → Instrumentation Table
The table like interface provides the user with an easy way of looking at a list of Instrumentation at once and
activating/deactivating a selection.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Select an assembly whose instrumentation objects you want to modify. The
menu lists all open assemblies.
Subsystem Select a subsystem whose instrumentation objects you want to modify. The
menu lists all open subsystems.
Name Filter Enter a partial string to filter the instrumentation object you want to display.
You can use multiple wildcards, such as *. For example, ins_acceleration_*
would show all instrumentation objects that begin with ins_acceleration.
180 template_based_common
Loading Table

For the option: Do the following:

List of Instrumentation Displays the instrumentation object in the current assembly / subsystem.
Names
Active Allows activating and de-activating individual instrumentation object.
Sensor Type Display Instrumentation sensor type.
Ay Method Allows changing the Ay calculation Method for Instrumentation object of
type Velocity. For additional information, refer to Ay Calculation Method.
Comments Displays and allows editing of the Instrumentation comments in the Standard
User Interface Subsystem context.

Note: For more information, see Instrumentation help.

Loading Table
(Standard Interface) Adjust → Loading → Table Shared Dialog Box
The table-like interface provides the user with an easy way of looking at a list of loading objects that helps in
activating/deactivating an entire selection.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Select an assembly whose loading object(s) you want to modify. The menu lists all
open assemblies.
Subsystem Select a subsystem whose loading object(s) you want to modify. The menu lists only
subsystems which contains loading components.
Loading Displays all the loading configurations present in the current assembly/subsystem.
Configuration
Activity The table list can be filtered by the activity to make it easier to locate and edit the
desired loading(s). For example, 'on' would show all the loading(s) whose activity is
on.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 181
Loading Table

For the option: Do the following:

Sort by The table list can be sorted by the following attributes to make it easier to locate and
edit the desired loading object(s):

 loading name
 type
 activity
 location type
 attachment type
The sort can be done in ascending or descending order.
Alignment Include Select to include or exclude individual or multiple loading objects during alignment
by selecting the corresponding row(s) and selecting the appropriate button.

Use the <Ctrl> button to select multiple rows.

Alignment Exclude
By default, loading objects are excluded from alignment.
Activate Selection Allows to activate and de-activate individual or multiple loading objects by selecting
the corresponding row(s) and selecting the appropriate button.
De-activate
Selection Use the <Ctrl> button to select multiple rows.
Modify Selection Select a single row, then hit Modify Selection to bring up the Modify Loading dialog
box.

If multiple rows are selected when pressing this button, the object in the first
selected row will be used to populate the Modify Loading dialog box.

Loading Table
(Template Builder) Build → Loading → Table Shared Dialog Box
The table-like interface provides the user with an easy way of looking at a list of loading objects that helps in
activating/deactivating an entire selection.
182 template_based_common
Located Along An Axis

For the option: Do the following:

Loading Displays all the loading configurations present in the current template.
Configuration
Activity The table list can be filtered by the activity to make it easier to locate and edit the
desired loading(s). For example, 'on' would show all the loading(s) whose activity is
on.
Sort by The table list can be sorted by the following attributes to make it easier to locate and
edit the desired loading object(s):

 loading name
 type
 activity
 location type
 attachment type
The sort can be done in ascending or descending order.
Activate Selection Allows activating and de-activating individual or multiple loading objects by
selecting the corresponding row(s) and hitting the appropriate button.
De-activate
Selection Use the <Ctrl> button to select multiple rows.
Modify Selection Select a single row, then hit Modify Selection to bring up the Modify Loading dialog
box.

If multiple rows are selected when pressing this button, the object in the first
selected row will be used to populate the Modify Loading dialog box.

Located Along An Axis

Dialog boxes where you can set location dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Locates an entity at an offset distance along a selected axis of a construction frame. Learn about Construction
Frames.

Note: Because hardpoints have no orientation, you cannot use them to define this type of location
dependency. Learn about Hardpoints.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 183
Located At Flexible Body Node

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Frame Enter the name of the construction frame along whose axis the location offset will
be applied.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Distance Enter the location offset from the construction frame along the axis specified by
Axis.

If the entity you are orienting is a construction frame, you can parameterize the
location offset. You can, for example, use a parameter variable to define the location
offset.

Example: (pvs_length).
Axis Select to apply the offset distance along either the x-, y-, or z-axis of the construction
frame.

Located At Flexible Body Node

Dialog boxes where you can set location dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Locates an entity at a nodal location of a flexible body. Learn about Flexible Bodies.
The appearance of the dialog box varies slightly depending on the entity type: symmetric or single.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Flexible Body Enter the name of the flexible body to be used in parameterizing the entity's location.
Node Id Enter the node ID at which you want to locate the entity (type = single).
Left/Right Node Id Enter the left and right node IDs at which you want to locate the entity (type =
left/right).

Located On A Line
Dialog boxes where you can set location dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Locate an entity at a variable distance between Coordinate References.
184 template_based_common
Location Input Communicator

For the option: Do the following:

Coordinate Reference Enter hardpoints or construction frames to be used in determining the relative
#(1,2) location.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Relative Location (%) Select the desired percentage of the location distance between the two coordinate
Slider references, with the distance being calculated from Coordinate Reference 1 to
Coordinate Reference 2. Therefore, if Coordinate Reference 1 = (50,-100,0) and
Coordinate Reference 2 = (150,100,-20) and you choose 75% as the relative
location, your template-based product locates the entity at (125,50,-15).

Location Input Communicator

Dialog boxes where you can set location dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Locates an entity according to an input location obtained from a location input communicator.

For the option: Do the following:

Input Communicator Enter the name of the location input communicator to be used in determining the
relative location.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

List Inputs Select if you want to review the list of location input communicators currently
defined. This is useful when you work on many templates simultaneously because
it allows you inspect the communicators on other open templates.

Message Window
Displayed as needed Shared Dialog Box
The Message Window is a separate window that displays alerts, warnings, errors, and other messages which
are kept separate from the general-purpose message window. Your template-based product records these
messages in the log file so you can refer to them as needed.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 185
Migrate Chassis Database

Migrate Chassis Database

Tools → Database Management → Database Migration Shared Dialog Box
Migrates an entire Adams Chassis Database (*.vdb) into a compatible Adams Car Database (*.cdb). The
conversion operates on the entire database and converts all system (assembly) and subsystem files. The
original Chassis database is unmodified. After conversion, the newly generated database will automatically be
registered as the default writable database.
Learn about Adams Chassis to Car Database Migration.

For the option: Do the following:

Database Path (*.vdb) Select the database you would like to migrate to Adams Car.
Target Method Select one of the following options:

 Use .vdb Parent Directory

Adams Car database will be written to the parent directory of the specified
vdb.
 Use Working directory
Adams Car database will be written to the current working directory.
 Browse for Target Directory
Select the (parent) folder for the Adams Car database using the file
navigator.
Target Folder Path Displays the target path where the newly created Adams Car database will be
written.

Model Auditor
Tools → Model Diagnostics → Model Auditor Shared Dialog Box
Audits a full-vehicle model using user-entered tolerances. The results are displayed on screen and saved to a
text file. See Model Auditor for more information.
186 template_based_common
Model Auditor

For the option: Do the following:

Vehicle Assembly Select the assembly whose information you want to audit. The menu lists all
open full-vehicle assemblies.
Assembly Variant Select the variant you wish to audit.

The menu lists all full-vehicle assembly variants of the chosen assembly.
Switches to the selected variant and adds the required testrig as needed.

Report Filename Enter a string that specifies the report filename. The default filename is the
model name appended with “.dat”.
Solver settings Select this option to check and report the Solver settings for this assembly
variant.
Beam length vs. diameter Select this option to check beam element length compared with diameter.
Part inertias Select this option to check that all rigid body inertias are physically
meaningful.
Part CG locations Select this option and enter a distance tolerance to check each part’s CG
offset.
Bushing coincident with Select this option to check bushing locations compared to their Zp/Xp
ZpXp locations.
Bushing damping fraction Select this option and enter lower and upper limits to check bushing
damping relative to stiffness.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 187
Modify 2D Spur Gear Force

For the option: Do the following:

Maximum bushing Select this option and enter a limit to check bushing stiffness.
stiffness
Spline validity Select this option and enter a limit for the 2nd derivative to check the splines
used by the following force objects:

 ac_spring
 ac_damper
 ac_bushing
 ac_airspring
The following attributes are checked:

 sign convention
 monotony (does not include ac_airspring)
 2nd derivative
Tire scale factor Select this option and enter lower and upper limits to check scale factors used
by the Ford Tire Model. (This is applicable only for Adams FoCus)

Modify 2D Spur Gear Force

(Standard Interface) Right-click → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a 2D Spur Gear Force.

For the option: Do the following:

Gear Force Name Enter a name for the gear force.
Learn about Contact Force.

You can include dynamic and static friction in the gear force. You define the friction by specifying static
and dynamic coefficient, and slip and transition velocity. Learn about Calculation of Friction Force.
Stiffness Enter the stiffness. The stiffness is in force units/length units.
Force Exponent Specify the force exponent of the contact force formulation. The force
exponent is typically larger than 1.
Scale Factor Specify the scale factor of the contact force formulation. The scale factor is
in length units.
Damping Specify the damping coefficient of the contact force formulation. The
damping is in force units * time units/length units.
188 template_based_common
Modify Adjustable Force

For the option: Do the following:

Penetration Depth Specify the penetration depth of the contact force formulation. The
penetration depth is in length units.
Friction Enabled Select one of the following:

 Yes - Turns the friction on.

 No - Turns the friction off; that is, friction parameters = 0.
Static Coefficient Enter the static friction coefficient of the contact, which is the maximum
value of the friction.
Slip Velocity Enter the velocity limit, when the friction is at its maximum.
Dynamic Coefficient Enter the dynamic friction coefficient of the contact.
Transition Velocity Enter the velocity limit, when friction transitions into dynamic friction only.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Select to display the Data Editor/Viewer and plot the force characteristics based
on the specified stiffness, scale factor, and force exponent.

Modify Adjustable Force

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Adjustable Force Shared Dialog Box
Modifies an adjustable force. Learn about adjustable forces.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 189
Modify Adjustable Force

For the option: Do the following:

Adjustable Force Enter the database name of an adjustable force.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Adjustment Type Displays the type of adjustable force you are modifying. You cannot change the type
of adjustable force.
Desired Value Specify the toe or camber or caster target values that the adjustable force is trying to
achieve.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
More More button will display additional options of adjustable forces.
190 template_based_common
Modify Adjustable Force

For the option: Do the following:

Pattern Enter an array of ones (on) and zeros (off ) to control the sequence of adjustment for
multiple adjustable forces.

For example, if you enter 0,0,1,0, your template-based product performs four initial
static equilibrium simulations for adjusting the suspension, but the adjustable force
acts during the third static equilibrium Simulation only. You should coordinate the
pattern of all forces in all templates.

Recommended pattern for toe and camber adjustable forces in the templates -

Toe :101

Camber : 0 1 1

Recommended pattern for toe, camber and caster adjustable forces in the templates -

Toe :100101

Camber : 0 1 0 1 0 1

Caster :001010

Note: The first column will do toe adjustment, second column will do camber
adjustment, third will do caster adjustment - these three adjustment
generally are very close to the expected value. There could be influence of
change in caster on the toe/camber, so fourth column is to do minor toe
and camber adjustment. There could be slight change in the caster due to
change in the toe/camber so that fifth column and so on. Also, you can't
do all three adjustments together unless there is sufficient compliance in
the system to accommodate effect of change in the caster on the
toe/camber and vice versa.
Stiffness/Damping Specify stiffness/damping values, which form the basis of the force function
definition. The adjustable force assembly instance includes the force definition.
Lock with Motion Select one of the following:

 yes - Motion is locked at the value computed during the initial static solution.
 no - Motion displacement changes over the dynamic portion of the Simulation,
which may introduce undesired effects when large amplitude force changes
occur in the model.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 191
Modify Adjustable Force

For the option: Do the following:

Motion Delta Display zero value for no adjustment.

Display the adjusted value which is required to move the J part to achieve desired
value.
Reset Set motion delta value to zero. The adjustable force will be reset to initial suspension
configuration. Useful when you have multiple adjustable forces of same type.

You should coordinate the Reset button when you have multiple adjustable forces in
the template.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Modify Aerodynamic Force

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Aerodynamics Shared Dialog Box
Modifies an Aerodynamic Force. Learn about GFORCE: Aerodynamic Modeling.

For the option: Do the following:

Aerodynamics Enter the name of the aerodynamic force you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Location 1 Enabled if the aerodynamic force location 1 was defined to be User Entered when
created. Enter the x, y, and z values for the aerodynamic force location 1, separated
by commas (for example, -100, 200, 50).

If the location was defined at creation time using a location expression, the Location
text box is disabled and the location cannot be modified in Standard Interface. You
can modify location of the hardpoint or construction frame used in the location
expression.

Location defines the initial Cartesian coordinates of the origin of the force with
respect to the Global Coordinate System (GCS).
Location 2 Enabled if the aerodynamic force location 2 was defined to be User Entered when
created. Enter the x, y, and z values for the aerodynamic force location 2, separated
by commas (for example, -100, 200, 50).

Location defines the initial Cartesian coordinates of the origin of the force with
respect to the Global Coordinate System (GCS).
Property File Specify the property file that contains the coefficient data for the aerodynamic force.

Select the "+" button to add a new property file to the list. Select the "-" button to
remove one or more property files from the list.

The property files for aerodynamic force are classified into four types as shown in
below table:
Property File Type Aerodynamic Force Coefficients Spline Type
Dialog Box - F1 Help 193
Modify Aerodynamic Force

For the option: Do the following:

Single Point 2D Single location  Drag 2D
 Side Force
 Lift
 Roll
 Pitch
 Yaw
Two Point 2D Two Locations  Drag 2D
 Side Force Front
 Side Force Rear
 Lift Front
 Lift Rear
 Roll
Single Point 3D Single location  Drag 3D
 Side Force
 Lift
 Roll
 Pitch
 Yaw
Two Point 3D Two Locations  Drag 3D
 Side Force Front
 Side Force Rear
 Lift Front
 Lift Rear
 Roll
194 template_based_common
Modify Aerodynamic Force

For the option: Do the following:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
Dialog Box - F1 Help 195
Modify Air Spring

Modify Air Spring

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies the reference to the property file and, therefore, the spring characteristics associated with the air
spring you selected. This is comparable to changing springs in the physical world.

For the option: Do the following:

Air Spring Enter the name of the air spring you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Property File Specify a property file. Note that air-spring property files are in XML File Format only.

Select the "+" button to add a new property file to the list. Select the "-" button to
remove one or more property files from the list.
Trim Load/ Select one of the following:
Auto Trim Load
 Trim Load - Enter a value that sets the spring's trim load.
 Auto Trim Load - Adams Solver uses a differential equation to set the spring's trim
load.
Scale Factor Enter a scale factor to be applied to the force function. The default is 1.0.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
196 template_based_common
Modify Arm

For the option: Do the following:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product

displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Modify Arm
Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies an arm. Learn about Arm Geometry.

For the option: Do the following:

Arm Enter the name of the arm you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Dialog Box - F1 Help 197
Modify Arm

For the option: Do the following:

Thickness Specify the desired thickness of the arm geometry.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

Modify Bumpstop
(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a bumpstop. Learn about Working with Bumpstops.

For the option: Do the following:

Bumpstop Enter the Database name of a bumpstop.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Property File Specify the property file that contains the force-deflection relationship for the
bumpstop.

Select the "+" button to add a new property file to the list. Select the "-" button to
remove one or more property files from the list.

Learn About Bumpstop Property Files.

Clearance/ Select a method to specify when the bumpstop force activates:
Impact Length
 Clearance - Specify the distance the I Coordinate Reference can travel towards the J
coordinate reference before the bumpstop force activates.
 Impact Length - Specify how close the I coordinate reference can approach the J
coordinate reference before the bumpstop force activates.
Scale Factor Enter a scale factor to be applied to the force function. The default is 1.0.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 199
Modify Bumpstop

For the option: Do the following:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.
While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window.
After exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
200 template_based_common
Modify Bushing

Modify Bushing
(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Defines a bushing. Learn about Working with Bushings.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Bushing Enter the Database name of a bushing.
If the bushing orientation was parameterized in the template, the following option menu is displayed:
Use default/User Select the desired orientation mode. If you select "Use default", the orientation
entered expression in the template will be used, and no further user input is required. If you
select "User entered", the orientation method can then be selected. Choose one of:

 Euler Angles. Enter three orientation angles directly.

 Direction Vectors. Enter three values each to describe the bushing's X and Z
vectors.
Preload
Linear Preload Enter the initial translational force loading on the bushing, defined along the X-, Y-,
and Z-axis of the bushing.
Torsional Preload Enter the initial torsional force loading on the bushing, defined about the defined
along the X-, Y-, and Z-axis of the bushing.
Offset (disabled if an FMU is selected as the property file)
Linear Offset Enter the initial translational displacement of the bushing, defined along the defined
along the X-, Y-, and Z-axis of the bushing.
Rotational Offset Enter the initial rotational displacement of the bushing, defined about the defined
along the X-, Y-, and Z-axis of the bushing.
Scale Factors
Stiffness Scale Enter the X, Y, Z translational scale factors for the stiffness components.
Factor (trans)
Stiffness Scale Enter the X, Y, Z rotational scale factors for the stiffness components.
Factor (rot)
Damping Scale Enter the X, Y, Z translational scale factors for the damping components.
Factor (trans)
Damping Scale Enter the X, Y, Z rotational scale factors for the damping components.
Factor (rot)
Dialog Box - F1 Help 201
Modify Bushing

For the option: Do the following:

Tolerance
Tolerance in Select one of the following:

 local - specifies the marker tolerance relative to the bushing's orientation

 global - specifies the marker tolerance relative to the model's orientation
Note: The I and J marker tolerance is always saved as a local offset relative to the
bushing. You can specify the tolerance in the global coordinate system, but
when you modify the bushing, you will see the tolerance values expressed in
the bushing's local coordinates.
I Marker tolerance Specify the I marker's X, Y, Z offset from the bushing location
J Marker tolerance Specify the J marker's X, Y, Z offset from the bushing location
I Part Compliance (disabled if an FMU is selected as the property file)
I part compliance Select this toggle to activate a bushings-in-series calculation. This is used to represent
(bushings-in- the local compliance of the I part.
series)
Property File I Part Select a linear bushing property file (.lbu or .xml) to represent the local I part
compliance.
Orient using Select one of the following:

 Default: orient the I part compliance so that it matches the bushing’s orientation
 Euler Angles: orient the I part compliance using Euler angles
 Direction Vectors: orient the I part compliance by specifying the X and Z vectors
Euler Angles Enter three rotation angles to define the I part compliance orientation
X Vector Enter three values to define the X vector of the I part compliance
Z Vector Enter three values to define the Z vector of the I part compliance
If the I part compliance is active, the following tab will be enabled:
J Part Compliance (disabled if an FMU is selected as the property file)
J part compliance Select this toggle to activate a bushings-in-series calculation. This is used to represent
(bushings-in- the local compliance of the J part.
series)
Property File J Part Select a linear bushing property file (.lbu or .xml) to represent the local J part
compliance.
Orient using Select one of the following:

 Default: orient the J part compliance so that it matches the bushing’s orientation
 Euler Angles: orient the J part compliance using Euler angles
 Direction Vectors: orient the J part compliance by specifying the X and Z vectors
202 template_based_common
Modify Bushing

For the option: Do the following:

Euler Angles Enter three rotation angles to define the J part compliance orientation
X Vector Enter three values to define the X vector of the J part compliance
Z Vector Enter three values to define the Z vector of the J part compliance
Property File Specify the property file that contains the force data for the bushing. If you supply I or
J property files, a bushing-in-series calculation will be performed the next time the
model's property files are read. See Bushings in Series for more information.

Select the "+" button to add a new property file to the list. Select the "-" button to
remove one or more property files from the list.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

For the option: Do the following:

Select to modify:

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

This button is disabled if an FMU is selected as the property file.

Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

This button is disabled if an FMU is selected as the property file.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
This button is displayed, if an FMU bushing property file is selected. Select this
button to launch the FMU parameter dialog box, where any exposed FMU
parameters can be modified.
204 template_based_common
Modify Connector

Modify Connector
(Standard Interface) Adjust → Connector → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a connector. Learn about Working with Connectors.

For the option: Do the following:

Connector Enter the database name of a connector.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes

Method Select one of the following:

 joint – The joint will be active, and the bushing will be inactive.
 bushing – The bushing will be active, and the joint will be inactive.
 both – The bushing and joint will both be active.
 none – The bushing and joint will both be inactive.
 kinematic flag – If the subsystem is in kinematic mode, the joint will be
active, and the bushing inactive. If the subsystem is in compliant mode,
the bushing will be active, and the joint will be inactive.
Bushing Displays the associated bushing. Select the bushing button to open the
Modify Bushing dialog box.
Joint Type Select one of the following joint types:

 fixed
 revolute
 spherical
 translational
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

For the option: Do the following:

Request Activity Select one of the following options:

 inherit - Request activity will be controlled by the settings at the

subsystem level
 override - Enables you to (de)activate selected requests for the joint and/or
bushing
If you set Request Activity to override, the following options are displayed:
Requests Select to activate any number of the following request types:

 Displacement
 Velocity
 Acceleration
 Force
If Force is selected above, the following options are enabled:
Coordinate(s) Select to activate any number of the following force requests:

 Local - force will be reported in the object's coordinate system

 I-Part - force will be reported in the I-part's local coordinate system
 J-Part - force will be reported in the J-part's local coordinate system
 Global - force will be reported in the global coordinate system
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Modify Curve Appearance

Tools → Curve Manager → Settings → Appearance Shared Dialog Box
Modifies the appearance of the curve.

For the option: Do the following:

Symbols Select a symbol from the list in the pull-down menu.
Interpolation Points Enter the interpolation points.
3D Surface Selected a rendering option from the pull-down menu.
Rendering

Modify Damper
(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a damper. Learn about Working with Dampers.

For the option: Do the following:

Damper Enter the database name of a damper.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Property File Specify the property file that contains the force-velocity relationship for the damper.

Select the "+" button to add a new property file to the list. Select the "-" button
to remove one or more property files from the list.
Scale Factor (comp) Enter a scale factor to be applied to the force function, in the compression
direction. The default is 1.0.
Scale Factor (reb) Enter a scale factor to be applied to the force function, in the rebound direction.
The default is 1.0.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

For the option: Do the following:

Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you
want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.
While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window.
After exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to
display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Modify Dyno
(Standard Interface) Adjust → Dyno Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a Dyno.
208 template_based_common
Modify Dyno

For the option: Do the following:

Dyno Name Enter the database name of a dyno.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Dyno Type Select one of the following:

 Motion-Velocity
 Torque
Function Type Select one of the following:

 Torque Demand - The driving torque is expressed as a function of the Adams

For the option: Do the following:

Geometry Scaling Adjust the size of the dyno geometry.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Modify FE Part
(Standard Interface) Adjust → FE Part Shared Dialog Box
Modifies an FE Part. Learn about FE Parts, a method of modeling structural flexibility.

For the option: Do the following:

FE Part Enter the database name of an FE Part.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Damping Ratio Specify the fraction of the stiffness matrix that contributes to the damping matrix.
(Stiffness)
Damping Ratio Specify the fraction of the mass matrix that contributes to the damping matrix.
(Mass)
Material Type Select the material. Your template-based product determines the mass properties
according to the density of the material you selected.
Faceting Tolerance Specify a real value to control the mesh density for visualizing the FE Part. The
default Faceting Tolerance is 300.0. Increasing this value will result in a finer mesh
of triangles, which gives a more accurate representation of curved surfaces.
Increasing the tolerance, however, also increases the memory requirements of the
geometry engine and adds to the computational overhead, which makes it run
slower. Maximum limit is 5000.0
210 template_based_common
Modify Flexible Body

For the option: Do the following:

External Geometry Select and specify a Shell file if you want to use imported geometry rather than the
default geometry generated based on Section data. The shell will be located and
oriented relative to the FE Part's Centerline_Marker. If the shell was not generated
in this coordinate system, it may not import correctly.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
Select to view the comments that were added during the creation of the FE Part in
the Template Builder.

Select to modify the related FE Part Section. If the FE Part references more than
one Section, the Modify Section dialog box will open with the Section referenced
by FE_Node_1.

Modify Flexible Body

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Flexible Body → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a flexible body. Learn about Flexible Bodies and modal flexibility, your template-based product's
method of modeling flexible bodies.

For the option: Do the following:

Flexible Body Enter the database name of a flexible body.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Location Enter the three coordinates, separated by commas, that define the new location (for
example, -100, 200, 50).
Orient Using Select if you want to orient the flexible body using:

For the option: Do the following:

Z Vector Enter the x, y, and z values that define the direction of the z-vector along which the
flexible body will be oriented.
Modal Neutral File Select an MNF file that represents the part.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

If you have several different modal neutral files all representing the same part, but
with different modal flexibility characteristics, you can switch between them by
selecting the desired MNF file.
Sprung Mass % Enter percentage contribution of part total mass into sprung mass. Select a location
of sprung mass contribution from the list for the subsystem with role other than
front or rear. (Used only for SVC event)
Select to view the comments that were added during the creation of the flexible
body in the Template Builder.

Select to display the Flexible Body Mode Manager, where you can view/animate
mode shapes and perform other operations, such as define the deformation scale
factor and inertia modeling, or enable/disable modes.

Modify Friction Element

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Friction Shared Dialog Box
Refer to the documentation on the friction element in the Adams Solver online help.

Note: If you are creating friction on a joint active only in kinematic mode, be aware that when you
select compliant mode, the friction force will be disabled along with the joint.

Modify Gear Element

Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a Gear.
212 template_based_common
Modify Gear Element

For the option: Do the following:

Gear Name Enter the database name of a gear.
Property File Example Gear Property File.

You can:

 Use an existing property file by specifying the name of the property file that
contains the parameter values of the component.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
When you specify a property file, your template-based product automatically
updates the dialog box with the values from the property file.
 Create a new property file by specifying a new name. When you specify a new
name, your template-based product displays the database path that it will use
to create the new file.
Your template-based product always creates a new property file in the default
writable database.
Geometry tab
Module* Enter the module of the gear. The module is equal to 1/diametral pitch.
Number of Teeth* Enter the number of teeth of the gear. The pitch diameter is computed based on
the equation:

pitch diameter = module * number of teeth

Tooth Angle* Enter the tooth angle of the gear. This angle is also referred to as the pressure angle.
It is used to specify the tooth profile which is based on the involute function.
Helix Angle* Enter the helix angle of the gear. For straight gears, enter 0.

The helix angle must be: -50d helix angle 50d

Gear Width* Enter the width of the gear.
Addendum Factor* Enter the addendum factor. This factor is used to compute the tip (outer) diameter
of gear: tip diameter = pitch diameter + 2 * module * (addendum factor +
addendum modification coefficient).
Dedendum Factor* Enter the dedendum factor. This factor is used to compute the root (foot) diameter
of the gear: root diameter = pitch diameter - 2 * module * (dedendum factor -
addendum modification coefficient).
Addendum Mod. Enter the addendum modification coefficient. This coefficient is used to describe
Coefficient* the profile shift of the gear and is used as indicated above.
Delta Tooth Enter the delta tooth thickness of the gear. This thickness is the deviation of
Thickness* circular thickness at the pitch circle from the standard tooth thickness of an ideal
gear.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 213
Modify Gear Element

For the option: Do the following:

Mass Properties tab
Mass* Enter the value for the mass of the gear part.
The part is located in the center of the gear, with the z-axis as the rotational axis.
Ixx/Iyy/Izz* Enter the values defining the principal mass-inertia components of the gear part.
Ixy/Izx/Iyz* Enter the values defining the deviational (cross-product) mass-inertia components
of the gear part.
CM Location Enter the x, y, and z values of the location offset. You can offset the center of mass
Relative to Part* and inertia markers of the gear part a specified distance from the gear part's
(optional) location. Learn about Markers.
Torsional Spring tab

The following torque function defines the rotational spring-damper:

T = - az * Torsional Stiffness - wz * Torsional Damping

where:

 Yes - Fixes the gear to the attach part.

 No - Constrains the gear to the attach part with a rotational joint.
214 template_based_common
Modify General Part

For the option: Do the following:

Activate Torsional Select one of the following:
Spring
(enabled if gear is not  Yes - Adds a torsional spring to the rotational joint.
fixed)  No - No torque is acting on gear rotational axis.

Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want
to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Note: *Parameter values are stored in the property file. You can only update these values when
Editable is selected.

Modify General Part

(Standard Interface) Adjust → General Part → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a general part. Learn about General Parts.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 215
Modify General Part

For the option: Do the following:

General Part Enter the name of the general part you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Location Enabled if the general part's location was defined to be User Entered when created.
Enter the x, y, and z values for the general part's location, separated by commas (for
example, -100, 200, 50).

If the location was defined at creation time using a location expression, the Location
text box is disabled and the location cannot be modified in Standard Interface.

Location defines the initial Cartesian coordinates of the origin of the part’s Body
Coordinate System (BCS) with respect to the Global Coordinate System (GCS).
Orient using Select if you want to orient the general part using:

 Euler Angles
 Direction Vectors
If you select Euler Angles, your template-based product enables the following option:
Euler Angles Enter the three Euler angle values that define the general part's orientation.
If you select Direction Vectors, your template-based product enables the following options:
X Vector Enter the x, y, and z values that define the direction of the x-vector along which the
general part will be oriented.
Z Vector Enter the x, y, and z values that define the direction of the z-vector along which the
general part will be oriented.
Mass Enter the mass of the general part.
Ixx/Iyy/Izz Enter the values that define the moments of inertia components of the general part.
The inertia reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of mass (CM) location.
Learn About Entering Mass Moments of Inertia.
Off-Diagonal Select to display and undisplay the Ixy/Izx/Iyz text boxes.
Terms
Sprung Mass % Enter percentage contribution of part total mass into sprung mass. Select a location
of sprung mass contribution from the list for the subsystem with role other than
front or rear. (Used only for SVC event)
If you select Off-Diagonal Terms, your template-based product displays the following options:
Ixy/Izx/Iyz Enter the values that define the products of inertia components of the general part.
(optional) The inertia reference frame is parallele to BCS at the center of mass (CM) location.
CM Location Enter the x, y, and z values of the location offset. You can offset the center of mass
Relative to Part and inertia markers of the general part a specified distance from the general part's
(optional) Body Coordinate System location. Learn about Markers.
216 template_based_common
Modify General Part

For the option: Do the following:

Density Select one of the following

 Material - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from the current
density value for the selected material
 User-Entered - Calculate the mass and inertia properties from a user-
entered density
If you set Density to Material, your template-based product displays the following option:
Material Type Select a material type from the list of materials currently defined. When you select
a material, your template-based product uses the density defined for that material
to calculate the general part's mass and inertia properties.
If you set Density to User-Entered, your template-based product displays the following option:
Density Value Enter a density that your template-based product will use to calculate the general
part's mass and inertia properties.
Select to calculate and display the mass and inertia into the respective fields.

Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based product
displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Rigid to Flex/ Select to replace a rigid body with a flexible body or a flexible body with another
Flex to Flex flexible body. Your template-based product displays the appropriate dialog box:

 Swap a rigid body for another flexible body

 Swap a flexible body for another flexible body
Dialog Box - F1 Help 217
Modify Hardpoint Location

Modify Hardpoint Location

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Hardpoint → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a hardpoint. Learn about Hardpoints.

For the option: Do the following:

Hardpoint Enter the database name of a hardpoint.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Location Enter the three real values that define the location of the hardpoint, separated by
commas (for example, -100, -50, 200).
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you
want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Modify Hardpoint Location

(Template Builder) Build → Hardpoint → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies the location of a hardpoint. If you modify a left or right hardpoint, your template-based product
also modifies its corresponding symmetric pair accordingly. Learn about Hardpoints.
218 template_based_common
Modify Instrumentation

For the option: Do the following:

Hardpoint Enter the database name of a hardpoint.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Location Enter the three real values that define the location of the hardpoint, separated by
commas.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

Modify Instrumentation
(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Defines a instrumentation. Learn about Instrumentation.

For the option: Do the following:

Instrumentation Enter the Database name of an Instrumentation.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Sensor Type Display type of sensor.
Tire Compression Display whether tire compression is active or not if sensor type is Stringpot
If sensor type is Stringpot and tire compression is active then it enables the following options:
Laser Properties
Inside Offset Location Enter wheel carrier location from wheel center location.
Outside Offset location Enter body side location from wheel center location.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 219
Modify Instrumentation

For the option: Do the following:

Mass Enter mass of the following laser assembly parts:

 Platform
 Data cable
 Inside Laser
 Outside Laser
 Anti Rotation Support
If sensor type is Velocity is selected then it enables the following options:
Ay Calculation Method Option is only available when sensor type Velocity selected.
Select one of the following:
 Corrected for roll and pitch. Ay in body frame, corrected with respect to
roll and pitch (Ay as Adams measures)
 Uncorrected for roll and pitch. Ay in body frame, uncorrected (Ay as an
accelerometer would measure)
This will calculate lateral acceleration (an additional request "vehicle statistics"
added at I location) with and without accelerometer gravity effect.
By default (option 1) the acceleration is output without gravity effects. This
acceleration is measured in the body reference frame. Option 2 corresponds to
acceleration as an accelerometer would measure. This value is higher than that
from option 1, because it contains an additional component due to angular
orientation of the body, roughly equal to sin(Roll).
220 template_based_common
Modify Linear Bushing

For the option: Do the following:

Active Select one of the following:

 Yes: Instrumentation is active.

 No: Instrumentation is not active.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Modify Linear Bushing

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies the reference to the property file and, therefore, the linear bushing characteristics associated with the
bushing you selected. This is comparable to changing bushings in the physical world.

Note: The orientation options are not enabled because they are not editable in Standard Interface.
You can only modify the orientation by editing the associated template.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 221
Modify Linear Damper

For the option: Do the following:

Bushing Select the bushing you want to modify.
Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Property File Select a property file.
Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based product
displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Modify Linear Damper

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies the reference to the property file and, therefore, the linear damper characteristics associated with the
damper you selected. This is comparable to changing dampers in the physical world.
222 template_based_common
Modify Linear Spring

For the option: Do the following:

Damper Select the damper you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Property File Select a property file.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based product
displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Modify Linear Spring

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies the reference to the property file and, therefore, the linear spring characteristics associated with the
spring you selected. This is comparable to changing springs in the physical world.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 223
Modify Linear Spring

For the option: Do the following:

Spring Select the spring you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Property File Select a property file.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Preload/Installed Enter the preload/installed length of the spring.
Length
If you select Installed Length, Adams Car enables the following option:
Select to display the Calculate Installed Length dialog box where you can enter the
desired preload. Adams Car pastes the new calculated installed length into the
Installed Length text box.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based product
displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
224 template_based_common
Modify Link

Modify Link
Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a link. Learn about Link and Cylinder Geometry.

For the option: Do the following:

Link Enter the name of the link you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Radius Specify the radius of the link geometry.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

Modify Loading
(Standard Interface) → Adjust → Loading → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a loading. Learn about Loading.

For the option: Do the following:

Loading Part Enter the name of the loading you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

If you select Part tab, your template-based product displays the following options:
Loading Type Display the type of loading either Cargo or Occupant.
If Loading Type is Occupant, your template-based product displays the following option:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 225
Modify Loading

For the option: Do the following:

Location Type Select one of the following:

 cg - The occupant CG is placed at the specified location.

 NHTSA - The CG is offset by standard distance {- 62.55,0.0,181.8}mm

 User Defined - The occupant CG is offset user specified distance.
H-Point to CG Enter the x, y, and z values of the CG offset.
Distance
Location Enabled if the general part's location was defined to be User Entered when created.
Enter the x, y, and z values for the general part's location, separated by commas (for
example, -100, 200, 50).

If the location was defined at creation time using a location expression, the
Location text box is disabled and the location cannot be modified in Standard
Interface.

Location defines the initial Cartesian coordinates of the origin of the part's Body
Coordinate System (BCS) with respect to the Global Coordinate System (GCS).
Orient using Select if you want to orient the general part using:

For the option: Do the following:

Ixy/Izx/Iyz Display/enter the values that define the products of inertia components of the
(optional) loading part. The inertia reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of mass
(CM) location.
CM Location Enter the x, y, and z values of the location offset. You can offset the center of mass
Relative to Part and inertia markers of the loading part a specified distance from the loading part's
(optional) Body Coordinate System location. Learn about Markers.

This field will be non-editable if you select Location type as h-point.

If you select Attachment tab, your template-based product displays the following options:
Attachment Displays either Joint or Bushing.
If attachment is Bushing, your template-based product displays the following options:
Bushing Name Displays its database name.

You can modify the bushing by right click > point to its database name > select
modify.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want
to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Modify Location Dependencies

(Template Builder) → Command Window Shared Dialog Box
Modifies the location dependencies of any component. See a Summary of Location Dependency Options.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 227
Modify Motor

For the option: Do the following:

Entity Enter the name of the entity whose location you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Dependency Type Select one of the following:

 User-entered Location
 Delta Location From Coordinate
 Centered Between Coordinates
 Located Along An Axis
 Located On A Line
 Location Input Communicator
 Located At Flexible Body Node

Modify Motor
(Standard Inteface) Right-click Motor → Modify
Modifies a motor

For the option Do the following

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Motor Name Enter the name of the motor you want to modify.
Method Displays the motor method.
Motor type Displays the motor type. The parameters in the parameter tab depend on this type.
Direction Select one of the following

 Clockwise: The rotor part of the motor rotates in clockwise direction

 Counter-clockwise: The rotor part of the motor rotates in the counter-clockwise
direction.
Mass/Inertia
Create Rotor Stator Parts Select to create Rotor and Stator Parts. If turned off, Parts are not created and hence a
SFORCE is created between Rotor and Stator attach part.
Rotor Length Enter the length of the cylinder geometry to be created on the rotor part. This Parameter
is for Visualization Purpose. The Value entered here is used to create the Motor Model in
the ADAMS GUI.
228 template_based_common
Modify Motor

For the option Do the following

Rotor Radius Enter the diameter of the cylinder geometry to be created on the rotor part. This
Parameter is for Visualization Purpose. The Value entered here is used to create the Motor
Model in the ADAMS GUI.
Stator Length Enter the length of the box geometry to be created on the stator part (that is, the
dimensions parallel the rotor axis of rotation). This Parameter is mainly for Visualization
Purpose. The Value entered here is used to create the Motor Model in the ADAMS GUI.
Stator Width Enter the width of the box geometry to be created on the stator part. (Not cross-section
will be a square; so, this value will used for both dimensions perpendicular to the rotor
axis of rotation). This Parameter is mainly for Visualization Purpose. The Value entered
here is used to create the Motor Model in the ADAMS GUI.
Define Mass By Select one of the following option for mass and inertia properties of rotor/stator:

 Geometry and Material Type

 Geometry and Density
 User Input
If you selected Geometry Material Type, the following options appears:
Material Type Enter the type of material for the rigid body. Adams Car displays the material's
composition below the text box. Learn about Standard Material Properties.
If you selected Geometry and Density, the following options appears:
Density Enter the density of the part. Adams Car uses the part's density and the volume of the
geometry to calculate its mass and inertia.
If you selected User Input, the following options appear:
Mass Enter the mass of the part.
Ixx/Iyy/Izz Enter the values that define the moments of inertia components of the general part. The
inertia reference frame is parallel to BCS at the centre of mass (CM) location.
Off-Diagonal Terms Select to display and undisplay the Ixy/Izx/Iyz text boxes.
If you select Off-Diagonal Terms, your template-based product displays the following options:
Ixy/Izx/Iyz Enter the values that define the products of inertia components of the general part. The
(optional) inertia reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of mass (CM) location.

For the option Do the following

Parameters
Curve Based Method
Enter Spline file Select the following to enter the spline file.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 229
Modify Motor

For the option Do the following

Spline File name Spline File Name: Enter the curve data of Speed vs Torque via external file.

Note: In .mtr file, the independent axis (Angular Velocity) should be in

RPM units The ordinate axis (Torque) units must be as per the
model units.
Analytical Method
AC Synchronous

The torque for a AC Synchronous motor is calculated as,

For the option Do the following

 T = Motor Torque  P = Poles
 V = Supply voltage
 Er = Rated Back EMF
 K = BEMF constant
 s = Angular velocity
 φ = Power Factor Angle
 Vr = Rated Voltage
 δΕ = ElectricalTorque Angle
 Ir = Rated Current
 δ = Torque Angle
 Ra = Armature Resistance
 X = Reactance
 φ = Rated Power Factor Angle
 E = Back EMF
 Xr = Rated Reactance
 ωr = Rotor angular velocity
 fr = Rated Frequency
 f = Supply Frequency
 PFr = Rated Power Factor
 L = Inductance
Supply Voltage (V) Enter supply voltage value. This will corresponds to the voltage provided on
the supply terminal to produce a meaningful output.
Rated Current (Ia) Enter the value of current that flows through the motor circuit.
Resistance (Ra) Enter resistance value of the windings in the Motor.
Power Factor (φ) Enter power factor. The power factor of an AC system is defined as the ratio
between the real power flowing to the load and the apparent power in the
circuit. It is a dimensionless number between -1 and 1.
Frequency (f ) Enter frequency. The oscillations frequency of alternating current (AC) in an
electric power grid transmitted from a power generation plant to the end-user.
In the Americas it is typically 60 Hz and in other parts of the world this is 50
Hz.
Inductance (L) Enter inductance. Inductance is the behaviour of a coil in resisting any change
of electric current through it. According to Faraday's law, inductance has an
influence on the emf generated to oppose a given change in current.
Poles (p) Enter poles. This will corresponds to the No. of poles in the stator field of the
Motor based on its specification. It is a factor that plays a role to identify the
capacity of the motor.
Synchronous Speed (ωs) Synchronous speed is the speed of the rotor in which it rotates in step with the
rotating magnetic field of the stator.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 231
Modify Motor

For the option Do the following

DC Shunt Motor

The torque for a D.C. Shunt motor is calculated as

T = KφI a

ZP Es – Eb ZφNP
K = ---------- I a = ----------------- E b = ---------------
2πa Ra 60a
Where
 T = Torque developed in N-m
 K = Torque constant
 φ = Flux per pole in Webers
 Ia = Armature current in Amps
 Z = Number of conductors
 P = Number of Poles
 a = Number of parallel paths in the Armature.
 Es = Source Voltage in Volts
 Eb = Back emf induced in Volts
 Ra= Armature resistance in ohms
 N = Revolutions per Minute
No. of conductors (Z) Enter number of conductors.
Flux Per Pole (φ ) Enter flux per pole. It is the measure of the quantity of magnetism, that is, the
total number of magnetic lines of force passing through a specified area in a
magnetic field.
Source Voltage (Es) Enter source voltage. Enter source voltage value. This will corresponds to the
voltage provided on the supply terminal to produce a meaningful output.
No. of Paths (P) Enter the number of parallel armature Winding paths.
Armature Resistance (Ra) Enter armature resistance. The Resistance offered by the windings in the
moving part of the motor to current flow in the coils.
No. of Poles (P) Enter no of poles. This will corresponds to the No of poles in the stator field
of the Motor based on its specification. It is a factor that plays a role to identify
the capacity of the motor.
232 template_based_common
Modify Motor

For the option Do the following

Type  Shunt
Enter shunt value. This will corresponds to the type of DC motor. A shunt
DC motor connects the armature and field windings in parallel or shunt
with a common D.C. power source.
 Series
Enter series value. This will corresponds to the type of DC motor. A series
DC motor connects the armature and field windings in series with a
common D.C. power source.
Series Motor
If Series type is selected, the following options will be displayed:
2
T = K 1 KI

ZP Es – Eb ZφNP
K = ---------- I a = ----------------- E b = ---------------
2πa Ra 60a
Where
 T = Torque developed in N-m
 K = Torque constant
 K1 = Series motor constant

 φ = Flux per pole in Webers

 I = Armature current in Amps
 Z = Number of conductors
 P = Number of Poles
 a = Number of parallel paths in the Armature
 Es = Source Voltage in Volts
 Eb = Back emf induced in Volts
 Ra = Armature resistance in ohms
 N = Revolutions per Minute
No. of conductors (Z) Enter number of conductors.
Flux Per Pole (φ ) Enter flux per pole. It is the measure of the quantity of magnetism, that is, the
total number of magnetic lines of force passing through a specified area in a
magnetic field.
Source Voltage (Es) Enter source voltage. Enter source voltage value. This will corresponds to the
voltage provided on the supply terminal to produce a meaningful output.
No. of Paths (P) Enter the number of parallel armature Winding paths.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 233
Modify Motor

For the option Do the following

Armature Resistance (Ra) Enter armature resistance. The Resistance offered by the windings in the
moving part of the motor to current flow in the coils.
No. of Poles (P) Enter no of poles. This will corresponds to the No of poles in the stator field
of the Motor based on its specification. It is a factor that plays a role to identify
the capacity of the motor.
Series Motor Constant (K1) Enter torque constant for the motor. This represents the proportionality
between motor torque and motor current.
Brushless DC

The torque for a BLDC motor is calculated as

T = k d k p k s mnBLRI

For the option Do the following

Coil Pitch Factor (kp) Enter coil pitch factor. The pitch factor kp reflects the fact that windings are
often not fully pitched, that is, the individual turns are reduced in order to
decrease the length of the end-turns and do not cover a full pole-pitch (also
called chorded).
Slot Skew Factor (ks) Enter skew factor. The skew factor ks reflects the fact that the winding is
angularly twisted, which results in an angular spread and reduced emf.
Teeth per Phase Count (m) Enter the number of teeth per phase present in the motor.
No of Turns per Phase (n) Enter the number of turns per phase in the armature winding.
Armature Resistance (Ra) Enter armature resistance. The Resistance offered by the windings in the
moving part of the motor to current flow in the coils.
No. of Poles (P) Enter number of poles. This will corresponds to the number of poles in the
stator field of the Motor based on its specification. It is a factor that plays a role
to identify the capacity of the motor.
Strength of PM Field (B) Enter strength of permanent magnetic field of the stator.
Length of the Rotor Windings (L) Enter the effective length of rotor windings.
Radius of the Armature (R) Enter the radius of armature winding.
Flux Per Pole (φ ) Enter flux per pole. It is the measure of the quantity of magnetism, that is, the
total number of magnetic lines of force passing through a specified area in a
magnetic field.
No. of Conductors (Z) Enter number of conductors.
No. of Paths Enter the number of parallel armature Winding paths.
Maximum Torque (T) The Maximum torque indicated by the user within which the output torque
of the motor is to be controlled.
Max. Ang. Velocity The Max. Angular velocity indicated by the user such that Rated Torque =
Tmax - Tmax * (Actual Angular Velocity/ Max. Angular Velocity).
Control Method  Speed Control - Controls Output speed of the rotor shaft based on user
spline input.
 Position Control - Controls Angular displacement of the rotor shaft based
on user spline input.
Enter Spline File The spline is the input file (CSV) by the user which contains data as speed vs
time or angle vs time based on control method.
Friction Torque This is a constant opposing torque and does not vary with velocity.
Damping Coefficient This is specified as a constant which is multiplied by angular velocity to get the
damping torque. It represents the combined electromagnetic and viscous
damping.
Gain Specify the gain value used to calculate the speed gain. This speed gain is used
in the PID controller.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 235
Modify Motor

For the option Do the following

P Gain Specify the Proportional gain applied to the input signal.
I Gain Specify the gain applied to the integral of the input signal.
D Gain Specify the gain applied to the derivative input.
Stepper

The torque for a Stepper motor is calculated as,

π
T 1 = HSin   --- ⁄ S θ
2

π
T 2 = HCos   --- ⁄ S θ
2
Where
 T1 = Torque on the first winding.
 T2 = Torque on the Secondary winding.
 H = Holding Torque in N-m.
 S = Step Angle in radians.
 θ = Shaft Angle in radians.
Holding Torque (H) Enter holding torque. The amount of torque required to remain the motor
shaft in a particular position.
Control Type  One Phase On-Full Step Drive
 Two Phase On-Full Step Drive
Step Angle (S) Enter step angle. The angle by which the rotor of an stepper motor will rotate
when a signal is passed.
Friction Torque This is a constant opposing torque and does not vary with velocity.
Damping Coefficient This is specified as a constant which is multiplied by angular velocity to get the
damping torque. It represents the combined electromagnetic and viscous
damping.
Input Type To indicate the type of data in the input file.

 PPS vs Time - Pulse per second vs time. The Stepper motor rotates by its
step angle when a pulse is received.
 Target Angle vs Time - Target angle is the end position of rotor shaft where
the user desires the motor to stop.
Input File The spline is the input file (CSV) by the user which contains data as speed vs
time or angle vs time based on control method.
236 template_based_common
Modify Motor

For the option Do the following

External Method
External Method  External System Library Import
 Co-Simulation
If External System Library Import is selected, the following options will be displayed:
Plant Input/Output  Standard
Standard method creates the GSE equation, by importing the
External System Library (from MATLAB or Easy5) and using the
default input and output state variables.
 User Defined
User-Defined method follows the same method as that of Standard
method except it allows the user to select input and output state
variables.
If Standard is selected, the following options will be displayed:
General State Equation Name Enter the name of the GSE to be created.
External System Library Enter the name of the external system library. If the extension entered is .fmu,
Adams will expect an FMU that conforms to the FMI standard.
Generate External Model Specifications Click this button to do a plant export using whatever is specified for plant i/o
above. This is to create .inf and .m files that are particular to this motor.

 Easy5
 MATLAB
 FMU
If User Defined is selected, the following options will be displayed:
General State Equation Name Enter the name of the GSE to be created.
External System Library Enter the name of the external system library. If the extension entered is .fmu,
Adams will expect an FMU that conforms to the FMI standard.
Import I/O Signals from Existing Select to display the Database Navigator, where you can select an existing
Controls Plant controls plant from which output and input signals are to be imported.
From Poutput (s) Select to display the Database Navigator, where you can select an existing
poutput from which to import output signals.
From Pinput (s) Select to display the Database Navigator, where you can select an existing
pinput from which to import input signals.
Static Hold Select one of the following:

 Off: Turns static hold off.

 On: Turns static hold on.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 237
Modify Motor

For the option Do the following

Generate External Model Specifications Click this button to do a plant export using whatever is specified for plant i/o
above. This is to create .inf and .m files that are particular to this motor.

Error Scale Factor:

 Values > 0 will scale all of the ESL error tolerance values in order to tighten
or loosen these values, that is, Final GSE error tolerance = Error Scale
Factor * ESL error tolerance
 Values <= 0 will disable using the ESL error tolerance values, and the
default computation for the local integration error will be used.
Information Check to display verbose information about the general state equation (GSE)
that the controls system import created.
Visibility This option is only available for External System Libraries of type FMU.
Visibility means the FMU runs in interactive mode. Turn it off if you want to
run it in batch mode. In order for this option to work in Adams, visibility
needs to be supported by the specified FMU.
Communication Interval This option is only available for External System Libraries of type FMU. To
co-simulation with the FMU you need to specify the communication interval.
Sample the FMU at least two times faster than the highest frequency of interest
(refer to Nyquist frequency).
If Co-Simulation is selected, the following options will be displayed:
238 template_based_common
Modify Motor

For the option Do the following

Plant Input/Output  Standard
Standard method creates the GSE equation, by importing the
External System Library (from MATLAB or Easy5) and using the
default input and output state variables.
 User Defined
User-Defined method follows the same method as that of Standard
method except it allows the user to select input and output state
variables.
If Standard is selected, the following options will be displayed:
Target Software  Easy5
 MATLAB
 FMU
If User Defined is selected, the following options will be displayed:
Controls Plant Name Enter the name of the Controls Plant to be created
File Prefix Enter the prefix for the .adm, .cmd, .acf, .m, and .inf files that Adams Controls
creates.
Initial Static Analysis Select one of the following:

 Yes: Performs initial static analysis.

 No: Does not perform initial static analysis.
Note: If Initial Static Analysis is set to Yes and Type is set to linear, Adams
Controls performs a static analysis before the linear analysis.
Otherwise, Adams Controls performs an initial conditions analysis.
Initialization Command Check if you want to enter Adams View or Adams Solver non-time advancing
(NTA) commands that you want to have executed before the co-simulation or
function evaluation starts. In the text box that appears, enter one NTA
command. To execute more than one NTA command, create an .acf file and
refer to it using the FILE/COMMAND = command_file_name string in this
text box.
Import Settings From Existing Controls Select to display the Database Navigator, where you can choose an existing
Plant controls plant whose settings you want to use in your current plant. Adams
Controls updates the Adams Controls Plant Export dialog box with the
appropriate settings.
Input Signal (s) Enter names of state variables that you want to use as plant inputs. Select From
Pinput to enter state variables from existing plant inputs.
Output Signal (s) Enter names of state variables that you want to use as plant outputs. Select
From Poutput to enter state variables from existing plant outputs
Dialog Box - F1 Help 239
Modify Nonlinear Beam

For the option Do the following

Target Software  Easy5
 MATLAB
 FMU
Analysis Type Select one of the following:

 linear - Creates a linearized representation of the model in terms of (A, B,

 Scale Factor
 Step Function
 Expression
If Scale Factor is selected, the following options displayed:
Scale Factor To multiply the torque value by a constant or a variable.
If Step_Function is selected, the following options displayed:
Start Time Enter start time.
End Time Enter end time.
Start Value Enter start value.
End Value Enter end value.
If Expression is selected, the following options displayed:
Expression To scale the torque value within an expression.

Modify Nonlinear Beam

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Defines a nonlinear beam. Learn about Nonlinear Beams.
240 template_based_common
Modify Nonlinear Beam

For the option: Do the following:

Nonlinear Beam Enter the Database name of a nonlinear beam.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Outer Radius Specify the outer radius of the nonlinear beam. Your template-based product
determines the mass and inertia properties of the nonlinear beam according to the
outer radius, inner radius, and material type, with the cylinder wall thickness equal to
(outer radius - inner radius).
Inner Radius Specify the inner radius of the nonlinear beam cylinders.
If Shape of nonlinear beam is rectangular, your template-based product enables the following options:
Height Specify the height of the nonlinear beam.
Width Specify the width of the nonlinear beam.
If you set Properties to User Entered, your template-based product enables the following options:
Ixx/Jxx Enter the torsional constant. The torsional constant is sometimes referred to as the
torsional shape factor or torsional stiffness coefficient. It is expressed as unit length to
the fourth power. For a solid circular section, Ixx is identical to the polar moment of
4
inertia J = ( πr ⁄ 2 ) . For thin-walled sections, open sections, and non-circular
sections, you should consult a handbook.
Iyy/Izz Enter the area moments of inertia about the neutral axes of the beam cross sectional
areas (y-y and z-z). These are sometimes referred to as the second moment of area
about a given axis. They are expressed as unit length to the fourth power. For a solid
4
circular section, Iyy = Izz = ( πr ⁄ 4 ) . For thin-walled sections, open sections,
and non-circular sections, you should consult a handbook.
Iyz Enter product of inertia (available for FE_Part)
Area Enter the uniform area of the beam cross-section geometry. The centroidal axis must
be orthogonal to this cross section.
Damping Ratio Enabled only when you are modifying a flexible nonlinear beam. Enter the damping
(optional) ratio applied to the beam elements for the flexible nonlinear beam.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 241
Motor

For the option: Do the following:

Material Type Select a material type for the nonlinear beam. Your template-based product determines
the mass properties according to the density of the material you selected.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

Motor
Tools → Curve Manager
Modify a Motor Property File. Learn about Motor.
You can edit a motor's torque curve by entering a slope, or define any torque curve using a mathematical
formula or tabular data entry. See Modifying Curves.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.
242 template_based_common
Modify Orientation Dependencies

For the option: Do the following:

 Enter the number of points or segments.

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines

Modify Orientation Dependencies

(Template Builder) → Command Window Shared Dialog Box
Modifies the orientation dependencies of any component. See a Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.

For the option: Do the following:

Entity Enter the name of the entity whose orientation you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Dependency Type Select one of the following:

 Delta Orientation From Coordinate

 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis Along Line
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber
Dialog Box - F1 Help 243
Modify Parameter Variable

Modify Parameter Variable

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Parameter Variable → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a parameter variable. Learn about Parameter Variables.

For the option: Do the following:

Parameter Variable Enter the database name of a parameter variable.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

String/Real/Integer Enter a value for the parameter variable. Make sure that the value is of the same
type as the option displayed. For example, if the option is Integer, enter an
integer value.
If you are modifying a parameter variable of type real, your template-based product displays the following option:
Units Displays the unit specification of the real parameter variable. You cannot
modify the unit.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Table Select it to display the Parameter Variable Modification Table.
244 template_based_common
Modify Reboundstop

Modify Reboundstop
(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Defines a reboundstop. Learn about Working with Reboundstops.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Reboundstop Enter the Database name of a reboundstop.
Property File Specify the property file that contains the force-deflection relationship for the
reboundstop.

Select the "+" button to add a new property file to the list. Select the "-" button to
remove one or more property files from the list.
Clearance/ Select a method to specify when the reboundstop force activates:
Impact Length
 Clearance - You specify the distance the I Coordinate Reference can travel towards
the J coordinate reference before the reboundstop force activates.
 Impact Length - Specify how close the I coordinate reference can approach the J
coordinate reference before the reboundstop force activates.
Scale Factor Enter a scale factor to be applied to the force function. The default is 1.0.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

For the option: Do the following:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based product
displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to modify the property file in the Curve Manager. While the Curve Manager is
active, you cannot perform operations outside the Curve Manager; after exiting the
Curve Manager, you can resume working in your product.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Modify Ride Height Sensor

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify
Modifies the time constant and deadband of the ride height sensor. Use these parameters to tune the sensor
to behave like an actual ride height control valve.
Learn about Ride Height Sensors.

For the option: Do the following:

Ride Height Sensor Enter the name of the ride height sensor you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Time Constant Enter a time constant (time units) to tune the first-order lag built into the sensor's
response.
Deadband Enter a deadband (angle units) to tune the amount of free travel the suspension will
be allowed before the air spring trim load is adjusted.
246 template_based_common
Modify Spline Gear Force

Modify Spline Gear Force

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a Spline Gear Force.

For the option: Do the following:

Gear Force Name Enter the name of the gear force.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Learn about Contact Force Formulation Based on Oilfilm Thickness Theory.
Stiffness File Select the Tooth Stiffness Property File.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

The stiffness coefficient is defined as:

stiffness = (torque/pitch radius)/(angular displacement * pitch radius)

where:

 Pitch radius - Pitch radius of the first gear.

 When the second gear is held fixed and the damping (or velocity) is zero:
• Torque - Torque on the first gear.
• Angular Displacement - Displacement of the first gear, in radians.
The stiffness is in force units/length units.
Select to display the Data Editor/Viewer to plot the translational stiffness.

Oilfilm Thickness Specify the oil film thickness of the contact force formulation.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 247
Modify Spline Gear Force

For the option: Do the following:

Damping Specify the damping coefficient of the contact force formulation.

The damping coefficient is defined as:damping = (torque/pitch radius)/( angular

velocity * pitch radius)

where:

 Pitch radius - Pitch radius of the first gear.

 When the second gear is held fixed and the stiffness is zero:
• Torque - Torque on the first gear.
• Angular Velocity - Velocity of the first gear, in radians/time units.
The damping is in force units * time units/length units.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based product
displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to display the Update Instance(s) dialog box, to update more instances of the
current type.
248 template_based_common
Modify Spring

Modify Spring
(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a spring. Learn about Working with Springs.

For the option: Do the following:

Spring Enter the database name of a spring.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Property File Specify the property file that contains the force-deflection relationship for the spring
(either linear or nonlinear).

Select the "+" button to add a new property file to the list. Select the "-" button to
remove one or more property files from the list.

Learn About Spring Property Files.

Preload/ Select the desired install method:
Installed Length/
Use Hardpoints  Preload - Enter the desired spring load at the current position of the I and J
coordinate references.
 Installed Length - Enter of the spring at the current position of the I and J
coordinate references.
 Use Hardpoints - Your template-based product disables the text box and displays
the length of the spring, which equals the distance between the I and J
coordinate references.
If you select Installed Length, your template-based product enables the following option:
Select to display the Calculate Installed Length dialog box where you can enter the
desired preload. Your template-based product pastes the new calculated installed
length into the Installed Length text box.
Scale Factor Enter a scale factor to be applied to the force function. The default is 1.0.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

For the option: Do the following:

Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want
to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.
While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window.
After exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to
display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Modify Switch Part

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Switch Part Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a switch part. Learn about Switch Parts.
250 template_based_common
Modify Switch Part

For the option: Do the following:

Switch Part Enter the name of the switch part you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Switch to Part Specify the part to which the switch part will be fixed. The menu lists the parts to
which the switch part can be fixed.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Modify Strut
(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies the reference to the property file and, therefore, the strut characteristics associated with the damper
you selected.

For the option: Do the following:

Strut Enter the database name of a Strut.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Property File Specify the Property Files that contains the strut properties for Strut Modeling. Only XML
File Format property files are supported.

Select the "+" button to add a new property file to the list. Select the "-" button to
remove one or more property files from the list.
Scale Factor Enter a scale factor to be applied to the force function, in the compression direction.
(comp) The default is 1.0.
Scale Factor (reb) Enter a scale factor to be applied to the force function, in the rebound direction. The
default is 1.0.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
252 template_based_common
Modify Three Phase Gear Force

For the option: Do the following:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 XML File Format property file in the Property File Editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Modify Three Phase Gear Force

(Standard Interface) Right-click → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a Three-Phase Gear Force.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 253
Modify Three Phase Gear Force

For the option: Do the following:

Gear Force Name Enter a name for the gear force.
Learn about Contact Force Formulation Based on Oilfilm Thickness Theory.
Stiffness Enter the stiffness.

The stiffness coefficient is defined as:

stiffness = (torque/pitch radius)/(angular displacement * pitch radius)

where:

 Pitch radius - Pitch radius of the first gear.

 When the second gear is held fixed and the damping (or velocity) is zero:
• Torque - Torque on the first gear.
• Angular Displacement - Displacement of the first gear, in radians.
The stiffness is in force units/length units.
Damping Specify the damping coefficient of the contact force formulation.

The damping coefficient is defined as:damping = (torque/pitch radius)/( angular

velocity * pitch radius)

where:

 Pitch radius - Pitch radius of the first gear

For the option: Do the following:

Oilfilm Thickness Specify the oilfilm thickness of the contact force formulation.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based product
displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to display the Update Instance(s) dialog box, to update more instances of the
current type.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 255
Modify Torsion Beam Spring

Modify Torsion Beam Spring

(Standard Builder) Right-click component → Modify

Modify a torsion beam spring. Learn about Torsion Beam Springs.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Torsion Spring Name Enter the database name of a torsion beam spring.
Finish Angle Enter the finish angle, which is the bar windup required to achieve the desired
ride height, should be determined by adjusting the full vehicle model.
Property File Specify the property file that contains material properties, inner and outer radius,
and active length for the torsion spring.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Learn about Torsion Beam Springs Property Files.

Adjuster arm assembly properties
Mass Enter the mass of the Adjuster arm assembly.
Ixx/Iyy/Izz Enter the values that define the moments of inertia components of the Adjuster
arm assembly. The inertia reference frame is parallel to BCS at the center of
mass (CM) location.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
256 template_based_common
Modify Torsional Joint

For the option: Do the following:

Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.

While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window.
After exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based
product displays this information in the Information window, but you can
choose to display the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

Modify Torsional Joint

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Defines a torsional joint.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Torsional Joint Enter the Database name of a torsional joint.
Torque Preload Z Enter the initial torque loading on the torsional joint, defined about the z-axis of the
torsional joint.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 257
Modify Truck Air Spring

For the option: Do the following:

Rotational Stiffness Enter the rotational stiffness of the torsional joint, defined along the x-, y-, and z-axis
XYZ of the torsional joint.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Modify Truck Air Spring

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify
Modifies the reference to the property file and, therefore, the spring characteristics associated with the air
spring you selected. This is comparable to changing springs in the physical world.
Learn about Truck Air Springs.
258 template_based_common
Modify Truck Air Spring

For the option: Do the following:

Air Spring Name Enter the name of the air spring you want to modify.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Property File Specify a Property Files. Note that air spring property files are in XML File Format only.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Preload Type Choose a method to determine the air spring trim load:

 Constant - enter a force value that will be applied during static and transient
analyses
 Automatic-Fixed - enter the name of an existing ride height sensor. The
sensor will automatically control trim load during static equilibrium, then
hold trim load fixed during subsequent analyses.
 Automatic-Variable - enter the name of an existing ride height sensor. The
sensor will automatically control trim load during static equilibrium, and
continue to adjust trim load during subsequent analyses as needed.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

Adams Car displays the Modify Comment dialog box.

Learn about Recording Comments.

Select to modify the property file in the Property File Editor (spring).

Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product

displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor
Dialog Box - F1 Help 259
Modify Vibration Input Channel

Modify Vibration Input Channel

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Adams Vibration → Input Channel Shared Dialog Box
Modifies a Vibration Input Channel.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Input Channel Name Enter the database name of a vibration input channel.
Vibration Actuator Type Select one of the following:

 Swept Sine
 Rotating Mass
 PSD
 User
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

 no - Only modify properties of the selected component.
When you modify a single component, this option is disabled because a single
component is by nature asymmetric.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

Modify Wheel
(Standard Interface) Right-click component → Modify Shared Dialog Box
Defines a wheel. Learn about Wheels.
260 template_based_common
Modify Wheel

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Wheel Name Enter the Database name of a wheel.
Cm Offset Enter the center of mass offset of the wheel part from the wheel location. Your
(optional) template-based product applies the center of mass offset along the z-axis of the wheel.
Mass Enter the mass of the wheel part.
Ixx Iyy Enter values that define the Ixx and Iyy mass-inertia components of the wheel part.
Izz Enter values that define the Izz mass-inertia component of the wheel part.
Center Offset Enter the offset of the wheel-center geometry along the z-axis of the wheel part.
(optional)
Property File Specify the property file that contains the data for the wheel.

Select the "+" button to add a new property file to the list. Select the "-" button to
remove one or more property files from the list.
High Performance When selecting a PAC2002 tire property file, the High Performance mode allows the
model to run at a high speed with a slight reduced accuracy, see High Performance switch
in Adams Car.
Symmetric Enabled when you modify component pairs (or brothers):

 yes - Modify properties of both components in a pair.

For the option: Do the following:

Check Belt Mass When set to yes, it will check if the belt mass and inertia can be subtracted from the
total wheel mass and inertia as specified under 'Mass', 'Ixx Iyy' and 'Izz'. Note this
will be applied only for FTire and PAC2002 with belt dynamics.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based product
displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Select to view property file information. By default, your template-based product
displays this information in the Information window, but you can choose to display
the information in a text editor.

Learn about:

 Working with the Information Window

 Editing Files Using a Text Editor

New File
Tools → Curve Manager → File → New Shared Dialog Box
Creates a new property file in the Curve Manager. You can use that property file to define the dynamic
characteristics of components or to define a wheel envelope.
262 template_based_common
New Generic Assembly

For the option: Do the following:

Type Specify the type of property file you want to create in the Curve Manager. The
property file types are:

 Bushing
 Frequency Bushing (if the Ride plugin is loaded)
 Bumpstop
 Reboundstop
 Spring
 Damper
 Wheel Envelope
 Differential

New Generic Assembly

(Standard Interface) File → New → Generic Assembly Shared Dialog Box
Creates a new assembly from the specified subsystems.

Note: You can open, modify, and save subsystems independent of any assemblies that reference them.
Therefore, when you open an assembly, the referenced subsystems may have changed since the
last time you saved the assembly.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Assembly Name Enter a name for the assembly.
Assembly Class Enter the Assembly Class you want to use.
Subsystems Select subsystems:

 To search/browse for a subsystem, right-click the text box next to .

 To select a subsystem that is open in the current session, select . The icon

changes to and the text box is replaced by a pull-down menu from which
you can select a subsystem.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 263
New Subsystem

For the option: Do the following:

Test Rig Select Test Rig and then select a Test Rig from the menu. The menu lists the valid active
test rigs.
Shift Subsystems Opens the Subsystem Shift dialog where you can enter a longitudinal and vertical shift
for each subsystem specified.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

New Subsystem
(Standard Interface) File → New → Subsystem Shared Dialog Box
Creates a new subsystem based on an existing template.

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Name Enter a name for the subsystem.
Minor Role Select a minor role.
Template Name Specify the existing template that defines the topology and default parameters
for the subsystem.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Translate from default Select if you want to translate the subsystem from the default position defined
position in the subsystem.

Because of symmetry constraints, you cannot perform a subsystem

translation along the y-axis.
If you select Translate from Default Position, your template-based product enables the following two options:
264 template_based_common
New Suspension Assembly

For the option: Do the following:

Fore/Aft Translation Select whether the x-direction translation will occur along the Fore (+x) or Aft
(-x) direction. Enter the translation value in the text box next to the pull-
down menu.
Up/Down Translation Select whether the z-direction translation will occur along the Up (+z) or
Down (-z) direction. Enter the translation value in the text box next to the
pull-down menu.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

New Suspension Assembly

(Standard Interface) File → New → Suspension Assembly Shared Dialog Box
Creates a new suspension assembly from the specified subsystems.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.
Assembly Name Enter a name for the assembly.
Suspension Subsystem Do one of the following:

 To search/browse for a subsystem from the database, right-click the text box
next to .

 To select a subsystem that is open in the current session, select . The

icon changes to and the text box is replaced by a pull-down menu

from which you can select a subsystem.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 265
New Template

For the option: Do the following:

Steering Subsystem If you want to include a steering subsystem in your assembly, select the toggle
to the left of the text box. Then, do one of the following:

 To search/browse for a subsystem from the database, right-click the text box
next to .

 To select a subsystem that is open in the current session, select . The

icon changes to and the text box is replaced by a pull-down menu

from which you can select a subsystem.
Other Subsystems If you want to include additional subsystems in your assembly, such as anti-roll
bar, select the toggle to the left of the text box.

 - Right-click the text box and then search/browse for a subsystem from
the database.

 - Right-click the text box and then select a subsystem open in the
current session.
Suspension Test Rig From the pull-down menu, select the Test Rig you want to use in your assembly.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

New Template
(Template Builder) File → New Shared Dialog Box
Creates a new template.
After you create the new template, save it to a writable Database for use when you or others create subsystems.
266 template_based_common
Open Assembly

For the option: Do the following:

Template Name Enter a name for the template.
Major Role Select a major role for the template.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any entity,
to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays different
comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you want to record
comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your template-

Open Assembly
(Standard Interface) File → Open → Assembly Shared Dialog Box
Opens an assembly in the current session.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Specify the assembly you want to open.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Variant Select one of the assembly variants defined in the assembly file. If the
assembly does not contain any variants, this option menu will be disabled.
Open all subsystems in Select this toggle if you want to open every subsystem referenced in the
session assembly file, regardless of the selected assembly variant. If the assembly
does not contain any variants, this toggle will be disabled.

Open File
Tools → Curve Manager → File → Open Shared Dialog Box
Opens a property file in the Curve Manager. Once you've opened the file, you can modify it as needed.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 267
Open Subsystem

For the option: Do the following:

Type Specify the type of property file you want to open in the Curve Manager. The property
file types are:

 Bushing
 Bumpstop
 Reboundstop
 Spring
 Damper
 Wheel Envelope
File Specify the property file you want to open.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Open Subsystem
(Standard Interface) File → Open → Subsystem Shared Dialog Box
Opens a subsystem in the current session.
When you open a subsystem that specifies a flexible representation of a rigid part, your template-based
product replaces the equivalent rigid body from the template with the flexible body. Learn about Flexible
Bodies.

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Name Specify the subsystem file you want to open.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Variant Select one of the subsystem variants defined in the subsystem file. If the subsystem
does not contain any variants, this option menu will be disabled.

Open Template
(Template Builder) File → Open Shared Dialog Box
Opens a template in the current session.
When opening templates that contain flexible parts, your template-based product does not convert the parts
to rigid parts with flexible representations. Your must convert the parts manually. Learn about Flexible Bodies.
268 template_based_common
Orient About Axis

For the option: Do the following:

Template Name Specify the template file you want to open.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Orient About Axis

Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Orients a construction frame at an offset rotation from a construction frame's orientation. Learn about
Construction Frames.

Note: Because hardpoints have no orientation, you cannot use them to define this type of orientation
dependency. Learn about Hardpoints.

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Frame Enter the name of the construction frame from which the orientation offset will be
applied.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Orientation Enter the orientation offset from the construction frame about the axis specified by
About Axis.

You can parameterize the orientation offset. You can, for example, use a parameter
variable to define the orientation offset.

Example: (pvs_angle)
About Axis Select to apply the offset distance along either the x-, y-, or z-axis of the construction
frame.

Orient Axis Along Line

Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Orients an entity along a line between two Coordinate References. Your template-based product orients the
specified axis in the direction from Coordinate Reference 1 to Coordinate Reference 2, and applies an
arbitrary rotation to determine the remaining two axes' directions.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 269
Orient Axis To Point

For the option: Do the following:

Coordinate Reference #(1,2) Enter hardpoints or construction frames to determine the relative
orientation.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Axis Select either the z- or x-axis as the directed axis.

Orient Axis To Point

Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Orients an entity towards a Coordinate Reference. Your template-based product orients the axis you specify
towards the coordinate reference, and applies an arbitrary rotation to determine the remaining two axes'
directions.

For the option: Do the following:

Coordinate Reference Enter hardpoints or construction frames to determine the dependent orientation.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Axis You can choose either the z- or x-axis as the directed axis.

Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Orients an entity in a plane defined by the entity's location and two other Coordinate References, with one of
the axes directed along a specified vector in the plane. The directed axis will point in the direction defined
from the entity's location to Coordinate Reference 1.
270 template_based_common
Orientation Input Communicator

For the option: Do the following:

Coordinate Reference Enter the name of each Coordinate Reference to be used in determining the
#(1,2) orientation plane and direction vector.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Axes You can select either the z- or x-axis as the directed axis. Regardless of your
selection, the XZ (ZX) plane will always be oriented in the plane defined by the
entity and the two coordinate references. If you select:

 ZX - The z-axis will be parallel to the vector defined from the entity to
Coordinate Reference 1.
 XZ - The x-axis will be parallel to the vector defined from the entity to
Coordinate Reference 1.

Orientation Input Communicator

Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Orient an entity according to an input orientation obtained from an orientation input communicator.

For the option: Do the following:

Input Communicator Enter the name of the orientation input communicator to be used in determining
the relative orientation.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

List Inputs Select if you want to review the list of orientation input communicators currently
defined. This is useful when you work on many templates simultaneously because
it allows you inspect the communicators on other open templates.

Oriented In Plane
Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Orients an entity in a plane defined by the location of three Coordinate References, with one of the axes directed
along a specified vector in the plane. The three coordinate references define the plane; the directed axis will
point in the direction defined from Coordinate Reference 1 to Coordinate Reference 2.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 271
Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool

For the option: Do the following:

Coordinate Reference Enter hardpoints or construction frames to determine the orientation plane and
#(1,2,3) direction vector.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Axes You can select either the z- or x-axis as the directed axis. Regardless of your
selection, the XZ (ZX) plane will always be oriented parallel to the plane
defined by the three coordinate references. If you select:

 ZX - The z-axis will be parallel to the vector defined from Coordinate

Reference 1 to Coordinate Reference 2.
 XZ - The x-axis will be parallel to the vector defined from Coordinate
Reference 1 to Coordinate Reference 2.

Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool

(Standard Interface) Simulate → Component Analysis → Tire Data and Fitting Tool… Shared Dialog Box
The Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool (TDFT) can calculate PAC2002 or PAC-MC tire model parameters
out of tire measurement data or virtual test data for steady-state pure and combined slip conditions, for the
basic properties and (for PAC2002 only) enveloping and belt dynamics parameters including the possibility
to visualize/modify tire characteristics.
Tires added to the Tire Data Tool can be saved to a tire database file. Each tire in the tire database can be
exported to a PAC2002 or PAC-MC tire property file that can be used with Adams Tire.
Learn more about the Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool (TDFT).

For the option: Do the following:

File
Create New Tire Property (default values) Add a new tire to the tires table with default values defined in
acar/shared_car_database.cdb/[Link]/template_tdft.tir.
Open Tire Database Open a Tire Database .xml file.

Save Tire Database Save a Tire Database .xml file that contains the tires table as well as
references to measurement data files.

Save Tire Database As Save a Tire Database as .xml file.

272 template_based_common
Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool

For the option: Do the following:

Open Tire Property and Add to Database Open a PAC2002 or PAC-MC tire property file and add the tire
parameters to the tires table.

Save Tire Property Save tire parameters to a PAC2002 or PAC-MC tire property file for the
selected tire in the tires table.

Save Tire Property As Save tire parameters to a PAC2002 or PAC-MC tire property file as .tir
file.
Convert Tire Property to PAC Model Allows you to convert any Adams Tire property file towards a PAC2002
or PAC-MC tire property file, except for 5.2.1 tire and FTire.
Exit Close the Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool
Edit
Deactivate Tire Property in Database Remove a selected tire from the tires table after after clicking 'Update
Database'.

Activate Tire Property in Database Remove the Deactivate status from a selected tire in the tires table.

Copy Selected Tire Property Copy the contents of a selected tire to a new tire in the tires table.

Update Database Update the tires table.

Settings
Plot Units… Tire characteristic units.
Optimization Settings Setting the options for the parameter optimizer.
Run
Tire Plot Plot tire characteristic.

Clear Tire Plot(s) Remove the tire characteristic from the embedded plot.

Tire Fit Start the Tire Fitting Tool.

Dialog Box - F1 Help 273
Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool - Tire Fit View

For the option: Do the following:

Plot Parameters:
Basic For plotting the basic tire properties such as loaded radius, effective
rolling radius, relaxation length and contact patch length and width.
Force/Moment For plotting the steady stated force and moment response of the tire on
variations of load, slip, camber and inflation pressure.
Enveloping/Belt For plotting the force response of a tire when rolling over a cleat at fixed
axle height (PAC2002 only).
Plot Select:

 Embedded or
 Adams PPT for plotting of the tire characteristics.
Measurement Data Select:

 Yes: Use tire model input data from the measurement data files
and plot measurement data.
 No: Use tire model input data as defined in Plot Parameters.
Slip Condition Select:

 Pure: Pure slip conditions.

 Combined: Combined slip conditions.
X-axis Variable on X-axis (for example, Longitudinal Slip).
Y-axis Variable on Y-axis (for example, Fx).
Vertical Load Tire vertical load (for example, 2000, 3000, 4000).
Longitudinal Slip Tire longitudinal slip (for example, -1:0.01:1).
Lateral Slip Angle Tire lateral slip (for example, 0).
Inclination Angle Tire inclination angle (for example, 0).
Inflation Pressure Tire inflation pressure (for example, 200000,220000).
Forward Speed Forward speed of the tire (for Basic or Enveloping/Belt plot).
Cleat Geometry For defining the cleat height, length, bevel edge and orientation angle
(for Enveloping/Belt plot).

Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool - Tire Fit View

Run → Tire Fit
Learn more about the Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool (TDFT).
274 template_based_common
Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool - Convert to PAC2002 model

For the option: Do the following:

Reload Default Boundaries Reloads the default start values, boundaries and fit types from the
acar/shared_car_database.cdb/[Link]/template_tdft.ttt
Rescan Measurement Files Rescans the selected measurement data files (.tdx) to identify the suitable
fit type for the enclosed data.

Note: Double click on the file name opens the file with an ascii
editor.
Import Tire Properties Imports properties of the tire as listed in the .tdx files, when all files have
consistent information.
Dominating Parameters These are the parameters that MUST be set before starting a fit process:

FNOMIN: Nominal load of the tire

RFREE: Unloaded radius of the tire

IP_NOM: Nominal inflation pressure of the tire

WIDTH: The width of the tire

Fitting Parameters:
Characteristic Select a single tire characteristic (for example, Fx_pure) or All F&M,
All_Basic, All_E&B or CompleteSet.
Boundaries Use upper and lower boundaries from
acar/shared_car_database.cdb/[Link]/template_tdft.ttt
Start Value Use start values from
acar/shared_car_database.cdb/[Link]/template_tdft.ttt or use the current
tire parameter values as start values:

 Auto: Start values are generated based on the measurement data.

 Start Value: The value is taken from 'Start Value' column in the
'Tire Fit' view.
 Value: The current value of the tire is taken.
Tolerance MPFit optimizer tolerance.
Iterations MPFit optimizer iterations.

Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool - Convert to PAC2002

model
File → Convert to PAC2002 model

Learn more about the Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool (TDFT).
Dialog Box - F1 Help 275
Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool - Conversion Settings

For the option: Do the following:

Tire Property Select the tire property file to be converted
Nominal Load Define the nominal load of the tire, preferably close to the static load on the tire
when mounted under the vehicle.
Load Values Define the load values for which virtual tire test data should be created, covering
the tire’s working range, preferably at least 3 values
Camber Angle Define the camber values for which virtual tire test data should be created,
covering the tire’s working range, preferably at least 3 values
Slip Angle Define the slip angle values for the combined slip virtual test data covering the
tire’s working range, preferably at least 6 values
Relaxation Check this box if the original tire model is able to describe transient effect of the
tire
Enveloping Check this box if the original tire model is able to describe the non-linear
enveloping effect when rolling over short wavelength obstacles.
Belt Dynamics Check this box if the original tire model is able to describe the belt dynamics
effects.
Tire Width Define the tire width, default is read from the tire property file. Relevant when
the ‘Enveloping’ is checked.
Tire Mass Define the tire width, default is read from the tire property file. Relevant when
the ‘Belt Dynamics’ is checked

Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool - Conversion Settings

Advanced → Conversion Settings
Learn more about the Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool (TDFT).

For the option: Do the following:

Forward Velocity Defined the forward velocity for the tire testing when generating the virtual test
data.
HMax for simulations When the original tire model requires a specific HMAX value, it can be defined
here.
Total Wheel Mass The total wheel mass (tire + rim) is important for generating the Belt Dynamics
virtual test data. The default value can be adjusted here.
Include camber effect at Check this box if you want to add virtual combined slip data for all ‘Camber
combined slip Angles’ defined.
Include Fy effects on Check this box if you want to add side force effects on the tire loaded radius
loaded radius virtual test data.
276 template_based_common
Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool - Optimization Settings

For the option: Do the following:

Cleat Geometry
Height Height of the cleat to be used for the enveloping and belt dynamics virtual tests
Length Length of the cleat to be used for the enveloping and belt dynamics virtual tests
Bevel Edge Bevel Edge value of the cleat to be used for the enveloping and belt dynamics
virtual tests, see also Cleat Geometry.
Maximum number of Define the number of parallel simulation that can run for generating the virtual
parallel simulations tire test data.

Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool - Optimization Settings

Settings → Optimization Settings
Learn more about the Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool (TDFT).

For the option: Do the following:

Maximum # of Parallel Defines the number of parallel simulation that can run parallel for generating
Simulations the Advanced Transient and Cleat test data.
Check License If checked: when the number of maximum parallel simulations is larger than
Availability one, the number of available licenses will be checked when changing the
number.
Show Tire Property When clicking on the button ‘Import Tire Properties’ a log file will be shown
Import Log with details about the imported properties.
Type of Solver Defines the solver type used for the Advanced Transient and Cleat test
simulations.
List Parameters During Optimization
Basic During the ‘Basic’ optimization processes the parameters used in the
optimization will be shown in the message window when checked.
Force/Moment During the ‘Force/Moment’ optimization processes the parameters used in the
optimization will be shown in the message window when checked.
Enveloping/Belt During the ‘Enveloping/Belt’ optimization processes the parameters used in the
optimization will be shown in the message window when checked.
Basic
One Degree Slip Angle When checked, a one degree slip angle step will be used for the Advanced
Step Transient (Basic) optimization and plotting, otherwise a step from zero slip
towards the final slip value.
Enveloping
Dialog Box - F1 Help 277
Adams Tire Data and Fitting Tool - Optimization Settings

For the option: Do the following:

Number of Rotations The number of rotations the tire should travel before hitting the cleat in case of
Before Cleat plotting Enveloping results.
Number of Rotations The number of rotations the tire should travel after hitting the cleat in case of
After Cleat plotting Enveloping results.
Allow Tire Stiffness Allows to adjust the vertical tire stiffness (loaded radius parameters) during the
Correction Enveloping Enveloping optimization, for example to correct for flat and ‘drum’ road test
data.
Belt Dynamics
Number of Rotations The number of rotations the tire should travel before hitting the cleat in case of
Before Cleat plotting Enveloping results.
Number of Rotations The number of rotations the tire should travel after hitting the cleat in case of
After Cleat plotting Enveloping results.
Re-optimize Vertical When checked, the parameters for the Vertical Belt Dynamics will be taken into
Parameters During the optimization process again when fitting the Longitudinal Belt Parameters.
Longitudinal This may give a better average result.
Optimization
Weighting Factor Frequency vs. Time
Vertical 1.0 means that 100% frequency domain data of the cleat test data will be used
for the optimization, when 0.0 only time signals of the cleat tests are used, when
doing the Vertical Belt Dynamics parameter optimization. 0.5 means a 50-50%
distribution is used.
Longitudinal 1.0 means that 100% frequency domain data of the cleat test data will be used
for the optimization, when 0.0 only time signals of the cleat tests are used, when
doing the Longitudinal Belt Dynamics parameter optimization. 0.5 means a
50-50% distribution is used.
Lateral 1.0 means that 100% frequency domain data of the cleat test data will be used
for the optimization, when 0.0 only time signals of the cleat tests are used, when
doing the Lateral Belt Dynamics parameter optimization. 0.5 means a 50-50%
distribution is used.
Frequency Range
Vertical Defines the range of frequency used for the Vertical Belt Dynamics parameter
optimization and plotting.
Longitudinal Defines the range of frequency used for the Longitudinal Belt Dynamics
parameter optimization and plotting.
Lateral Defines the range of frequency used for the Lateral Belt Dynamics parameter
optimization and plotting.
278 template_based_common
Parallel To Axis

For the option: Do the following:

Reset Resets all values in this dialog to the default values
Ok Will store all current defined values
Cancel Will cancel all changes and close the dialog box

Parallel To Axis
Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Orients an entity parallel to a chosen axis on a construction frame by making an axis on the chosen entity
dependent on an axis on the construction frame. Learn about Construction Frames.

Note: Because hardpoints have no orientation, you cannot use them to define this type of orientation
dependency. Learn about Hardpoints.

To determine the orientation of the other two entity axes, you use the two remaining construction frame axes.
Therefore, if you specify the entity's x-axis as parallel to the construction frame's - z-axis, the entity's y- and
z-axes would be oriented according to the right-hand-rule along the construction frame's x- or y-axes (in this
case, the entity's y-axis would be parallel to the construction frame's y-axis, and the entity's z-axis would be
parallel to the construction frame's x-axis).

For the option: Do the following:

Construction Frame Enter the name of the construction frame needed to create the parallel orientation
dependency.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Axis on Entity Specify either the z- or x-axis as the entity axis that will be directly dependent on the
construction frame orientation.
Axis on Frame Specify the construction frame's axis that is the basis for the entity's dependent
orientation.

Parameter Variable Modification Table

(Standard jInterface) Adjust → Parameter Variable → Table Shared Dialog Box
Lets you view and modify parameter variables using a spreadsheet table editor.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 279
Parameter Variable Modification Table

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Select an assembly whose parameter variables you want to modify. The
menu lists all open assemblies.
Subsystem Select the subsystem whose parameter variables you want to modify. The
menu lists all open subsystems.
List of parameter variables Lists rows of parameter variables and their associated values. You can use the
option, Display: Single and, to display different types of parameter variables.
real_value Display and allow editing the numeric or string data values for the listed
integer_value parameter variables.
string_value
datas
remarks Displays and allows editing of the parameter variable comments in the
Standard User Interface Subsystem context.
Sort By Select which column is used for sorting the table objects
Display: Single and Select to display some or all the parameter variables that exist in the current
model. Your template-based product always displays the single parameter
variables. In addition, you can select to display left or right parameter
variables, or both.

Note: Regardless of which parameter variables are displayed, changing

one of the parameter variables in a symmetric pair automatically
changes the corresponding parameter variable. Therefore, your
template-based product always maintains symmetry when you
perform modifications using the Parameter Variable Modification
Table.
Value Type Select the type of parameter variables to load in the Parameter Variable
Modification Table: real, integer, string or all data types.
Name Filter Define a filter to limit the number of entries in the table.

Parameter Variable Modification Table

(Template Builder) Build → Parameter Variable → Table Shared Dialog Box
Lets you view and modify parameter variables using a spreadsheet table editor. The parameter variables shown
in the table are those which belong to the template currently open and displayed in your session.
To apply the changes you make in the table, you must select Apply or OK.
To modify one parameter variable at a time, select Build → Parameter Variable → Modify.
280 template_based_common
Property File Editor (bumpstop/reboundstop)

For the option: Do the following:

List of parameter variables Lists rows of parameter variables and their associated values. You can use the
option, Display: Single and, to display different types of parameter variables.
real_value Display and allow editing the numeric or string data values for the listed
integer_value parameter variables.
string_value
datas
remarks Displays and allows editing of the parameter variable comments in the
Template Builder context.
Sort By Select which column is used for sorting the table objects
Display Select to display some or all the parameter variables that exist in the current
model. Your template-based product always displays the single parameter
variables. In addition, you can select to display left or right parameter
variables, or both.

Note: Regardless of which parameter variables are displayed, changing

Property File Editor (bumpstop/reboundstop)

Right-click component (or Create/Modify dialog boxes) → load .xml property file → select

Defines and modifies curves and other parameters for .xml bumpstop/reboundstop property files.

For the option: Do the following:

Property File Specify an .xml bumpstop/reboundstop property file.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Select to display the file browser and choose a property file.

Properties tab
Dialog Box - F1 Help 281
Property File Editor (bumpstop/reboundstop)

For the option: Do the following:

Method Select one of the following:

 Polynomial
 Nonlinear
• Learn about the bumpstop force formulation.
• Learn about the reboundstop force formulation.
If you select Polynomial, your Adams product enables the following options:
Bumper Height Enter the bumper height.
Diameter Enter the bumper diameter.
Linear Rate Enter the bumper linear rate.
Quad Rate Enter the bumper quad rate.
Cubic Rate Enter the bumper cubic rate.
If you select Nonlinear, your Adams product enables the following options:
Bumper Height Same as above.
Diameter Same as above.
Damping Rate Enter the damping rate to calculate damping (viscous) forces.
Scale Factor Enter a scale factor.
Spline Data Select Plot/Edit Data to see the spline data.
Damping Method Select one of the following:

 Linear
 Nonlinear
 Learn about the bumpstop force formulation.
 Learn about the reboundstop force formulation.
If you select Linear, your Adams product enables the following option:
Damping Rate Enter the damping rate
If you select Nonlinear, your Adams product enables the following option:
Damping Data Select Plot/Edit Data to see the damping data.
Header tab
File Version Displays the file version.
Date Displays the date when the file was created.
Product Name Displays the name of the product.
Revision Comment Enter comments.
282 template_based_common
Property File Editor (bushing)

For the option: Do the following:

Units Displays the units used for length, force, angle, mass, and time. These units are only
for the property file: they are not model units. You cannot change the units.
Current Field Unit Displays the units for the selected text box or cell.
Current Active File Displays the active file from where the data came.

Property File Editor (bushing)

Right-click component (or Create/Modify dialog boxes) → load .xml property file → select

Defines and modifies curves and other parameters for .xml bushing property files.

For the option: Do the following:

Property File Specify an .xml bushing property file.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Select to see the file browser to select a bushing property file.

Shape tab
Shape Select one of the following:

 Square - No interaxial coupling in force/torque calculations.

 Cylindrical - Forces/torques in x and y directions are coupled. Force/torque in
z direction is independent.
 Spherical - Forces/torques in and about all three directions are coupled.
X/Y/Z/RX/RY/RZ tabs - Stiffness/Damping parameters
Linear Select to use the linear stiffness/damping formulation. Learn more about stiffness
and damping forces computations.
If you select Linear, your Adams product enables the following option:
Rate Enter the rate. Learn more about stiffness and damping forces computations.
If you select Spline, your Adams product enables the following options:
Name Displays the name of the spline data.
X Label/Y Label Enter names for the X and Y directions.
Plot/Edit Data Select to see the spline data in the Curve Editor.
If you select Piecewise, your Adams product enables the following options:
Name Displays the name of the piecewise data.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 283
Property File Editor (damper)

For the option: Do the following:

X Label/Y Label Enter names for the X and Y directions.
Plot/Edit Data Select to see the piecewise data in the Curve Editor.
Smoothing Select to enter a value for the smoothing interval.
If you select Hysteresis, your Adams product enables the following options:
Name Displays the name of the hysteresis data.
X Label/Y Label/Z Enter names for the X, Y, and Z directions
Label
Plot/Edit Data Select to see the hysteresis data in the Curve Editor
Velocity Threshold Enter a value for the velocity threshold.
If you select K Fraction, your Adams product enables the following options:
Fraction The stiffness fraction damping method simply ensures that the damping coefficient
increases in proportion to the local stiffness of the bushing at the current operating
point. Learn more.
Graphics tab
Radius Enter the radius.
Height Enter the height.
Header tab
File Version Displays the file version.
Date Displays the date when the file was created.
Product Name Displays the name of the product.
Revision Comment Enter comments.
Units Displays the units used for length, force, angle, mass, and time. These units are
only for the property file: they are not model units. You cannot change the units.
Current Field Unit Displays the units for the selected text box or cell.
Current Active File Displays the active file from where the data came.

Property File Editor (damper)

Right-click component (or Create/Modify dialog boxes) → load .xml property file → select

Defines and modifies curves and other parameters for .xml damper property files.
284 template_based_common
Property File Editor (spring)

For the option: Do the following:

Property File Specify an .xml damper property file.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Select to display the file browser and choose a property file.

Properties tab
Damping Method Select one of the following:

 Linear - Learn about the linear force formulation.

 Nonlinear - Learn about the nonlinear force formulation.
If you select Linear, your Adams product enables the following option:
Linear Rate Select to see the damper data in the Curve Editor.
If you select Nonlinear, your Adams product enables the following options:
Plot/Edit Data Select to see the damper data in the Curve Editor.
Header tab
File Version Displays the file version.
Date Displays the date when the file was created.
Product Name Displays the name of the product.
Revision Comment Enter comments.
Units Displays the units used for length, force, angle, mass, and time. These units are
only for the property file: they are not model units. You cannot change the units.
Current Field Unit Displays the units for the selected text box or cell.
Current Active File Displays the active file from where the data came.

Property File Editor (spring)

Right-click component (or Create/Modify dialog boxes) → load .xml property file → select

Defines and modifies curves and other parameters for .xml spring property files.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 285
Property File Editor (spring)

For the option: Do the following:

Property File Specify an .xml spring property file.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Select to display the file browser and choose a property file.

Properties tab
Method Select one of the following:

 Linear - Learn about the linear force formulation.

 Nonlinear - Learn about the nonlinear force formulation.
If you select Linear, your Adams product enables the following options:
Number of Coils Enter the number of coils for the spring graphic.

Note: Since the spring is not a part itself, and solely defines the force-
displacement relationship between two parts, changing the spring graphic
diameter does not translate into different spring properties.
Free Length Enter the free length of the spring.
Linear Rate Enter the linear rate of the spring.
If you select Nonlinear, your Adams product enables the following options:
Number of Coils Enter the number of coils for the spring graphic.

Note: Since the spring is not a part itself, and solely defines the force-
displacement relationship between two parts, changing the spring graphic
diameter does not translate into different spring properties.
Plot/Edit Data Select to see the spring data in the Curve Editor.
Length Select to use a force versus length table. The force is calculated as follows:

Spring Force = AKISPL(OffsetCalc + DM(I, J), 0, Spline)

286 template_based_common
Publish an Open Assembly

For the option: Do the following:

Deflection Select to use a force versus deflection table. The force is calculated as follows:

Spring Force = AKISPL(OffsetCalc - DM(I, J), 0, Spline)

Header tab
File Version Displays the file version.
Date Displays the date when the file was created.
Product Name Displays the name of the product.
Revision Comment Enter comments.
Units Displays the units used for length, force, angle, mass, and time. These units are only
for the property file: they are not model units. You cannot change the units.
Current Field Unit Displays the units for the selected text box or cell.
Current Active File Displays the active file from where the data came.

Publish an Open Assembly

(Standard Interface) Tools → Database Management → Publish Assembly Shared Dialog Box
Publishes an assembly to a Target Database. Publishing an assembly entails copying the assembly file, subsystem
files, and all associated property files to the target database. You can overwrite files or create backups of
existing files in the target database.
Your template-builder product always copies the assembly file (assembly_name.asy), subsystem files
pertaining to the assembly, and corresponding property files to the new database; if you want, your template-
based product can also copy the template files pertaining to each of the individual subsystems.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Select the name of an assembly. The menu lists all open assemblies.
Retain variants Select this option to publish all assembly variants to the new assembly.
Selected variant Select this option to publish the selected variant of the chosen assembly as the
new default variant.
Delete asy variants Select this option to publish the current state of the chosen assembly as the
new default variant.
Delete all variants Select this option to publish the current state of the chosen assembly as the
new default variant. All subsystem variants will also be deleted.
Publish To Select one of the following:

 Database - Publishes the assembly to a Car database.

Dialog Box - F1 Help 287
Publish an Open Subsystem

For the option: Do the following:

Write Mode Select one of the following:

Please note that those templates are simply copied from the source database,
not exported from the session data. As such, path data in the templates is not
updated even if the "Update Session Data …" toggle is active.
Update Session Data with Changes database references in the open assembly to match the target
'Target Database' alias database.
Create Database Opens the Create New Database dialog box.
Database Info Select to display a list of the search directories, including their search level,
database name, and database path.

Publish an Open Subsystem

(Standard Interface) Tools → Database Management → Publish Subsystem Shared Dialog Box
Publishes a subsystem to a Target Database. Publishing a subsystem entails copying the subsystem file and all
associated property files to the target database. You can overwrite files or create backups of files in the target
database.
Your template-builder product always copies the subsystem file (subsystem_name.sub) and corresponding
property files to the new database; if you want, your template-based product can also copy the template files
pertaining to the subsystem.
288 template_based_common
Read Analysis Files

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Name Enter the name of an open subsystem. The menu lists all open subsystems.
Retain variants Select this option to publish all subsystem variants to the new subsystem.
Selected variant Select this option to publish only one subsystem variant to the new
subsystem.
Delete all variants Select this option to publish the current state of the chosen subsystem as the
new default variant.
Publish To Select one of the following:

 Database - Publishes the subsystem to a Car database.

Write Mode Select one of the following:

 overwrite - Overwrites any files in the target database with the same
file names.
 backup - Causes the file in the target database to be renamed before
the new file is copied into the database. When you back up a file like
this, the name of the new file will vary according to the operating
system you are using.
Target Database Select a writable database to which the subsystem files will be published. To
access a writable database not on the pull-down menu, add the database to the
database list using the Add Database to Search dialog box.
Include Template Files Select it if you want to also copy the subsystem's template file to the target
database. Otherwise, your template-based product only copies the subsystem
file (subsystem_name.sub) and property files copied to the target database.
Please note that those templates are simply copied from the source database,
not exported from the session data. As such, path data in the templates is not
updated even if the "Update Session Data …" toggle is active.
Update Session Data with Changes database references in the open subsystem to match the target
'Target Database' alias database.
Create Database Opens the Create New Database dialog box.
Database Info Select to display a list of the search directories, including their search level,
database name, and database path.

Read Analysis Files

(Standard Interface) Review → Analysis Management → Read Shared Dialog Box
Loads a set of output files generated during an Adams Solver Analysis. The files include: graphic, request, and
results.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 289
Real Time Animation Settings

For the option: Do the following:

Analysis Name Select the name of the analysis you want to load.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Requests file Select if you want to read the request file.
Results file Select if you want to read the result file.
Graphics file Select if you want to read a graphic file.
Keep Results Data Select if you want to avoid reading the entire contents of the graphics, request, or
On Disk results data (XML only) into the database. Your template-based product references
the data only when needed for animations or xy plotting. Storing the data on disk
reduces the memory footprint and improves performance for very large simulations,
for example, those containing durability results. Learn more about storing results
files in XML format with Results (.res) Options dialog box help.
If you select Results file or Graphics file, your template-based product enables the following option:
Assembly Select the model under which you want to store the analysis.

Real Time Animation Settings

The Real Time Animation Settings contains the following settings:

Parameter Type Function

Real Time Animation On/Off When setting this to 'On', you can change the settings
for the following parameters that will be used in the
animation process.
Sample Time Real value Determines the interface step time, each step the
animation frame will be updated. In general, the
default value will be adequate.
Startup Time Real value The time that the simulation is waiting for the
animation component to start. May need to be
increased for slow systems.
Road Grid Size Real value Defines the size of the grid of the flat road.
290 template_based_common
Reboundstop

Parameter Type Function

Road Grid Spacing Real value Defines the spacing in between the lines of the grid of
the flat road.
Hostname string Is the hostname of the machine on which the
animation should be shown. When set to 'localhost'
the animation will be started at the same machine as
the simulation.
Material File Name string Wavefront material definition file for defining colors
and structures of the materials.

Reboundstop
Tools → Curve Manager
Generates a reboundstop property file. Learn about Working with Reboundstops.
You can create a linear reboundstop by entering a slope (stiffness), or define a force-deflection characteristic
using a mathematical relation. You can also enter data in a spreadsheet and view and edit the corresponding
curve in the plotting window by dragging Hotpoints. Learn Modifying Curves.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

Slope Enter the slope of the curve that defines the displacement-force relation.
Limits Enter the upper and lower x values for the curve.
Points-Segs Specify the number of points or segments for the curve. You can:

 Enter the number of points or segments.

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

Remove Interface Parts

Tools → Model Reduction → Remove Interface Parts Shared Dialog Box
Removes all the interface parts within a subsystem, assembly, template, or attached to a particular flexible
body. This process is irreversible. The benefit of removing the interface parts is faster run times, as well as
Dialog Box - F1 Help 291
Remove Subsystem

potential gains in Adams Solver robustness, which can reduce Simulation times substantially for assemblies that
contain many interface parts. When you remove interface parts, any joints and forces attached to the interface
part are moved to the appropriate flexible body. Those joint or force markers on the flexible body will
automatically be associated to the closest node.
Learn about Interface Parts.

For the option: Do the following:

Model Shows the list of valid subsystems, assemblies, and templates that are currently in the
database. Select the one for which you want to remove interface parts.
Flex Body Select the flexible body for which you wish to remove interface parts.

Remove Subsystem
(Standard Interface) File → Manage Assemblies → Remove Subsystem Shared Dialog Box
Removes a subsystem from the assembly to which it belongs. Learn more.

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Name Select the subsystem you want to remove from an assembly. The menu lists all open
subsystems in an assembly.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Remove Testrig
(Standard Interface) File → Manage Assemblies → Remove Testrig Shared Dialog Box
Removes a testrig from the assembly to which it belongs. Learn more.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Select the assembly from which you want to remove the test rig. The menu lists all
assemblies open in the session.
Assign Select this option if you want to re-assemble and re-assign communicators after
Communicators removing the test rig.
Silent Select this option if you want to suppress the messages during the communicator
assignment process.
292 template_based_common
Rename File

Rename File
Tools → File Management → Rename Shared Dialog Box
Renames files either into the local directory where the session is running or into a file system location you
specify.
When specifying the file names, you can take advantage of the database alias naming conventions. Therefore,
if the <private> database is located at /usr/people/gabriel/[Link], then either of the following file name
specifications will work:
/usr/people/gabriel/[Link]/[Link]/[Link]
or
<private>/[Link]/[Link]

For the option: Do the following:

Filename Enter the name of the file you want to rename.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

New Filename Enter the destination file name.

Example input:

Filename: /usr/people/gabriel/[Link]/[Link]/[Link]
New Filename: prototype_2000.tpl
If renaming to the old file's directory, the resultant file is
/usr/people/gabriel/[Link]/[Link]/prototype_2000.tpl

Notes:  The renamed file name will always have the same extension as the old file name. If you
input a different extension for the new file name, your template-based product will always
modify it to correspond to the extension of the old file name.
 The renaming process automatically overwrites any existing file at the new file name
location.

Rename Object
(Template Builder) Right-click component → Rename Shared Dialog Box
Renames an object.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 293
Reorder Custom Menus

For the option: Do the following:

Old Name Enter the name of the object you want to rename.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

New Name Enter a new name for the object.

Note: The name you enter corresponds to the name you would enter if creating a
new object, not the name the template-based product would generate. In
most cases, your template-based product will add a prefix to the name you
entered, to identify the entity type and symmetry characteristics.
For example, in Adams Car, a new single hardpoint you created with a name of
sub_frame will be stored internally with the name hps_sub_frame. (Learn about
Hardpoints). Therefore, if you want to rename the hardpoint from sub_frame to
subframe, you enter subframe in the New Name text box, not hps_subframe. Adams Car
ensures that the correct prefix continues to be used with the new name.

Reorder Custom Menus

(Template Builder) Build → Custom Gui → Menu → Reorder Shared Dialog Box
Reorders the custom menu entities. Learn about Customizing Your Product.

For the option: Do the following:

Menu Entry Select the entity you want to reorder.
Level Specify the new level the entity will occupy in the menu hierarchy.
Template Name Select the template whose custom entities you want to reorder.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Rebuild custom menus Select if you want to update the toolbar to include the newly created menu(s).
Menu Info Select if you want information about custom entities already defined in the
current template.

Replace Instance Definition

(Standard Interface) Right-click component → <Component name> → Replace Shared Dialog Box
Replaces a component with a similar component. Learn about Replacing Instance Definitions.
294 template_based_common
Replace Subsystem

For the option: Do the following:

Instance Displays the name of the component from which you launched the dialog box. You can,
however, select another component.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Definition Select the type of component with which you want to replace the current component.
For example, you could select a damper and replace it with a linear damper.
Replace Select one of the following:

 Only the specified instance - Replace just the component you chose.
 All instances of same name - Replace all instances with the same name (will
typically convert both the left and right symmetrical pair).
 All instances of same type - Replace all instance within the model. For example, if
you want to convert every nonlinear spring in your model to be linear, you would
select this option.

Replace Subsystem
(Standard Interface) File → Manage Assemblies → Replace Subsystem Shared Dialog Box
Replaces a subsystem in an assembly with a new subsystem. Learn more.

For the option: Do the following:

Old Subsystem Select the subsystem you want to replace. The menu lists all open subsystems in the
assemblies.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Subsystem Select subsystems:

 To search/browse for a subsystem, right-click the text box next to .

 To select a subsystem that is open in the current session, select . The icon

changes to and the text box is replaced by a pull-down menu from which
you can select a subsystem.

Replace Testrig
(Standard Interface) File → Manage Assemblies → Replace Testrig Shared Dialog Box
Replaces a testrig in the selected assembly. Learn more.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 295
Reposition Assembly

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Select the assembly in which you want to replace the test rig. The menu lists all
assemblies open in the session.
Testrig Select the test rig you wish to add to the assembly.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Silent Select this option if you want to suppress the messages during the communicator
assignment process.

Reposition Assembly
Tools → Model Reduction → Assembly Repositioning Shared Dialog Box
Move and/or rotate an entire assembly. If you are setting up your assembly for real time analysis and your road
file origin doesn't match your vehicle origin, you may wish to reposition the assembly instead of specifying a
road offset. The use of a road offset requires additional computation at each time step in order to calculate
the location of each tire with respect to the road surface. Repositioning the assembly to match the road origin
eliminates the need for these additional computations, resulting in faster run times. This process is generally
irreversible, so it should be performed immediately before submitting an analysis.

Note: Saving the repositioned assembly in ASCII or XML formats will not store the
location/orientation changes. If you wish to save the repositioned assembly in its new position,
save as binary format.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Shows the list of assemblies that are currently in the database. Select the one
you want to reposition.
Translation Delta Enter the translation you wish to apply to the assembly, in the global
coordinate system and current modeling units.
Orientation Delta Enter the rotation you wish to apply to the assembly, in the global coordinate
system and current modeling units.
Retain Parameterization Select this toggle if you wish to attempt to keep all location/orientation
parameterizations. Success depends on how your templates are designed. The
more foolproof, but irreversible option, is to uncheck this toggle so that all
location/orientations will be lost.
296 template_based_common
Request Map Activity

Request Map Activity

(Standard Interface) Tools → Requests → Request Map Activity Shared Dialog Box

(Template Builder) Build → Requests → Request Map Activity

For the option: Do the following:

Template/Assembly Select a model
RPC Request Map Displays all existing request maps in the selected model.
RPC Filename Displays the RPC filename where the results will be written.
Active Displays the activity status.
Activate Selection/De- Allows activating and de-activating individual or multiple maps by selecting
activate Selection the corresponding row(s) and hitting the appropriate button.

Use the <Ctrl> button to select multiple rows.

Delete Selection Delete individual or multiple maps by selecting the corresponding row(s) and
hitting Delete Selection.

Use the <Ctrl> button to select multiple rows.

Request Map Editor

(Standard Interface) Tools → Requests → Request Map Editor

(Template Builder) Build → Requests → Request Map Editor

Any requests defined in a Request Map will be written to RPCIII format after simulation. The request map
editor allows the user to:
 Create and edit request maps that are defined in the database.
 Import a request map file and edit the requests defined therein.
 Save a set of requests to a request map file.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly (or Template) Select a model.
Request Map Select an existing request map from the selected model.
All Populates the table with all requests found in the selected model.
Browse Appends requests to the table as selected in the database navigator.
Import Populates the table with requests imported from the specified request map file
(but does not apply it to the model).
Clear Table Clears the contents of the table.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 297
Review: Real Time Animation

For the option: Do the following:

Sort by The table list can be sorted by the following attributes to make it easier to lo-
cate and edit the desired request(s):

 request name
 components
 major role
 minor role
The sort can be done in ascending or descending order.
Edit Mode Select to switch the table list from read-only to edit mode (and vice versa).

In edit mode, you can add or remove request definitions from the table and
modify Components, Major and Minor Role attributes.
Filter by The table list can filtered by Major Role or Minor Role to reduce the number
of requests displayed.
New request map name Enter the name of the request map to be created in the selected model (if Apply
to Model is selected), or the name of the file to be exported (if Save to Request
Map File is selected).
Target Select Database or Directory, then select your desired location to write the file.
Info Display information on currently registered and active databases.
Apply to Model Applies the contents of the table to the selected model.
Save to Request Map File Saves a Request Map File to the selected database or directory containing the
request map definition as defined in the table. This operation will not change
the current model settings.

Review: Real Time Animation

Allows to start the Real Time Animation component if the simulation is performed at a different platform.
It requires to select the FMU File Name that is also used for the Real Time Simulation.

RPC3 File Info

The channel name available in the specified RPC file are displayed. This dialog box is available from few of
the analysis dialog boxes such as Dynamic Suspension Analysis and Dynamic Full Vehicle Analyses.
298 template_based_common
Run Adams Command Files

Run Adams Command Files

(Standard Interface) Review → Analysis Management → Run (acf) Shared Dialog Box
Runs one or multiple sets of solver input files submitting an Adams Solver Analysis in the background.
The dialog is populated with all acf files found in the current working directory.

For the option: Do the following:

File Name List the acf file candidates to be submitted to the external solver.
By default, the list includes all acf files in the current working directory, and
can be edited by the buttons to the right of the file table (see below).
Time Stamp (.acf ) Shows the date and time stamp of the Adams (Solver) Command File.
.res? Indicates if a results file (extension “.res”) with the same file prefix exists.
.req? Indicates if a request file (extension “.req”) with the same file prefix exists
.gra? Indicates if a graphics file (extension “.gra”) with the same file prefix exists
Time Stamp (.msg) Indicates if a message file (extension “.msg”) with the same file prefix exists,
and shows its date and time stamp.
Assembly Select the model under which you want to store the analysis.
Opens the file browser prompting to selecting an acf file.
This acf file will be added to the table.

Opens the file browser prompting to selecting a directory.

All acf files in that directory will be added to the table.

Empties the table (single-click) or reverts its contents to the default state upon
dialog display (that is, populated with the acf files in the current working
directory – via double-click)
Sorts the table in ascending (single-click) or descending (double-click) order
by the selected column.
If no or multiple rows are selected, no sorting will be performed.
Refreshes the content of the data table by updating columns 2-5 from the file
system and maximizes the width of the first column.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 299
Run Adams Command Files

For the option: Do the following:

Delete after Run Select the output file extension(s) of the files you want to delete after each
solver run.
Run Runs the acf files in the selected rows sequentially in an external solver
background process (the interface will remain functional).
A command shell will pop up and show the progress of the solver execution.
Load Opens the Analysis Read dialog to allow importing the analysis files of the
selected row. If no or multiple rows are selected, the dialog will not be shown.
300 template_based_common
Runtime Clearance Table

Runtime Clearance Table

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Runtime Clearance Shared Dialog Box
Sets the activity of a runtime clearance definition, and displays information such as the Matching Name,
Object Type and so on. Select a row, then select either Activate Selection or De-activate Selection.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Select an assembly.
Sort by The table list can be sorted by the following attributes to make it easier to locate and
edit the desired contact(s):

Save Assembly
(Standard Interface) File → Save As → Assembly Shared Dialog Box
Saves an assembly, and optionally renames it, to the selected database or directory. Use this dialog box to create
new assembly variants or update an existing variant's definition.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 301
Save Assembly

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Select the assembly you want to save and, optionally, rename. The menu lists all
open assemblies.
New Assembly Name Enter a new name for the assembly.
(optional)
Select one of the following options: Existing variant, New variant, Delete asy variants, Delete all variants
Existing variant Select the existing variant you wish to update.
New variant Enter a name to create a new subsystem variant.
Delete asy variants Select this option to remove all assembly variant definitions from the assembly
file. The current state will be the new "default".
Delete all variants Select this option to remove all assembly and subsystem variant definitions. The
current state will be the new "default".
Assembly class Select the assembly class (suspension, full_vehicle and so on) of the selected
variant.
File Format For Adams Car, select the file format Adams Car should use when saving the new
file to the target database:

 ASCII - Saves the file in the traditionally used format. See TeimOrbit File
Format.
 Binary - Saves the file in binary format. Adams Car reads binary assembly
files much faster than ASCII assembly files. Learn about binary assemblies.
Learn about binary assemblies.
 XML - Saves the file in an industry-standard data format. See XML File
Format.
Target Select either Database or Directory.

 Database - The target database for the assembly. The menu lists all writable
databases.
 Directory - Select a directory in which to write the assembly file.
Close assembly after Select if you want to close the assembly after saving it.
save
Include Parameter & By default, ASCII assembly files will include parameter variable and hardpoint
Hardpoint comments tables with comment lines. If you wish to turn off these comment lines, deselect
this toggle.
If you selected ASCII File Format, the following option is displayed:
302 template_based_common
Save File

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly objects Select any assembly-level objects you wish to save to the assembly file, such as a
Vibration Analysis. This option is only for use with ASCII format assembly files,
as binary assembly files already contain all assembly objects.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product
displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for
which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Database Info Select to display the Information window, which lists currently available
databases. Learn about Working with the Information Window.

Save File
Tools → Curve Manager → File → Save Shared Dialog Box
Saves a property file in the Curve Manager to the Default Writable Database.

For the option: Do the following:

File Specify a name for the property file.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Target Select either Database or Directory.

 Database - The target database for the assembly. The menu lists all writable
databases.
 Directory - Select a directory in which to write the assembly file.

Notes: By default, File → Save will write the file to the default writable database.

If you already saved the property file, this dialog box will not appear, because there is no need
to specify the file name again. If you want to save the property file with a new name or in a
different database, use the Save File As option.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 303
Save File As

Save File As
Tools → Curve Manager → File → Save As Shared Dialog Box
Saves the current property file in the Curve Manager with a new file name.

For the option: Do the following:

Old File Displays the property file that is currently loaded in the Curve Manager.
New File Specify a new name for the property file.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Target Select either Database or Directory.

 Database - The target database for the assembly. The menu lists all writable
databases.
 Directory - Select a directory in which to write the assembly file.

Save Plot Configuration File

(Adams PostProcessor) File → Export → Plot Configuration File Shared Dialog Box
Lets you save a template of your plot pages. It does not save the curve data itself. It is intended to let users
who run an Analysis more than once to quickly prepare a new set of standard plots. Adams PostProcessor writes
the file to the default database. You can reuse the file by using File → Import → Plot Config File.

For the option: Do the following:

Configuration File Name Enter a name for the configuration file. Adams PostProcessor adds the suffix
.plt to the file name and then writes the file to the target database/directory.
Target Select Database or Directory, then select your desired location to write the file.
All Pages Select if you want to save all the pages in the current session.
If you clear the selection of All Pages, Adams PostProcessor enables the following option:
304 template_based_common
Save Plot Configuration File

For the option: Do the following:

Collapse Multi-Run Plots If selected, then anytime a plot contains multiple curves representing the exact
same quantity and using the exact same expression then, for those curves, only
one curve is saved to the .plt file, and the order in which curve attributes are
applied to curves is stored per plot. This is to facilitate a multiple-run scenario
where one wants to, first, interactively plot a single quantity across multiple
analyses and define the curve styles, then secondly, wants to re-use this curve
style specification for future multiple-run scenarios.

If this checkbox is unselected, all curves on any plot get written to the .plt file.
Thus, when importing that .plt file against multiple analyses each curve will
get re-generated for each analysis.

For example: a plot has three curves, the same quantity plotted three times
once per three different analyses. If "Collapse Multi-Run Plots" is selected,
then when the .plt file is imported to another session against three analyses
three curves will be generated. If "Collapse Multi-Run Plots" is not selected,
then when the .plt file is imported to another session against three analyses nine
curves will be generated.
Page Names Enter a list of pages you want to save.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Plots Enter the plot commands*. You can use plot commands to customize or
modify plots automatically. Your template-based product writes the
commands to the plot configuration file and executes them when you create a
series of plots or import a plot configuration file.
Curves Enter the curve commands*. You can use curve commands to customize or
modify plots automatically. Your template-based product writes the
commands to the plot configuration file and executes them when you create a
series of plots or import a plot configuration file.

Note: *To use plot or curve commands, you must create a macro that modifies your plots or curves
according to your needs.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 305
Save Subsystem

Save Subsystem
(Standard Interface) File → Save As → Subsystem Shared Dialog Box
Saves a subsystem, and optionally renames it, to the selected database or directory. Use this dialog box to create
new subsystem variants or update an existing variant's definition.

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Name Select the subsystem you want to save and, optionally, rename. The menu
lists all open subsystems.
New Subsystem Name Enter a new name for the subsystem.
(optional)
Select one of the following options: Existing Variant, New Variant, Delete all Variants
Existing Variant Select the existing variant you wish to update.
New Variant Enter a name to create a new subsystem variant.
Delete all Variants Select this option to remove all variant definitions from the subsystem file.
The current state will be the new "default".
Minor Role Select a minor role to identify how your template-based product should use
the subsystem when creating an assembly of subsystems for Analysis. Your
template-based product displays different pull-down menus to set the
minor role depending on the major role of the template:

For Adams Car and Adams Driveline:

 any
 front
 rear
 trailer
File Format Select the file format to use when saving the new file to the target database:

 TeimOrbit - Saves the file in the traditionally used format. See TeimOrbit
File Format.
 XML - Saves the file in an industry-standard data format. See XML File
Format.
Target Select either Database or Directory.

 Database - The target database for the subsystem. The menu lists all
writable databases.
 Directory - Select a directory in which to write the subsystem file.
306 template_based_common
Save Subsystem

For the option: Do the following:

Close subsystem after save Select if you want to close the subsystem after saving it.
Include Parameter & By default, TeimOrbit subsystem files will include parameter variable and
Hardpoint comments hardpoint tables with comment lines. If you wish to turn off these
comment lines, deselect this toggle.
If the File Format is TeimOrbit, the following option is displayed:
Include new objects Select any objects created at the subsystem-level, such as requests,
measures, or design objectives that you wish to save to the subsystem file.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to
any entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based
product displays different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity
type for which you want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface,

your template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Database Info Select to display the Information window, which lists currently available
databases. Learn about Working with the Information Window.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 307
Save Template

Save Template
(Template Builder) File → Save As Shared Dialog Box
Renames the template and then saves it to the Default Writable Database. Alternatively, you can keep the same
template name but change the major role or file format.
When saving a template that includes a flexible part, your template-based product saves the part as rigid.

For the option: Do the following:

Template Name Select the template you want to save and, optionally, rename. The menu lists all
open templates.
New Template Name Enter a new name for the template.
(optional)
If you specify a new name, your template-based product renames and saves the
currently selected template to the default writable database with the chosen major
role and file format.

If you do not specify a new name, your template-based product saves the
currently selected template with the same name, but with the major role and file
format selected.
Major Role Select a major role for the template.
308 template_based_common
Save Template

For the option: Do the following:

File Format For Adams Car, select the file format Adams Car should use when saving the new
file to the target database:

 ASCII - Saves the file in human-readable character format.

 Binary - Saves the file in binary format. Adams Car reads binary format files
much faster than ASCII format files. Therefore, opening assemblies in binary
format is much faster. Learn about binary assemblies.
 EDS - Saves the file in the Enhanced Data Set format. Like the ASCII option,
the EDS format is a human readable, platform-independent ASCII format.
The EDS format was developed to better handle complex UDE’s.
Note: One can interrogate objects’ EDS formatting by selecting
“Information” mode in the Database Navigator.
For Adams Driveline, select the file format your template-based product should
use when saving the new file to the default writable database:

 EDS: Saves the file in a platform-independent format (ASCII). Your

template-based product can read EDS-format template files when running on
any platform. EDS is the non-binary format suitable for the Adams Driveline
standard UDE’s.
 Binary - Saves the file in binary format. Your template-based product reads
binary format files much faster than ASCII format files. Therefore, opening
assemblies in binary format is much faster.
Target Database Select the target database where you want to save the subsystem. The menu lists
all writable databases.
Close Template Select if you want to close the template, that is, remove it from the session
memory, after saving it to the database.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 309
Save Template

For the option: Do the following:

Zero Adams Ids We recommend that you zero the Adams IDs. When Adams View generates the
Adams dataset, it will automatically assign unique IDs to every entity that it
writes out to the dataset.

In some assemblies, you could use the same template twice (such as a suspension
template in Adams Car). In that case, if you assign a particular ID to the left lower
control in the suspension template, you end up with two parts (front-left-lower-
control-arm and rear-left-lower-control-arm) with the same Adams ID. To avoid
this problem, we provide the option to set the Adams IDs to zero.
Select to display a dialog box where you can add multi-line comments to any
entity, to describe its purpose and function. Your template-based product displays
different comments dialog boxes, depending on the entity type for which you
want to record comments:

 If recording comments for modeling entities in Standard Interface, your

template-based product displays the Entity Comments dialog box.
 If recording comments for any other entity type, your template-based
product displays the Modify Comment dialog box.
Learn about Recording Comments.
Database Info Select to display the Information window, which lists currently available
databases. Learn about Working with the Information Window.
310 template_based_common
Scaled Off Link

Scaled Off Link

(Template Builder) Build → Geometry → Ellipsoid → New/Modify → Method: scaled off link Shared Dialog Box

For the option: Do the following:

Link Enter the name of the link to be used as the basis for the ellipsoid geometry creation.
The link serves as the basis for the x, y, and z scaling. Additionally, the part to which
the link belongs will also own the ellipsoid geometry.
X/Y/Z Scale Enter the scaling factors in the x, y, and z directions based on the specified link's
diameter. The resultant ellipsoid scaling factor is calculated according to the equation:

(ellipsoid scaling factor) = (link radius) * 2 * (x/y/z scale)

Therefore, if a link has a radius of 5, and the scaling factors are x=1, y=3, z=20, the
resultant ellipsoid scaling factors will be:

ellipsoid x scaling factor = 5 * 2 * 1 = 10

ellipsoid y scaling factor = 5 * 2 * 3 = 30
ellipsoid z scaling factor = 5 * 2 * 20 = 200
Dialog Box - F1 Help 311
Select Course

Select Course

For the option: Do the following:

Course Select one of the following:

 ISO Test
 Moose Test
 VDA Test
 User Defined

Initial Dist Longitudinal Distance in which vehicle run in straight line

1st Long Dist Longitudinal Distance before 1st lane change
1st trans Dist Longitudinal Distance in which 1st lane change completed
2nd Long Dist Longitudinal Distance covered in 2nd lane
2nd Trans Dist Longitudinal Distance in which 2nd lane change completed
3rd Long Dist Longitudinal Distance after lane change
st
1 Lane Offset Lateral Distance between midline of 1st lane and 2nd lane
2nd Lane Offset Lateral Distance between midline of 2nd lane and 1st lane
If you select 'Max Radius Path' in Controller Type, Adams Car displays the following options when click
on more button:
1st Turn Out Earlier Enter longitudinal distance in length units
Turn In to Lane 1st Later Enter longitudinal distance in length units
st
Turn Out of Lane 1 Earlier Enter longitudinal distance in length units
312 template_based_common
Save Session

For the option: Do the following:

Turn In to Lane 2nd Later Enter longitudinal distance in length units
st
Lane 1 More Outside Enter lateral distance in length units
nd
Lane 2 More Outside Enter lateral distance in length units

Save Session
File → Save As → Session
Exports a snapshot of the current Adams Car or Driveline session to a binary session file (extension .bin).
This capability can be used to quickly save and later restore all data associated with the current session.
It's the Car equivalent of the View database file, and contains all models, analyses, plots, reports, plugins and
user interface (UDE definitions, menus, macros and dialog boxes) of the current session.
In addition to the View database file, currently registered Car databases (cdb) and event sets are also
supported.
Event sets are not stored in the binary, but written to a separate file in the same folder (same prefix, extension
xml), but only if events exists in your session.

Note: Due to the binary file format, and because it contains all user interface, the session file
should only be used within the same version of Adams Car. Also note that, the session
file can become huge (several GB), if many models, analyses and plugins are present
at the time of the save operation.

For the option: Do the following:

Session File Prefix Enter the file prefix for the session data binary and event set xml file
Target Directory Use the Select button to select the target folder in the file browser.
Select
The Target Directory field will be filled with your selection automatically
Delete all Analyses If turned on, all session analysis data will be saved to results/request/graphics files (if
not already present in the current working directory) and then deleted prior to saving
the session file. The data will not be automatically restored to the session, but can
easily be re-imported from the output files via analysis management or in the event
browser.

If turned off, analysis data will be retained in-session and included in the session file.
Including results data in the session (file) may exceed the maximum file size for binary
files (currently 2 GB).
Dialog Box - F1 Help 313
Set Default Writable Database

Set Default Writable Database

Tools → Database Management → Set Default Writable Shared Dialog Box
Sets the Default Writable Database. Learn about Managing Databases.

For the option: Do the following:

Database Name Select the database name you want to set as the new default destination for writing.

Note: The menu may not contain a complete listing of all databases in the
database search list, as there may be some which are read-only and thus
cannot be used as the default writable database.
Database Info Select to display a list of the search directories, including their search level, database
name, and database path.

Set Feedback Channel Function

(Template Builder) Build → Feedback Channels→ Set Function Shared Dialog Box
Redefines the function of a feedback channel. Learn about Feedback Channels.

For the option: Do the following:

Feedback Channel Enter the Database name of a feedback channel.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Function Enter a function that defines the selected feedback channel function.
Select to use the Function or Expression Builder to define a function. For
information on the Function or Expression Builder, see Function Builder.
Routine Enter the name of a user library.

Set Feedback Channel Offset

(Template Builder) Build → Feedback Channels → Set Offset Shared Dialog Box
Offsets a feedback channel. Learn about Feedback Channels.
314 template_based_common
Set File Units

For the option: Do the following:

Feedback Channel Enter the Database name of a feedback channel.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Offset Enter the value by which you want to offset the raw signal of the feedback channel.
Offset Compensate Select on or off to indicate if you want to offset the raw signal of the feedback
channel by a desired real value.

Set File Units

Tools → Curve Manager → Settings → Units Shared Dialog Box
Sets the file units in the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

Length Specify the units for the data in the property file. This is convenient when you want to
Angle maintain property files with different units; the unit information will be stored inside
the property file, with the appropriate conversions taking place when a component
Force references the property file.
Mass
Time

Shift Subsystem
(Standard Interface) Adjust → Shift Shared Dialog Box
Shifts an entire subsystem along the x- and z-axes. Learn about subsystems.

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Select the name of the subsystem you want to shift. The menu lists all open
subsystems.
Fore/Aft Translation Enter a real value to indicate a shift in the fore (+x) or aft (-x) direction.
Up/Down Translation Enter a real value to indicate a shift in the up (+z) or down (-z) direction.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 315
Shift Template

Shift Template
(Template Builder) Build → Shift Template Shared Dialog Box
Shifts a template that is open.

For the option: Do the following:

Template Select the name of the template you want to shift. The menu lists all open
templates.
Fore/Aft Translation Select if you want the x-direction translation to occur along the Fore (+x) or Aft
(-x) direction. Enter the translation value in the text box next to the pull-down
menu.
Up/Down Translation Select if you want the z-direction translation to occur along the Up (+z) or Down
(-z) direction. Enter the translation value in the text box next to the pull-down
menu.

Solver Selection
Settings → Solver → Selection Shared Dialog Box
Sets the version of Adams Solver that your template-based product will use to run simulations.
Default Adams Solver:
 All template-based products - The FORTRAN (F77) version of Adams Solver is the default solver
for all template-based analyses. The C++ (CXX) version of Adams Solver is the planned replacement
for the Adams Solver (FORTRAN) in a future release, but is currently experimental.
 If you select the CXX version, your results and analysis run times may vary from the FORTRAN
version. We've made the CXX solver available to you for your own experimentation.
The settings you choose using the dialog box apply only for the current session.
316 template_based_common
Solver Selection

For the option: Do the following:

Solver Selection Select one of the following:

 F77 - Forces your template-based product to use the FORTRAN version of

Adams Solver.
 CXX - Forces your template-based product to use the C++ version of Adams
Solver.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 317
Solver Selection

For the option: Do the following:

The following options are available for Adams Solver (C++) only.
Pattern Select a pre-defined pattern:
 default
Sets the pattern to the default for dynamic simulations. The default depends on
the integrator selection. For WSTIFF and GSTIFF, the default pattern is
TFFFTFFFTF, for HHT and Newmark, the default pattern is F.
 adaptive
Sets as PATTERN=F which turns on the adaptive Jacobian evaluation algorithm
when using Adams Solver (C++). The evaluation of the integration Jacobian is
then only done when needed, helping to improve run-time performance.
Tip: Selecting a pattern to request less frequent evaluations of the Jacobian
matrix can decrease the computation time, decreasing the cost and
improving the response time. However, infrequent evaluations could also
be more expensive since the modified Newton-Raphson algorithm might
require more iterations due to the slower convergence rates.
Thread Count Adams Solver (C++)

Specify the number of parallel threads that Adams Solver (C++) uses when performing
the simulation. The number of threads, n, must be an integer in the range of 1 to 128.
The default value is 1. By executing multiple threads in parallel across multiple
processors, Adams Solver (C++) can reduce the walltime required for a simulation.

Typically, the optimal number of threads is between N and 2N, where N is the number
of processors (including virtual processors in the case of Pentium processors with
HyperThreading enabled).

Note: The Intel® Pentium® 4 processor introduced a feature called Hyper

Threading, where a single physical processor can support more than one
logical instruction stream, simulating multiple logical processors on a single
physical processor. For many applications and environments, this capability
may offer performance improvements over non-Hyper Threading
processors. If multiple analysis jobs are running concurrently, however,
there may be performance degradations. If an installation determines this to
be the case, hyper threading should be disabled. This can be done on a
permanent basis through BIOS operations or, for Windows platforms,
hyper threading may be disabled on a process by process basis using the
“hyperthreads” keyword.
Learn more about Threaded (Parallel) Operation of Adams Solver(C++).
318 template_based_common
Spline Check and Repair

Spline Check and Repair

(Standard Interface) Tools → Model Diagnostics → Spline Check/Repair Shared Dialog Box
Runs several quality checks on spline data contained in bushings, springs, dampers, bumpstops, and
reboundstops. This utility can also perform some automatic spline repairs.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Element type Select one of the following options:

 All
 Bushings
 Springs
 Dampers
 Bumpstops
 Reboundstops
Select one of the following options:
Database Select the name of the database you wish to scan for property files.
Assemblies Select one or more assemblies in session.
Subsystems Select one or more subsystems in session.
Elements Select one or more elements in session.
Symmetry Check Select this option to check for spline symmetry about the Origin specified.
Symmetry Repair Select this option to offset the spline data points to achieve symmetry about the Origin
specified.
Zero Crossing Select this option to check whether the spline curve passes through (0, 0).
Check
Zero Crossing Select this option to set the spline data points so that the curve passes through (0, 0).
Repair
Evenly Spaced Select this option to check whether the spline's X-data is evenly spaced. In some cases
Check even spacing may be desirable.
Evenly Spaced Select this option to resample the data using the specified method.
Repair
Settings Select this button to open the Evenly Spaced Repair options.
If you selected the Settings button, the following options appear:
Dialog Box - F1 Help 319
Spline Check and Repair

For the option: Do the following:

Option Select one of the following:

 Min. Increment
 No. of Points
Set Select this button to accept the options and return to the main dialog box.
If you selected No. of Points, the following option appears:
No. of Points Enter the number of data points you wish the modified spline to contain.
Minimum Slope Select this option to check whether the spline's slope is always equal to or greater than
Check the specified slope.
Minimum Slope Select this option to record which splines require repair. After the check operations, a
Repair "Repair Next" button will appear. Select this button to manually repair the spline data
in the Curve Manager or Property File Editor.
If Minimum Slope Check is NOT selected, the following options are available:
Monotonic Check Select this option to check whether the spline is monotonic.
Monotonic Repair Select this option to record which splines require repair. After the check operations, a
"Repair Next" button will appear. Select this button to manually repair the spline data
in the Curve Manager or Property File Editor.
Monotony of Select this option to checker whether the slope of the spline is monotonic.
Slope Check
Monotony of Select this option to attempt to repair the slope monotony by filtering the data.
Slope Repair
Modify Filter Select this button to set the filter parameters used when attempting to repair slope
monotony.
Comparison Plot Select this option to display the Spline Comparison before any automatic repair
operation. This gives you a chance to visually inspect the repair before accepting the
change.
Save Property Files Select this option to save the modified splines to property files in the default writable
database.
If you selected Save Property Files, the following option is available:
Backup Property When saving property files to the default writable database: if the property already
Files exists, it will be backed up.
320 template_based_common
Spline Comparison

For the option: Do the following:

Output Select one of the following options to determine where the check and repair messages
are written:

 Message Window
 File
 Both
If you selected File or Both:
File Enter the name of a file where the messages will be written.

Spline Comparison
(Standard Interface) Tools → Spline Comparison Shared Dialog Box
Creates an overly plot of two splines (2D or 3D). Spline data can be loaded in session or from property files.
This utility does not allow modification of the spline data.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Select one of the following options:
Spline A Enter the name of an existing spline.
File A Select an existing property file. Supported file types (TeimOrbit and XML files):

 Bushing
 Spring
 Damper
 Bumpstop
 Reboundstop
Select one of the following options:
Spline B Enter the name of an existing spline.
File B Select an existing property file. Supported file types (TeimOrbit and XML files):

 Bushing
 Spring
 Damper
 Bumpstop
 Reboundstop
Dialog Box - F1 Help 321
Spline Comparison

For the option: Do the following:

View as  Plot
 Table
 Both
Select to modify:

 TeimOrbit File Format property files in the Curve Manager.

 XML File Format property files in the Property File Editor.
While either tool is active, you cannot perform operations in the main window. After
exiting either tool, you can resume working in the main window.
Auto Scale Vertical Select this option to automatically scale the plot's vertical axis based on the data. If
you turn this option off, enter the minimum and maximum axis limits.
Auto Scale Select this option to automatically scale the plot's horizontal axis based on the data. If
Horizontal you turn this option off, enter the minimum and maximum axis limits.
Symbols Select this option to plot data point markers.
Spline Curves Select this option to plot spline curves.
Slope Curves Select this option to plot the slope of the splines.
Extrapolation Select this option to plot linear extrapolation lines. Solver may perform linear
Tails extrapolation if the independent axis values are outside the range of the input data
during the simulation. Plotting the extrapolation tails gives you a visual indication of
how Solver's extrapolation will look.
Number of Points Set the number of points used to build a plot curve. This is for visualization only - it
has no effect on the spline data or the values used during the simulation. By default
this value is 10 x the number of data points.
Spline Type Select one of the following:

 AKISPL
 CUBSPL
This is for visualization only - it has no effect on the spline used during the simulation.
If the Solver function that references your spline data uses the AKISPL function, then
you should choose AKISPL here to create a plot using the same spline fitting routine.
Recompute Select this button to recreate the plot using the Number of Points and Spline Type
chosen.
Transfer to Full Select this button to copy the current plot to Adams PostProcessor where you can save
Plot your plot and have it be accessible for such operations as creating reports. Note that
any changes you make to the plot in Adams PostProcessor are not reflected in the
actual spline object because you are editing the plot, not the spline data.
322 template_based_common
Spring

For the option: Do the following:

If you selected 3D splines, the following buttons are displayed:
3D Data Plot Select to display a 3D plot using the raw data points (that is, the points represented
by the curve symbols in the 2D plot).
3D Spline Plot Select to display a 3D plot using the spline representations Adams generates from the
raw data points. Each of the curves in the 2D plot represents one of the rows in the
3D preview plot.

Spring
Tools → Curve Manager
Generates a spring property file. Learn about Working with Springs.
You can create a linear spring by entering a slope (stiffness), or define a nonlinear force-deflection
characteristic using a mathematical formula. You can also enter data in a spreadsheet and view and edit the
corresponding curve in the plotting window by dragging Hotpoints. See Modifying Curves.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. Learn about the Curve Manager.

For the option: Do the following:

 Right-click and select to create a function expression that defines the

vertical (y) values in terms of the horizontal (x) values. You can use only one
independent variable (x) to describe the functional relation. You can use any valid
FORTRAN mathematical operator, such as SIN, **2, and so on.
Free Length Enter the free length of the spring. Your template-based product creates a data block
with this value in the corresponding TeimOrbit property file. See TeimOrbit File Format.

Subsystem Info
(Standard Interface) File → Info → Subsystem Shared Dialog Box
Displays detailed information about subsystems in the current session.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 323
Switch & Remove Switch Parts

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Name Select the subsystem whose information you want to display. The menu lists
all open subsystems.
Save information to a file Select if you want to save the information to a text file. If you do not specify
a path, your template-based product stores the file in the directory where you
started the session.
If you select Save information to a file, your template-based product enables the following option:
File Name Enter the name of the text file which will contain the subsystem information.

Switch & Remove Switch Parts

(Standard Interface) Tools → Model Reduction → Remove Switch Parts Shared Dialog Box
Switches and removes all the switch parts within an assembly. Because this process is irreversible, you should
only perform it when you have determined a final configuration. The benefit of switching and removing the
switch parts is faster run times, as well as potential gains in Adams Solver robustness, which can reduce
Simulation times substantially for assemblies that contain many switch parts.
Learn about Switch Parts.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Shows the list of valid assemblies that are currently in the database. Select the one for
which you want to switch and remove switch parts.

Switch Assembly Variant

(Standard Interface) Manage → Assemblies → Switch Variant Shared Dialog Box
Switches the active assembly variant.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Select the assembly from the option menu.
Assembly Variant Select the variant you wish to make active.

Switch Subsystem Variant

(Standard Interface) Manage → Subsystems → Switch Variant Shared Dialog Box
Switches the active subsystem variant.
324 template_based_common
Synchronize Subsystem

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Name Select the subsystem from the option menu.
Subsystem Variant Select the variant you wish to make active.

Synchronize Subsystem
(Standard Interface) File → Manage Subsystems → Synchronize Shared Dialog Box
Applies the values of the selected master subsystem to one or more subsystem instances. Learn more about
synchronizing subsystems.

For the option: Do the following:

Master Subsystem Select the subsystem you want to assign as the master for the
synchronization. The menu lists all open subsystems.
Save Master Subsystem to Select to save the master subsystem to the default writable database.
Database
Subsystems to synchronize Select the subsystems you want to synchronize. The table contains all
subsystem instances that can be synchronized with the currently selected
master subsystem.

Use the Shift or Ctrl keys or Select All to select multiple subsystems from
the table. These subsystems will inherit the values from the master
subsystem.

Test Communicators
(Template Builder) Build → Communicator → Test Shared Dialog Box
Tests how Communicators from different templates match.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 325
Toe/Camber

For the option: Do the following:

Model Names Enter the model name(s) of one or more templates. Although specifying a single
template will work, it is more useful to specify multiple templates that contain
communicator variables that transfer information between the templates.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Minor Roles Enter a minor role for each template you specified in the Model Names text box.
For example, if you specified two template names, enter two minor roles in this
text box.

If a communicator has a minor role of inherit, which specifies that when the
template-based product creates a subsystem from the template, the communicator
should inherit the subsystem's minor role. Since when you test a template's
communicators, the inherit minor role is still undefined, entering minor roles in
the Minor Role text box provides the communicators with their minor role.

In Adams Car for example, if you assign the template susp_02, a minor role of
front in the Minor Roles text box, the communicator test also changes the minor
role of any communicators in susp_02 whose minor role is inherit to the role of
front.
Clear Information Select if your template-based product should clear the Information window of any
Window current information before displaying the communicator information.
Save Test Results to Select if your template-based product should send the test results to a text file.
File
If you set Save Test Results to File, your template-based product enables the following option:
File Name Enter the name of the text file that will contain the results displayed in the
Information window.

Toe/Camber
Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Sets the Toe and Camber orientation.

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Variable Type Select to use the toe and camber angles from one of the following:

 Parameter Variables
 Input Communicators
If you set Variable Type to Parameter Variables, your template-based product displays the following options:
326 template_based_common
Toggle Kinematic Mode

For the option: Do the following:

Toe Parameter Variable Specify the toe parameter variable you want to use.
Camber Parameter Specify the camber parameter variable you want to use.
Variable
If you set Variable Type to Input Communicators, your template-based product displays the following options:
Toe Input Specify the toe input communicator you want to use.
Communicator
Camber Input Specify the camber input communicators you want to use.
Communicator

Toggle Kinematic Mode

(Standard Interface) Adjust → Kinematic Toggle Shared Dialog Box
Changes the modes of the open subsystem from kinematic to compliant mode and back. See Toggle Kinematic
Mode - Example Application.

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Select the name of the subsystem whose kinematic state you want to modify. The
menu lists all open subsystems.
Current Mode Select a mode:

 Kinematic
 Compliant

Toggle Request Activity

(Standard Interface) Tools → Request Activity Shared Dialog Box
Toggles the activity of requests. This dialog is used to set activity of various object requests. It does not
necessarily display the current state of all request types. Note that if you select Assembly, the request activity
settings are stored on each subsystem in that assembly. There is no request activity stored at the assembly level.
Learn how to store request activity.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 327
Toggle Subsystem Activity

For the option: Do the following:

Model Type Select whether you are modifying the requests in a subsystem or assembly:

 Assembly – Display a list of open assemblies.

 Subsystem – Display a list of open subsystems.
If you select Assembly, your template-based product displays the following option:
Assembly Select an assembly from the list of currently open assemblies.
If you select Subsystem, your template-based product displays the following option:
Subsystem Select a subsystem from the list of currently open subsystems.
Object Type Select the type of object whose requests you want to activate/deactivate.
Activity Scope Select one of the following options to control request activity:

 All active - activate all supported force and motion requests

 Force only - deactivate all supported motion requests, leaving force requests
active
 Motion only - deactivate all supported force requests, leaving displacement,
velocity and acceleration requests active
 None active - deactivate all supported requests
 No opinion - let the individual object (for example, connector) control the
request activity
Coordinate System(s) If the Activity Scope is "All active", "Force only", or "No opinion", select the
desired force request coordinate system(s):

 Local - reports forces in the object's local reference frame

 I-part - reports forces in the I-part's local reference frame
 J-Part - reports forces in the J-part's local reference frame
 Global - reports forces in the global reference frame

Toggle Subsystem Activity

(Standard Interface) File → Manage Assemblies → Toggle Subsystem Activity Shared Dialog Box
Sets the activity status of an existing subsystem. Learn more.
328 template_based_common
Toggle Testrig Activity

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Name Select the subsystem you want to activate or de-activate. The menu lists all open
subsystems in the assemblies.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

Current Mode Select an activity status for the subsystem:

 Active – The subsystem is included in all assembly operations.

 Inactive – The subsystem is ignored and not considered part of the assembled
model, although it is not deleted from the assembly.

Toggle Testrig Activity

(Standard Interface) File → Manage Assemblies → Toggle Testrig Activity Shared Dialog Box
Sets the activity status of a test rig in an open assembly. Learn more.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Select the assembly whose test rig you want to activate or de-activate. The menu lists
all assemblies open in session.
Testrig Activity Select an activity status for the test rig:

 Active - The test rig is included in all assembly operations.

 Inactive - The test rig is ignored and not considered part of the assembled model,
although it is not deleted from the assembly.

Update Assembly
(Standard Interface) File → Manage Assemblies →Update Assembly Shared Dialog Box
Re-reads an assembly file, in case you modified the file by an alternative process. For example, if you edit in a
text editor an assembly file stored in the shared database, you can reflect this change in your template-based
product by using the update assembly functionality.

For the option: Do the following:

Assembly Name Select the assembly you want to update. The menu lists all open assemblies.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 329
Update Instance(s)

Update Instance(s)

Shared Dialog Box

Updates more than one instance at one time. All instances updated must be of the same type.

For the option: Do the following:

For the option: Do the following:
Instance Name(s) Your template-based product enters the name of the first instance when you
(informational text box) display this dialog box from a modify dialog box.
Recognition Type Specify the recognition pattern to use for the update.

 List - Specify single instances to be updated.

 Name - Update all instances with the same name, but in different
subsystems, as the input instance. Only valid for assemblies.
 Type - Update all instances of the same type as the input instance.
If you set Recognition Type to List, your template-based product displays the following option:
List Specify all the instances that should be updated.

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

You don't have to specify the instance given in the Instance Name text box, as
this is already part of the updates.

Update Subsystem
(Standard Interface) File → Manage Subsystems → Update Shared Dialog Box
Resets the values of a subsystem to those stored in a subsystem file. You can update a subsystem using any
subsystem file that is based on the same template as the subsystem in session.

Note: The subsystems is not renamed during the update.

330 template_based_common
User-entered Location

For the option: Do the following:

Subsystem Name Select the subsystem you want to update. The menu lists all open subsystems.
Subsystem File Specify the subsystem file you want to use to update the subsystem.

Tips on Entering File Names in Text Boxes.

If you do not specify a subsystem file, your template-based product updates the
subsystem from the original subsystem file referenced when you opened the
subsystem.
Entity Type Select the type of entity you wish to update. You can choose either a single entity type
(for example, hardpoints) or "all".

User-entered Location
Dialog boxes where you can set location dependencies Shared Dialog Box

For the option: Do the following:

Location values Enter the x, y, and z locations in the global axis system. Your template-based product
creates the marker in this position.

User entered values

Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Orients an entity using the values you specify.

For the option: Do the following:

Orient using Select either:

 Euler Angles - Allows for rotation according to the body313 method, or z-x'-z'.
 Direction Vectors - Specifies the directions of the x- and z-axes, with the y-axis
determined according to the right-hand-rule.
If you select Euler Angles, your template-based product enables the following option:
Euler Angles Enter the three Euler angle rotations to be used.
If you select X Vector/Z Vector, your template-based product enables the following options:
X Vector Enter the three real values representing the vector direction of the x-axis.
Z Vector Enter the three real values representing the vector direction of the z-axis.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 331
ViewFlex

ViewFlex
Dialog boxes where you can set orientation dependencies Shared Dialog Box
Transforms a rigid part to an MNF-based flexible body using embedded finite element analysis where a
meshing step and linear modes analysis will be performed.

For the option: Do the following:

Part to be meshed Pick the part to be meshed.
Material Browse and select the material to be used for the flexible body.
Number of Modes Enter the number of modes for the flexible body.
Stress Analysis Check if you would like stress information to be generated with the flexible body.
Strain Analysis Check if you would like strain information to be generated with the flexible body.
Manual Replace Select to only generate a flexible body, not automatically replace the rigid body for
the flexible body in the model.

 Manual Replace = Off : Viewflex will automatically replace the part with flexible
body by transferring all connections from rigid body to flexible body. This will
deactivate the rigid part and make it invisible.
 Manual Replace = On: Viewflex will not automatically replace the part and both
rigid and flexible body will be shown. You need to manually create the
connections on the flexible body.

Advanced Settings
This will allows you to control the details of creating the flexible body.
332 template_based_common
ViewFlex

For the option: Do the following:

Load AFI File ViewFlex writes information about centerline, cross section, attachment points, and flexible
elements to a ViewFlex input (AFI) file. See Using AFI Files for more information.
Flexbody Type There are three methods for defining flexible bodies in ViewFlex and integrating them into Adams.
 Extrusion
ViewFlex enables the generation of a flexible body automatically that is defined as a
geometric extrusion of a section profile along a generic centerline. Using this option, rigid
parts previously defined on the model to generate flexible bodies are not needed. See
Generating Parametric Extrusions for more information.
 Geometry
This provides different options than in the Extrusion Method. In the upper part of the
window you can select the existing geometry, whereas the lower section is for defining the
mesh properties. See Creating Flexible Bodies from Existing Solid Geometry for more information.
 Import Mesh
The external mesh (BDF or DAT format) can be imported into ViewFlex to generate a
flexible body. After importing the mesh you can set all the options for elements properties,
attachments and slave nodes to create the flexible body. See Creating Flexible Bodies from
Imported External Meshes for more information.
FlexBody Name Selected flexible body name will be displayed.
If you selected Extrusion following options available:
Centerline To control the type of interpolation between the different parts of the centerline. This will displays
a data table in which to define the centerline, along with the extrusion to be created. This has
following options:

 Interpolation
 Linear: Linear interpolation
 Cubic: Cubic interpolation (may require more than two reference markers to capture
curvature events).
• The Auto Align option enabled.
 None: No interpolation is used
 Pick/Browse Coord Reference: Select the coordinate system for which, if available, the
orientation appears in the data table.
 View Centerline Geometry: This will allow you to view the centerline geometry.
For more details see section Defining the Centerline.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 333
ViewFlex

For the option: Do the following:

Section You have the options to specify the section to extrude.

 Section Type
 Elliptical: You provided with the options for defining an ellipse.
 Generic: You provided with the options for defining a generic section.
For more details see section Modeling the Section.
Mesh/Properties Displays the general material and mesh properties.

 Element Type: Indicates what type of elements are to be generated.

 Shell Quad: Creates shell quad elements.
 Solid Hexa: Creates solid hexa elements.
 Solid Wedge: Creates solid wedge elements (valid for complex sections).
 Element Size: Enter the average edge length of the element.
 Nominal Thickness: Enter the average thickness of the element
 Normal Direction: X, Y, Z, -X, -Y, -Z
 Stress/Strain Analysis: Check if stress/strain information is to be generated for the flexible
body.
 Shell Stress/Strain Layers: Select the layer on which you want the stress and/or strain
calculated
• Top
• Middle
• Bottom
For more details see Generating Parametric Extrusions.
Attachments Points at which the flexible body will be attached to other bodies. See section Defining Attachment
Points in Parametric Extrusions for information.
If you selected Geometry following options available:
334 template_based_common
ViewFlex

For the option: Do the following:

Mesh/Properties You have the following option under this properties:

 Element Type: Indicates what type of elements are to be generated. Available options are point,
line, area or volume elements.
 Solid: Creates solid elements.
 Shell: Creates shell elements.
 Element Shape
 Tetrahedral - Creates tetrahedral solid elements. Card: CTETRA. Linear: CTETRA4,
Quadratic: CTETRA10
The following Element shapes appear when Shell Element Type is selected

 Triangle - Creates triangular shell elements. Card: CTRIA. Linear: CTRIA3, Quadratic:
CTRIA6
 Quadrilateral - Creates quadrilateral shell elements. Card: CQUAD Linear: CQUAD4,
Quadratic: CQUAD8
 Element Order: Indicates what order of elements are to be generated. Available options are
linear, quadratic and cubic. The specified element order must be compatible with the element
order used in previously meshed adjacent regions.
 Linear: Sets linear element order for first-order elements
 Quadratic: Sets quadratic for second-order elements.
 Element Specification
 Auto: Uses an automatic scale factor to determine the element size based on the selected
part's dimensions.
 Size: After entering the average edge length of the element, ViewFlex asks you to input the
element's median and minimum side size (using automatic mesh refining, where required
by the geometry to mesh).
 Edge Shape: Indicates whether higher order element should be generated with straight or
curved boundary edges.
 Straight: All mid-side nodes will be positioned at the average coordinate of the end nodes.
 Curved: Mid-side nodes on boundary geometry will be projected onto the geometry
resulting in curved element edges.
 Mixed: Edges will be curved except when such curving would result in an invalid element
(negative Jacobian).
 Element Size: Enter the average edge length of the element. This option will be available upon
selecting “Size” from Element Specification options.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 335
ViewFlex

For the option: Do the following:

 Minimum Size
 Absolute minimum element size. The mesh generator uses this size to cap off the
refinement when doing curvature based refinement. If the curvature factor specifies a
element edge length which is smaller than the minimum element size, the edge length is
capped off by using the minimum element size. This avoids over refinement in areas of
high curvatures.
 Growth Rate
 The parameter 'growth rate' is a mesh parameter to control the rate of size transition
between adjacent elements. It is the desired maximum length ratio between 2 adjacent
tetrahedral edges. This parameter is mainly used to produce coarser elements in the
interior of a solid and reduce the number of tet-elements on the solid. When meshing a
solid with curvy faces, the tet-elements on the solid faces have to follow the shape of
geometry of the surfaces, and their sizes are generally small. If the growth rate is close to
1.0, the small mesh sizes will be propagated from the solid boundary to the interior of solid
and the number of elements may be very big; if the growth rate is bigger, the mesh size will
increase gradually from the solid boundary to the interior of solid, as a result, the number
of elements will be reduced.
 Shell Thickness: Enter the thickness of shell elements for computing mass and stiffness
properties.
336 template_based_common
ViewFlex

For the option: Do the following:

 Angle Per Element
 The parameter "angle-per-element" is a curvature-based mesh size control parameter
which is the max-allowed subtended angle of an element-edge on a curved surface. It is
used to define local mesh density at each point of a surface.
 For a point P on a curved surface, we use the following way to define subtended angle of
an element-edge E in the neighborhood of P and define local mesh density at the point P:
• First, we calculate the principal curvatures at the point P. Then use the reciprocal of
the max principle curvature as radius and the center of max principle curvature as
center to define an osculating circle that passes through the point P. The element-edge
E is considered a chord of the osculating circle. The subtended angle of element-edge
E is defined as the subtended angle of the chord from the center of the circle.
• The local mesh density D at P is calculated as the length of the chord whose
subtended angle = angle-per-element. The length of an element-edge in the
neighborhood of P should be equal or smaller than the local mesh density D. If angel-
per-element is fixed, the local mesh density D is inversely proportional to the max
principal curvature at P; if max principal curvature is fixed, the local density D
increases as angle-per-element increases.
Example: If angle-per-element = 30 degree and there is a circular hole of a surface, we
expect that at least 12 (=360/30) element-edges along the hole.

Where:

 P: a point on surface, Circle: the osculating circle, C: a curve on a surface, O: the center of
osculating circle, r: the radius of the osculating circle which = 1.0/mpc, where mpc is the max
principle curvature at point P.
 Blue line segment E: An element-edge in the neighborhood of P.
 Yellow line segment: Connecting an end point of the E to the center of osculating circle
The subtended angle of element-edge E is the angle formed by two yellow-line-segments. It is
controlled by angle-per-element
Dialog Box - F1 Help 337
ViewFlex

For the option: Do the following:

 Stress Analysis
Enables stress recovery to be available in Adams PostProcessor.
 Strain Analysis
Enables strain recovery to be available in Adams PostProcessor.
 Shell Stress/Strain Layers: Select which layer to recovery stress and/or strain
• Top
• Middle
• Bottom
 Normal Direction: X, Y, Z, -X, -Y, -Z
 Collapse small edges: If checked small edges or features will collapse to zero in meshing.
 Edge Tolerance: Specifies the collapse tolerance. Cannot be less than zero or ½ of element
size. In tet meshing process, the mesher will fix the bad triangles after it creates tria mesh
on the skin of the solid. If collapse edge flag is off, the mesher will skip the tria elements
that have elem-edges on the geometric edges in fix-bad-tria routine. In the case of collapse
edge flag is on and collapse tolerance is 0, the mesher will fix the trias that have elem-edges
on the geometric edges if they fail in aspect ratio check (even though its edge length >
collapse tolerance which is 0).
 Curvature Based Scaling: ON or OFF
When this option is ON the mesher uses the geometry (curve or surface) curvature to
automatically provide mesh grading and smoother mesh transition. The mesh will be more
uniform if this option is turned OFF as no grading is done.
 Advanced Options: This option will be activated upon by importing SHELL type geometry. It
will list the translation and rotation data of the meshed geometry. Selecting "Get from Model"
fills the text boxes with the current location and orientation of the selected geometry
automatically.
338 template_based_common
ViewFlex

For the option: Do the following:

Attachments After creating the geometry attachment points need to be defined.

 Selection Type
 Node IDs
• Pick Nodes
• Transfer IDs
 Spherical
• Radius
• Transfer IDs
 Cylindrical
• Radius
• End Location
• Symmetric
• Transfer IDs
 Closest nodes
• Number of nodes
• Transfer IDs
 Solid feature
• Vertex
• Edge
• Surface
• Pick
• View part only
Rigid Body Element (RBE) connected by attachment nodes can be previewed by clicking on RBE
toggle button and Mesh Preview can be hidden by clicking off Mesh toggle button.

 Show/Hide
 Mesh
 RBE
See section Defining Attachment Points in Existing Solid Geometry for information.
Mesh Preview Select to preview a mesh of the selected geometry. For more details see Creating Flexible Bodies from
Existing Solid Geometry.
Dialog Box - F1 Help 339
Wheel Envelope

For the option: Do the following:

If you selected Import Mesh following options available:
Mesh/Properties  Shell Thickness: Enter the thickness of shell elements for computing mass and stiffness
properties.
 Normal Direction: X, Y, Z, -X, -Y, -Z
 Stress Analysis: Check if stress information is to be generated for the flexible body.
 Strain Analysis: Check if strain information is to be generated for the flexible body.
 Shell Stress/Strain Layers: Select the layer on which you want the stress and/or strain
calculated
• Top
• Middle
• Bottom
For more details see Creating Flexible Bodies from Imported External Meshes.
Attachments Points at which the flexible body will be attached to other bodies. See section Defining Attachment
Points after Importing an External Mesh for information.

Wheel Envelope
Tools → Curve Manager
Generates a Wheel-Envelope Property File.
A wheel-envelope-input curve defines the boundaries of the vertical and steering travel used to compute a
wheel envelope. During a wheel-envelope Analysis, Adams Car overlays the wheel-envelope-input curve with
a grid and computes the position and orientation of the wheels at each point on the wheel-envelope curve.
The following table explains the default options that are common to both the plot and table Curve Manager
views. For information on the options specific to each view, see Curve Manager Plot View or Curve Manager Table
View.
340 template_based_common
Wheel Envelope

For the option: Do the following:

Pull-down Menu Select one of the following:

 Wheel Z vs Steer - For steerable suspensions, specifies wheel vertical positions

(left and right) and steer travel.
 Left Z vs Right Z - For nonsteerable suspensions, specifies wheel vertical
positions (left and right).
Steering Input Select one of the following:

 angle - The steering input is an angle applied to the steering wheel.

 length - The steering input is a length travel applied to the rack.
Wheel: Interior Enter a positive real number to fix the spacing of the wheel-center position points
that Adams Car adds inside the curve before performing a wheel-envelope analysis.
Wheel: Boundary Enter a positive real number to fix the spacing of the wheel-center position points
that Adams Car adds on the boundary of the curve before performing a wheel-
envelope analysis.
Steering: Interior Enter a positive real number to fix the spacing of the steering input points that
Adams Car adds inside the curve before performing a wheel-envelope analysis.
Steering: Boundary Enter a positive real number to fix the spacing of the steering input points that
Adams Car adds on the boundary of the curve before performing a wheel-envelope
analysis.

Note: The grid sizes and number of curve points determines the number of output points in the
wheel-envelope analysis. Choosing small grid sizes increases the number of output points,
which in turn increases solution times and output file sizes.
Appendix
.acf File
An .acf file is a command script that controls a Simulation, including which files to read, the number of Analysis
frames, end time, and other simulation parameters.

.adm File
An .adm file describes a model using Adams Solver Data Language (ADL) statements.

.nam File
A name file (.nam) allows you to create requests with meaningful result set component names. When you
read into the interface a request file, your template-based product renames the results and result set
components based on the information it found in the .nam file.

2D Spur Gear Force

A 2D spur gear force represents a force that couples two gear elements. Your template-based product
computes the gear force at the pitch circle, considering the pressure (tooth) angle. It then resolves the force
to the appropriate forces and moments applied at the center of one gear, with the reaction force applied at
the other gear, using a general force (GFORCE). For information on GFORCE, see the Adams Solver online
help.
The contact formulation is based on a scaled impact force formulation (traditional).
The gear force lets you model gear interaction with backlash. Your template-based product considers the
actual contact points at up to three teeth per gear. When creating the gear force, the gears are rotated
automatically to ensure proper meshing of the gears. In addition to the GFORCE, your template-based
product creates an INPLANE joint primitive at the idealized point of contact with its normal tangential to
the pitch circle. The inplane joint primitive is only active during the initial condition Analysis phase of a
Simulation. This will ensure that the initial conditions (displacement, velocity, and accelerations) of the gears
are calculated appropriately.
This component allows you to model spur gear force, where the centers of the gears are not fixed in space
(bending in shafts) and the mesh frequency is considered.
The component outputs the following results:
 total_tooth_force - Resulting force normal to the gear tooth surface.
 tooth_force_1 - Force on the first tooth of currently possible teeth in contact.
 tooth_force_2 - Force on the second tooth of currently possible teeth in contact.
 tooth_force_3 - Force on the third tooth of currently possible teeth in contact.
2 Template based
ASCII

 torque - Resulting torque applied at the first gear. The gear force icon is positioned at the center of
the first gear.

ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) is a human-readable character format.

Adams IDs
Adams IDs are numbers that identify an entity in the Adams Solver Dataset (.adm) file.

Adams Solver
Adams Solver is a powerful numerical Analysis application that automatically solves the equations of motion
for the following types of analyses:
 Kinematic Analysis
 Static Analysis
 Quasi-static
 Dynamic Analysis
Your template-based product uses Adams Solver to analyze the assemblies you create.
Learn more about Adams Solver at:
 Welcome to the C++ Version of Adams Solver
 Welcome to the FORTRAN Version of Adams Solver

Analysis
An analysis is an Adams Solver Simulation and its corresponding results.

Analysis Output Name

Your Adams product uses the analysis output name as the:
 Complete analysis name
 File name prefix for all the different analysis files

Animation
Allows you to replay the frames from your Simulation, and helps you review and study the part movements
within your model.
Appendix 3
Array

Array
A list of input variables, state variables, output variables, and initial conditions associated with System
elements, such as general state equations, linear state equations, and transfer functions. You can also use
general arrays to define lists of constants. You can access the values in function Expressions or User-written
subroutines.

Assembly Class
The assembly class determines the list of available test rigs. For example, in Adams Car, selecting full-vehicle
prompts Adams Car to load full-vehicle test rigs in the Test Rig option menu.

Attribute
Attributes are single line entries listed after a data block. For example, PART_ASSEMBLY is a data block and
MASS is an attribute.
$--------------------------PART_ASSEMBLY
[PART_ASSEMBLY]
USAGE = 'chassis'
MASS = 995.0

Binary File Format

Setting File Format to Binary saves the file in a platform-dependent binary format. Your template-based
product reads binary-format files much faster than it reads EDS-format files (ASCII). Therefore, opening
templates in binary format, and subsystems that reference templates in binary format, is much faster.

Calculation of Friction Force

The resulting friction force is calculated as follows:
F = - N * step(v, -Vs, -1, Vs, 1) * step(ABS(v), Vs, Cst, Vtr, Cdy)
where:
 N = Normal force
 v = Surface velocity
 Vs = Slip velocity/Static friction transition velocity
 Cst = Static coefficient
 Vtr = Transition velocity/Dynamic friction transition velocity
 Cdy = Dynamic coefficient
The figure shows the resulting friction coefficient versus surface velocity.
4 Template based
Cam

Contact Friction

Cam
A cam consists of one part constrained with a fixed joint. It contains a BSPLINE, which is used for contacts.

Cam Schematic Representation Cam Geometry

The component outputs the result: joint_force, which is the force magnitude in the fixed joint.

Command Window
A window that lets you enter commands directly instead of using menus. The commands correspond to menu
selections and the parameters correspond to dialog box choices. You can either enter the full command or an
abbreviation to the command.
To display the command window, press the F3 key.

Communicator Minor Role: Any

Communicators with this minor role will match with any other role. This is effectively a wildcard.
Appendix 5
Communicator Minor Role: Front, Rear, Middle

Communicator Minor Role: Front, Rear, Middle

Communicators with one of these minor roles specify location, such as rear wheel on a car or nose gear on
an aircraft. Communicators with these role will only match with other communicators that are part of other
front, rear, or middle subsystems, respectively, or to subsystems of type any.

Communicator Minor Role: Inherit

Communicators with this minor role get their role (such as front) from the parent subsystem.

Comprehensive Help
This is the comprehensive help for this component. Therefore, if you accessed this dialog box from the
Standard Interface, you will find that some of the options explained here are not part of your dialog box.

Contact Force
The contact force between two parts is defined by a modified impact function for a penetration larger than
zero. The force is zero when there is no penetration. The modified impact function uses a scale factor while
the standard impact function doesn't.

where:
 s = Scale Factor
 k = Stiffness
 e = Exponent
 p = Penetration
 v = Velocity
 c = Effective damping coefficient with a value of Damping, cmax, for a penetration larger than
Penetration Depth, d, as shown next.
6 Template based
Contact Force

Impact Damping

You can design your contact force law by changing stiffness, exponent, and scale factor. Figure Impact Stiffness
shows the influence of scale factor and stiffness on the stiffness force. The graph shows three different
examples with scale factor s2 much larger than s1 and stiffness k2 much larger than k1. The exponent is the
same for all three examples, and is larger than 1. Figure Impact Exponent shows the influence of the exponent,
e. Note that for penetration p=s, the impact force is independent of the exponent.

Impact Stiffness Impact Exponent

Using a scale factor also ensures that the stiffness-force function is independent of the units. The next example
illustrates the influence of the scale factor with respect to units. The force function is independent of the
length unit when using the modified impact function as shown in figure Impact Scale Factor. When the
standard impact function is used, the force function is dependent on the unit of length, as shown in figure
Unit-Sensitive Impact; curve A is for [mm] and curve B is for [m].
Appendix 7
Contact Force Formulation Based on Oilfilm Thickness Theory

Impact Scale Factor Unit-Sensitive Impact

Note that the examples are only valid for e > 1.

Contact Force Formulation Based on Oilfilm Thickness

Theory
The stiffness portion of the contact force between the two teeth is defined by a cubic function:
f = Stiffness * 4 / 27 / Oilfilm Thickness2 * (x - Lash + Oilfilm
Thickness)3
active when:
Lash - Oilfilm Thickness < x < Lash + Oilfilm Thickness/2
The lash is adjusted according to the distance of the gear centers and the tooth profile of the gears during a
Simulation. This function transitions into a linear function with a slope of stiffness:
f = Stiffness * (x - Lash)
The damping portion of the contact force between the two teeth is defined by:
f = -xvel * Damping * ( x - Lash + Oilfilm Thickness )2 / Oilfilm
Thickness2
active when:
Lash - Oilfilm Thickness < x < Lash
This function transitions into a constant damping function:
f = -xvel * Damping
Total cleareance is 2 * Lash.
8 Template based
Coordinate Reference

Coordinate Reference
A coordinate reference is a component that can serve as the basic building block in building other
components. You can use two types of coordinate references:
 Hardpoint
 Construction frame
Appendix 9
Curve Math Operations

Curve Math Operations

You can perform a series of mathematical operations on your curve, allowing you to shift, scale, translate, and

so on. To access the curve math tools, right-click the Linear Slope tool (the default).

Click the tool of interest, below, to learn more about it.

Curve Math Operations - Absolute Value

For the option: Do the following:

Absolute Value Select to transpose the negative values of a curve to positive values.

Curve Math Operations - Create Equal X and Y Values

For the option: Do the following:

Copy X -> Y Select to replace values on the y-axis with corresponding values on the x-axis. If, for
example, you had a point that was defined as x=-100 and y=-1000, the new definition
would be x=-100 and y=-100.

Curve Math Operations - Interpolation

Use interpolation to resample your data at an even interval. Interpolation is intended to fit more data points
to a small number of existing data points, but you may increase or decrease the number of points. Based on
the existing range and the number of points specified, if a new value on the abscissa (that is, "x" value) is
computed, a corresponding new value for the ordinate (that is, "y" value) is computed based on the
interpolation method chosen.
The data is always displayed using an AKIMA spline.
10 Template based
Curve Math Operations - Linear Slope

For the option: Do the following:

Method Select one of the following interpolation options: akima, linear, cubic, spline,
notaknot, and hermite. For more information on spline methods, see the Adams Solver
online help, and Numerical Recipes in C, published by Cambridge University Press.
Points Enter the number of points you want to have in the interpolated spline.

Curve Math Operations - Linear Slope

For the option: Do the following:

Slope Enter the linear slope value of the curve.
Limits Enter the upper and lower (x) values of the curve.
Points/Segs Enter the points or intermediary segments for the curve.

Curve Math Operations - Mirror Curve About XY Axes

For the option: Do the following:

XY Mirror Select to take the current curve and create a mirror image of the curve about an
imaginary axis defined as perpendicular to the existing curve in the xy plane. The point
for the mirror image is about the minimum value of x.

Curve Math Operations - Mirror Curve About Y Axis

For the option: Do the following:

Y Mirror Select to take the current curve and create a mirror image of the curve data about
the y-axis, at the minimum value of x.
Appendix 11
Curve Math Operations - Negate

Curve Math Operations - Negate

For the option: Do the following:

Negate Select to multiply the y-axis values of the curve by -1.

Curve Math Operations - Ramp

Defines a ramp function that can be used to represent data of a ramp nature. The ramp function is very
similar to the step function; the only difference being in the shape of the curve between minimum and
maximum y values.

For the option: Do the following:

X Specifies the minimum and maximum values of the x-axis. For example, if we were
creating a spring characteristic that ranged from -100 to 100 mm displacement, then
we would use -100 as the minimum x value and 100 as the maximum x value.
Y Specifies the minimum and maximum values of the y-axis. Continuing the example
above, this would represent the force characteristics of the spring. For example, -
1000 N as the minimum y value and 1000 N as the maximum y value.
Ramp Specifies the starting and ending x values defining the point where the curve
transitions from -y to +y. Continuing the examples above, you could use values of -75
(mm) and 75 (mm) representing the transition from minimum y to maximum y.
Points/Segs Enter the points or intermediary segments for the curve.

Curve Math Operations - Scale

Scales the y-axis values of a curve. If you have a y value of 100 mm and a scale value of 2, then your new y-
axis will be 200 mm.

For the option: Do the following:

Scale Value Specify a scale value to be applied to the y-axis values of your curve.
12 Template based
Curve Math Operations - Set Start and End X Values for Curve

Curve Math Operations - Set Start and End X Values for

Curve

Specifies the minimum and maximum values for the x-axis. This is the same as specifying axis limits on a plot
page.

For the option: Do the following:

X Start Specify a value at which your curve will begin. This represents the lowest value of your
curve on the x-axis.
X End Specify a value at which your curve will end. This represents the highest value of your
curve on the x-axis.

Curve Math Operations - Shift

Shifts all y values in a curve by a set amount. Your template-based product adds the offset value to each y
point in the curve.

For the option: Do the following:

Offset Value Specify a positive or negative value by which you want to offset the y values of the
curve.

Curve Math Operations - Shift Curve to Start at Zero (y)

For the option: Do the following:

Zero Select to shift the start of the curve to zero. The rest of the curve will be moved by the
same amount, such that the gradient of the curve remains constant, but the y values
of the curve are shifted by an amount equal to the start value of the curve, minus zero.
Appendix 13
Curve Math Operations - Sine

Curve Math Operations - Sine

For the option: Do the following:

X Specifies the minimum and maximum values of the x-axis.
Y Enter the mean value of the sine wave; this is the center line about which the
amplitude is measured.
Begin Sweep Enter the x value at which the begin amplitude will ramp up. The sine wave can be
swept from one amplitude to another.
Amplitude Enter the start and end amplitude for the wave. The magnitude of the sine wave can
either increase or decrease based on the values of the amplitude. To maintain a
constant amplitude, specify the start and end values to be the same.
Frequency Specify a frequency for the curve. Units are in Hertz, so 1 Hz = 1 cycle/per unit time.
Points/Segs Enter the points or intermediary segments for the curve.

Curve Math Operations - Step Function

Defines a step function that can be used to represent data of a step-type nature. The step function is very
similar to the ramp function; the only difference being in the shape of the curve between minimum and
maximum y values. See Plot for Step Function.

For the option: Do the following:

X Specifies the minimum and maximum values of the x-axis. For example, if we were
creating a spring characteristic that ranged from -100 to 100 mm displacement, then
we would use -100 as the minimum x value and 100 as the maximum x value.
Y Specifies the minimum and maximum values of the y-axis. Continuing the example
above, this would represent the force characteristics of the spring. For example, -
1000 N as the minimum y value and 1000 N as the maximum y value.
Step Specifies the starting and ending x values defining the point where the curve
transitions from -y to +y. Continuing the examples above, you could use values of -75
(mm) and 75 (mm) representing the transition from minimum y to maximum y.
Points/Segs Enter the points or intermediary segments for the curve.
14 Template based
Curve Math Operations - User-Defined Function

Curve Math Operations - User-Defined Function

For the option: Do the following:

F(x) Enter an expression that defines the magnitude of the vertical y response based on the
value of the horizontal x. For a curve defined where y = mx + c, where m is the gradient
and c is the offset, you would enter the following syntax: 5*x+10. In this case, you will
receive a warning that the plot doesn't pass through 0,0.
Points/Segs Enter the points or intermediary segments for the curve.
Limits Enter the upper and lower (x) values of the curve. These are the values that are used in
the F(x) expression defined above.

Cylinder Head
Adams Engine displays the following pull-down menu when the major role of the template is cylinder_head.

For the option: Do the following:

Cylinder Head Specify the cylinder head in the assembly for which the subsystem should be used.
Learn about Building Models.

Damper Property File

A damper property file describes the velocity-force characteristic. Learn about Working with Dampers.

Database
Two elements define a database:
 Database name - Internal reference used when accessing the contents of the database.
 Database path - File system location of the database directory.
A session in your template-based product requires one or more databases which can function as either
read/write or read-only repositories. In addition to the databases defined in the configuration files and
accessed at start-up, during a session, you can add an existing database to those currently in use.
One of the databases must function as the Default Writable Database.
At start-up, your template-based product stores databases defined in the configuration files and existing on
the file system in the database list, a mechanism internal to your template-based product, which maintains
information for use during the session.
Appendix 15
Dataset

Dataset
A dataset is a model described with Adams Solver data language statements. Datasets are stored in .adm files.

Default Writable Database

A default writable database is a Database that functions as a location for writing files. The default writable
database is defined in your private configuration file, but you can change it at any point during the session.
The only requirement is that the database you select as the new default writing destination must be writable.

Degrees of Freedom
Degrees of freedom (DOF) are a measure of how components can move relative to one another in a model.
A body free in space has six DOF in which it can move: three translational and three rotational. Each DOF
corresponds to at least one equation of motion.
When you add a constraint, such as a revolute joint, between two components, you remove DOF between
the components, causing them to remain positioned with respect to one another regardless of any motion or
force in the model. Each constraint removes different DOF.

Differential Equation
A differential equation is a user-defined state variable.

Dynamic Analysis
A dynamic analysis provides a time-history solution for all displacements, velocities, accelerations, and
internal reaction forces in your model driven by a set of external forces and excitations. A dynamic analysis is
also known as a kinetic analysis.
During a dynamic Simulation, Adams Solver solves the full set of nonlinear differential and algebraic equations
(DAEs). You use dynamic analyses with models that have one or more Degrees of Freedom (DOF).

Dyno
A dyno contains a rotational SFORCE and a rotational MOTION. Depending on the mode of the dyno, the
force and the motion are active or deactivated. The two dyno modes are:
 Torque mode - Dyno is modeled with a rotational SFORCE. The rotational MOTION is
deactivated.
 Motion mode - Dyno is modeled with a rotational MOTION on markers. (Learn about Markers.)
The rotational SFORCE is deactivated.
You can give the input function to the dyno as a:
 Harmonic series, specified in a property file or as user-entered values
 Constant value
16 Template based
Entering File Names in Text Boxes

 Curve, specified in a property file

 User-entered function
If you are working in Adams Driveline, the following options are also available for dyno type torque:
 Torque Demand - Defined as an Adams Solver variable
 Throttle Demand - Specified in an engine-map property file

Note: Adams Driveline checks to see if you have two communicators that it must use to
exchange information with the test rig: cis_torque_demand and cis_throttle_demand.
If it doesn't find them, they will be automatically created. These communicators allow
you to get values from the test rig for the throttle signal and the engine torque signal.

You use dynos in a Test Rig to drive your system or to define resistance torques.
The dyno outputs the following results:
 angle - Angular displacement in motion or SFORCE
 angular_velocity - Angular velocity in motion or SFORCE
 angular_acceleration - Angular acceleration in motion or SFORCE
 torque - Resulting torque in motion or SFORCE

Entering File Names in Text Boxes

To enter file names in text boxes, you can do either of the following:
 Enter the file name directly in the text box.
 Clear the text box and then double-click to open a selection window.
 Right-click to either:
• Search a database
• Browse a database

Entering Object Names in Text Boxes

To enter object names in text boxes, you can do either of the following:
 Enter the object name directly in the text box.
 Clear the text box and then double-click to open the Database Navigator.
 Right-click to either:
• Pick an object shown on the screen.
• Browse a complete list of available objects.
• Choose from a product-generated list of guesses.
Appendix 17
Example Dialog Box

Example Dialog Box

Example Model Architecture

The following figure shows how the different files fit together in the model architecture. In the case of a front
suspension assembly with steering, a template uses property files to provide data for components such as
springs, dampers, bushings, and so on.
18 Template based
Fit

Fit
Fit the entire extent of all plot curves on the plot.
Appendix 19
Function Type: Constant

Function Type: Constant

When you set Function Type to Constant, complete the associated text boxes as follows.

For the option: Do the following:

Constant Value Enter a constant value to be used as the dyno function.
Units Displays the unit type (torque or angular velocity) currently applicable for the constant
value input.
Direction Specify if the function should work clockwise or counterclockwise around the z-axis
of the dyno.

Function Type: Curve

When you set Function Type to Curve, complete the associated text boxes as follows.

For the option: Do the following:

File Type Select one of the following:

 Time - The dyno function depends on a 2D spline read from

the file.
 Angle_Velocity - The dyno function depends on a 3D spline
read from the file.
File Name Specify the property file that contains the spline used in the dyno
function. The file extension depends on the file_type (.dti for time, .dav
for angle_velocity).

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

If you set File Type to Time, your template-based product displays the following options (see function
description at the end of the file):
Time Offset Enter the time offset in the current time units.
Direction Specify if the function should work clockwise or counterclockwise
around the z-axis of the dyno.
If you set Dyno Type to Torque, and File Type to Angle_Velocity, your template-based product displays
the following options (see function description at the end of the file):
Angle Offset Enter the angle offset in the current angle units.
Velocity Offset Enter the velocity offset in RPM.
Velocity Ratio Enter the velocity ratio. This ratio is not used for the motion.
Direction Specify if the function should work clockwise or counterclockwise
around the z-axis of the dyno.
20 Template based
Function Type: Curve

For the option: Do the following:

Initial Ramp Up Select this option to smooth the initial application of the dyno torque
using a STEP function.
Ramp Start Time Enter the start time for the STEP function.
Ramp End Time Enter the final time for the STEP function.
Ramp Start Value Enter the starting value of the STEP function.
Ramp End Value Enter the final value of the STEP function.
RPM Smoothing Select this option to use a moving average speed for computing the
current dyno torque.
Revs for Mean RPM Enter the number of revolutions to use in computing the moving average
speed.

File Type = Time

The torque function is an akima spline function:
direction * AKISPL(time + time_offset, 0, spline, 0)
The motion velocity function is a cubic spline function:
direction * CUBSPL(time + time_offset, 0, spline, 0)

File Type = Angle_Velocity

If the Dyno Type is Torque, the torque function is an akima spline function:
direction * AKISPL(MOD(AZ + angle_offset, 720d), WZ *
velocity_ratio + velocity_offset, spline)
where:
 AZ is the magnitude of the angular displacement between the i and j marker of the dyno
 WZ is the magnitude of the angular velocity between the i and j marker of the dyno
 MOD() is the remainder of the angle expression when divided by 720d
If Initial Ramp Up is selected, the above function is multiplied by a STEP function:
step(time, ramp_start_time, ramp_start_value, ramp_end_time,
ramp_end_value)
Appendix 21
Function Type: Series

If RPM Smoothing is selected, the WZ function above is replaced with a moving average of the angular
velocity:
(Crank angle - delay(crank angle, delta_time) - 0.001) / (time -
delay(time, delta_time, -0.001))
Note that because of the DELAY function, RPM Smoothing can only be used with Adams Solver (C++).
If the Dyno Type is Motion - Velocity, the velocity function is a cubic spline function:
direction * CUBSPL( MOD( velocity * time + angle_offset, 720d),
velocity_offset, spline)
where, velocity is ABS(velocity_offset).
Note that the Initial Ramp Up and RPM Smoothing are not applicable for Motion - Velocity dynos.

Function Type: Series

When you set Function Type to Series, complete the associated text boxes as shown in the table.
The Series function is:
direction*(mean_value- i=0n(magnitude[i]*sin(order[i]
*order_tracking+phase_shift[i])))
where order_tracking is angle_multiplier*ABS(AZ(i, j))
22 Template based
Function Type: Series

For the option: Do the following:

Input Type Select one of the following:

 Property File - Adams Engine takes the values for the Fourier
Sine series from a property file.
 User-Entered - Enter the values for the Fourier Sine series.
If you set Input Type to Property File, Adams Engine displays the following options:
Harmonic Series File Specify the property file that contains the function series data for the
dyno. The file contains the information needed to specify a Fourier Sine
series (mean value, order numbers, magnitudes, phase shift values, and
an angle multiplier).

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.

Direction Specify if the function should work clockwise or counterclockwise
around the z-axis of the dyno.
If you set Input Type to User-Entered, Adams Engine displays the following options:
Harmonic Series File (optional) Enter the name of a new or existing property file.

When you specify a file name, Adams Engine displays the database path
that it will use to save the file. Adams Engine always saves a file in the
default writable database.
Mean Value Enter the mean value of the Fourier Series.
Order, Magnitude & Phase Shift Select to display the curve editor, where you can specity the order
number, magnitude, and phase.
Order Number Enter the order numbers that should be used in the Fourier Series.
Magnitude Enter the magnitude for each order of the Fourier Series. The number
of entries should match the number of entries in the Order Number
text box.
Phase Shift Enter the phase shift for each order of the Fourier Series. The number
of entries should match the number of entries in the Order Number
text box.
Angle Multiplier This number is multiplied to the angle-measurement variable, and will
therefore scale the angle input to the function. For example: If you
measured the torque at the alternator pulley versus crankshaft angle,
you must enter the ratio between the pulley pitch diameters.
Direction Specify if the function should work clockwise or counterclockwise
around the z-axis of the dyno.
Appendix 23
Function Type: Throttle Demand

Function Type: Throttle Demand

When you set Function Type to Throttle Demand, complete the associated text box as follows.

For the option: Do the following:

Engine Map File Specify the engine-map property file in the database. In this file you can save engine
characteristics as a function of engine rpm and throttle. You can modify this file in the
Standard Interface.

See the Engine Map Property File example.

Function Type: User-Entered

When you set Function Type to User-Entered, complete the associated text box as follows.

For the option: Do the following:

User-Entered Function Enter a function for the dyno by entering the function directly in the text box,
or by right-clicking and selecting Function Builder. Learn about the Function
Builder.
The following applies only for velocity motion.
Mean Value You can use the mean velocity of the dyno to parameterize the initial value of a
(optional) solver variable measuring the dyno velocity. For example, the initial value of the
angular velocity solver variable used by a gas force is parameterized to the mean
value of the test rig dyno to enable the gas force to be calculated during static
analysis.

Gear
A gear can be either straight or helical. It consists of one part constrained with either a fixed or revolute joint.
Optionally, you can use a torsional spring-damper SFORCE in parallel with the revolute joint. You can
connect two gears with a three-phase gear force element.
24 Template based
Gear Property File

Schematic Representation of Gear Gear Geomery

The element outputs the following results:

 joint_force - Force magnitude in the revolute or fixed joint.
 angle - Rotational displacement relative to the attachment part. Active only if the gear is not fixed.
 velocity - Angular velocity relative to the attachment part. Active only if the gear is not fixed.
 acceleration - Angular acceleration relative to the attachment part. Active only if the gear is not fixed.
 torque - Torque in the torsional spring-damper SFORCE. Active only if the gear is not fixed and the
torsional spring-damper SFORCE is activated.

Gear Property File

The following example property file contains gear information.
$-------------------------------------------MDI_HEADER
[MDI_HEADER]
FILE_TYPE = 'gea'
FILE_VERSION = 2.0
FILE_FORMAT = 'ASCII'
HEADER_SIZE = 6
$-------------------------------------------UNITS
[UNITS]
LENGTH = 'mm'
ANGLE = 'degrees'
FORCE = 'newton'
MASS = 'kg'
TIME = 'millisecond'
$-------------------------------------------GENERAL
[GENERAL]
DEFINITION = '.[Link].ac_gear'
TEETH_NUMBER = 33
WIDTH = 20.0
TOOTH_ANGLE = 20.0
DELTA_TOOTH_THICKNESS = -0.1
MODULE = 4.0
Appendix 25
Generating a Subsystem

ADDENDUM_MOD_COEFF = 0.0
ADDENDUM_FACTOR = 1.0
DEDENDUM_FACTOR = 1.25
HELIX_ANGLE = 0.0
MASS = 2.135099001
CM_LOCATION_FROM_PART_X = 0.0
CM_LOCATION_FROM_PART_Y = 0.0
CM_LOCATION_FROM_PART_Z = 0.0
IXX = 2396.292778791
IYY = 2396.292778791
IZZ = 4650.2456241819
IXY = 0.0
IZX = 0.0
IYZ = 0.0
$-------------------------------------------TORSIONAL_SPRING
[TORSIONAL_SPRING]
TORSIONAL_STIFFNESS = 200.0
TORSIONAL_DAMPING = 20.0
Copyright © 2002, FEV Motorentechnik GmbH. All rights reserved.

Generating a Subsystem
In this example from Adams Car, you could use a subsystem file to transform the left-hand-drive vehicle to a
right-hand-drive vehicle by modifying the hardpoint locations at each point in the steering column.
26 Template based
Generic

Generating a Subsystem

Generic
Adams Engine displays the following pull-down menu when the major role of a template is not
single_valve_train, cam_shaft, cylinder_head, or timing_mechanism; for example, if it is a component template.
Learn about Building Models.

For the option: Do the following:

Minor Role If you set minor role to any, Adams Engine connects your new subsystem to any other
subsystem in the assembly having matching communicators. Learn about
Communicators.

Note that for each major role, Adams Engine allows only one subsystem in an assembly
with the minor role any.
Appendix 27
Hotpoints

Hotpoints
Small squares that appear on geometric elements and plot Curve when selected.

Installed Length
When you select the install method Installed Length, you directly specify what the length of the spring is for
the given design positions of the I and J coordinate references.

For a linear spring:

Because the distance between the I and J coordinate references differs from the installed length, your
template-based product calculates an offset distance to use in the force equation:
Free_Length - Installed_Length = OffsetCalc - dmCalc
OffsetCalc = Free_Length - Installed_Length + dmCalc
where dmCalc is the distance magnitude between the I and the J coordinates at the design configuration.
Your template-based product (using the Adams Solver SPRINGDAMPER statement) calculates the spring force as
follows:
Spring Force = - K*(DM(I,J) - OffsetCalc)

For a nonlinear spring:

For nonlinear springs, the force in your template-based product is expressed using the Akima spline
interpolation of a force versus spring deflection or spring length. Because the distance between the I and J
coordinate references differs from the installed length, your template-based product calculates an offset
distance to use in the force equation:
Your template-based product, using the Adams Solver SFORCE statement, calculates the nonlinear spring force
as follows:
 When using a force versus deflection characteristic:
OffsetCalc = Free_Length - Installed_Length + dmCalc
Spring Force = AKISPL(OffsetCalc - DM(I, J), 0, Spline)
 When using a force versus length characteristic:
OffsetCalc = Installed_Length - dmCalc
Spring Force = AKISPL(OffsetCalc + DM(I, J), 0, Spline)

Interactive Simulation
A simulation that uses the external Adams Solver.

Kinematic Analysis
A kinematic analysis uses constraints, such as translational and revolute joints, to define the attachments
between the parts.
28 Template based
List of Variable Values for MDI_ACAR_ANL_LOG*

A kinematic analysis enables you to determine the range of values for the displacement, velocity, and
acceleration of any point of interest in the model, independent of forces applied to it. During a kinematic
Simulation, Adams Solver solves only the reduced set of algebraic equations. This type of analysis, therefore, is
only available for models with zero Degrees of Freedom.
If you specify the mass and inertia properties of bodies in your model, a kinematic analysis also calculates the
corresponding applied and reaction forces required to generate the prescribed motions.

List of Variable Values for MDI_ACAR_ANL_LOG*

assembly general_splines property_files

aforces general_variables reboundstops
bumpstops hardpoints subsystem_all
bushings interface_parts switch_parts
dampers model testrig
flexible_bodies nrods user_entities
friction nsprings wheels
gears parts
general_parameters parameters

Main Window
Your product's window in which you build and simulate assemblies.

Memory
Toggle the visibility of the memory curve of the current data curve.

Mode of Simulation: Background

Your template-based product's Adams Solver executable runs in an external shell window and the main window
remains active. Therefore, you can continue working because the shell process is completely stand-alone and
independent.
When you run background Simulations, your template-based product does not read in the results after it
completes the simulation. To read in the results, select Review -> Analysis Management -> Read.
Appendix 29
Mode of Simulation: Event_only

Mode of Simulation: Event_only

Your template-based Adams Car product only create an instance of event, but does not perform an analysis.
In Adams Car, you can use the event_only option to create an instance of event that you can modify/run in
the event browser.

Mode of Simulation: Files_only

Your template-based product only outputs the analysis files, .adm File and .acf File, but does not perform an
Analysis.
In Adams Car, you can use the files_only option to prepare files for use with Adams Controls. If you loaded
Adams Controls (Tools -> Plugins -> Controls -> Load), and your model has plant input and output, Adams
Car will prepare a MATLAB 'm' file and a special .acf file. If you have more than one plant input and output,
Adams Car prompts you to select which one you want to see.

Mode of Simulation: Interactive

Your template-based product submits an Interactive Simulation to Adams Solver. Adams Solver displays messages
in the Message window.
The interface is locked until the simulation is done.

Modifying Curves
You can modify a curve by:

 Selecting the Vertical Hotpoints tool and then dragging the hotpoints to the desired location on
the force-displacement plane. Modifying a curve by dragging hotpoints might be a good solution for
initial studies.
 Entering horizontal and vertical data in tabular form. To enter data in tabular form, you must switch
to the Table Editor: View -> Table. In the Table Editor, you can enter a set of vertical and
horizontal values.
 Entering a slope for a linear curve by filling in the options described for each type of component.

Modifying requests to remove component function

To remove a request component:
1. For the component you want to remove, F2-F4 or F6-F8, enter (none) in the corresponding text box.
When you enter (none) the text box turns yellow. Disregard this error indicator.
2. Clear the text for the corresponding component name, X-Z or R1-R3.
30 Template based
Options for Joint

3. Select OK.
4. Select Try to Execute in response to the message you receive.
See Example Dialog Box.

Options for Joint

You can enter a joint from the following classes of joints:
 Revolute - Your template-based product sets the Type of Freedom option to rotational and disables
it. The Single-Component Force will be a rotational force that acts between the two bodies that the
revolute joints connect.
 Translational - Your template-based product sets the Type of Freedom option to translational and
disables it. The single-component force will be a translational force that acts between the two bodies
that the translational joints connect.
 Cylindrical - Leaves the Type of Freedom option enabled, so you can select to create a revolute or
translational single-component force.

Origo Reference Frame

A reference frame that belongs to ground and expresses locations and orientations.

Output Steps
The number of output steps represents the resolution of the Analysis results. For example, if you run a 10-
second analysis with 100 output steps, you would expect to see 10 data points per second. This is equivalent
to sampling data at 10 Hz and the spacing between the points being 100 ms.
To achieve greater granularity of data, you should increase the number of output steps. You would typically
do this to capture a specific event, such as the impact of a timing chain with a gear. The higher the output
step size, the larger the output file and memory use.
Output Steps Example for Adams Car.

Output Steps Example for Adams Car

Adams Car calculates the total number of output steps as total_end_time/output_step_size. It then writes the
number of steps to the event file (.xml) (learn about Working with Event Files (.xml)). The output step size
parameter will be between 0.05 and the value resulting from dividing the end time by the number of steps.
If the number of output steps per second is less than 20, Adams Car issues a warning.

PSD
The vibration actuator PSD is defined using a spline function. You can specify either a force PSD or a
displacement PSD. For the displacement PSD, you can also specify a corresponding stiffness. It is assumed
that the PSD inputs applied to the linear model are not correlated to one another.
Appendix 31
Plot for Step Function

Note that you cannot combine vibration actuators of the non-PSD type with PSD-type vibration actuators
in the same vibration Analysis.

Plot for Step Function

32 Template based
Preload

Preload
The spring force definition depends on the type of spring and the installation method. Springs may be
defined as either linear or nonlinear, and the installation methods vary accordingly.

dmCalc is the distance magnitude between the I and the J coordinates at the design configuration.

For a linear spring:

Spring Force = k * (DM(I,J) - OffsetCalc) + Preload
There are two installation methods, and OffsetCalc depends on which is chosen:
 Preload
• Preload = user specified force
• OffsetCalc = dmCalc
 Installed Length
• Preload = 0.0
• Installed_Length = user specified length
• OffsetCalc = Free_Length - Installed_Length + dmCalc

For a nonlinear spring:

For nonlinear springs, the force in your template-based product is expressed using Akima spline interpolation
of force versus spring deflection or spring length. Because the distance between the I and J coordinate
references differs from the installed length, your template-based product calculates an offset distance to use
in the force equation:
Appendix 33
Product Abbreviations

 Force vs. deflection (TeimOrbit and XML property files)

• Spring Force = AKISPL(OffsetCalc - DM(I, J), 0, Spline)
• OffsetCalc = Free_Length - Installed_Length + dmCalc
 Force vs. length (XML property files only)
• Spring Force = AKISPL(OffsetCalc + DM(I, J), 0, Spline)
• OffsetCalc = Installed_Length - dmCalc
There are three installation methods, and OffsetCalc depends on which is chosen:
 Preload
• Installed_Length = calculated by interpolating the Spline
 Installed Length
• Installed_Length = user specified length
 Use Hardpoints
• Installed_Length = dmCalc

Product Abbreviations
The product abbreviations are:

Adams View aview

Adams Car acar
Adams Driveline adriveline

Property File Editor

You use the Property File Editor to define and modify curves and other parameters for XML-based property
files. See XML File Format.

To display the Property File Editor, select when modifying an XML-based property file.

You can open bushing, spring, bumpstops, reboundstop, and damper XML-based property files. Example
XML property files are distributed in the acar_shared database.

Push Button
Push buttons contain entries or execute commands only for those entities that exist in the template. Your
template-based product adds push buttons to the template's custom interface. Learn about Customizing Your
Product.
34 Template based
Recording Comments

You can place the custom push buttons under the Adjust menu in the Standard Interface, or under previously
created custom menus by selecting the desired parent menu. Learn about the Standard Interface.

Recording Comments
Your template-based product records the comments as follows:

For the entity type: Comments recorded in:

For the entity type: Comments recorded in:
Analysis Analysis files
Assembly Assembly file
Subsystem Subsystem file
Template Template file
Modeling entity (such as Hardpoints and Construction If comment created in:
Frames)
 Standard Interface - Subsystem file
 Template Builder - Template file

Reference Marker
A reference marker is a marker that defines the location and orientation of a component.

Rotating Mass
A rotating mass applies a frequency-dependent force. This actuator represents the force due to a rotating mass
located at a specified offset from an axis of rotation. The axis of rotation is defined by the input channel to
which this vibrational actuator is applied.
2
f(ω) = m ⋅ ω ⋅ r
where:

 ω is the frequency
 f ( ω ) is the unbalanced mass forcing function
 m is the unbalanced mass
 r is the radial distance of the unbalanced mass from the axis of rotation
Similarly, a rotating mass placed at a distance offset along the axis of rotation results in an unbalanced
moment.
2
t(ω) = m ⋅ ω ⋅ r ⋅ d
Appendix 35
Shared Dialog Box

where:

 t ( ω ) is the moment due to unbalanced mass with offset

 d is the distance of the unbalanced mass perpendicular to the plane

Shared Dialog Box

Several Adams products, known as template-based products, share this dialog box.

Simulation
A simulation is the real-time Adams Solver process of solving the equations of motions for a multibody system.

Simulation Script
Your template-based product automatically creates a simulation script when you run a Simulation. The
simulation script is different for different types of analyses (see Analysis).
By default, the last simulation that you ran creates a simulation script named Last_Sim, which you should
not use. Use the simulation named simulation_script.

Single Valvetrain
Adams Engine displays the following pull-down menus when the major role of the template is
single_valve_train.

For the option: Do the following:

Cam Shaft Specify the camshaft to which the single valvetrain should belong.
Intake #/ Exhaust # Specify if the single valvetrain should be Intake or Exhaust, and specify what number
it should be.
Cylinder Specify the cylinder to which the single valvetrain should belong.

Single-Component Force
A single-component force applies a translational vector force at a single point of application on a part and
ground (action-only force), or between two parts along the line of sight.

Solution Steps
The number of solution steps defines the granularity of the results. This is equivalent to running a test in the
real world and monitoring the changes of a system at fixed time intervals. The number of steps is the number
of solution steps from a lower bound to an upper bound.
36 Template based
Solver Variable

We recommend that you use more than five steps.

Solver Variable
A solver variable is a data element algebraic variable.

Spline
A spline is a data element that is defined by discrete numerical data.

Spline Check and Repair

The Spline Check and Repair tool allows you to check the quality of the splines that are used to define the
stiffness and damping of the following components:
 Bushings
 Springs
 Dampers
 Bumpstops
 Reboundstops
Several spline defects can be detected and repaired automatically. The tool checks for these common errors,
and repairs them if desired. The check and repair operations may be performed on a single spline, an entity
type (for example, ac_bushing), a subsystem, an assembly, or an entire database. The user can choose to
perform any one or more of the following checks:
 Symmetry
 Zero Crossing
 Evenly Spaced Data
 Minimum Slope
 Curve Monotony
 Slope Monotony

Symmetry
When this check is performed, the spline(s) will be examined for symmetry about the specified origin, where
the default is (0, 0). If asymmetry is detected and the repair option is selected, the quadrant with the greater
number of values will be mirrored to the quadrant having the smaller number.

Zero Crossing
This checks whether the curve passes through the origin (0, 0). This is useful, for example, because a spring
or damping curve that does not pass through (0, 0) has the effect of a preload force. If the curve fails this
Appendix 37
Spline Comparison

check and the repair option is selected, then a (0, 0) point is added, unless there is a (0, Y) data point, in
which case the Y value is set to 0.

Evenly Spaced Data

This checks whether the curve's abscissa is evenly spaced. This may be important because the Akima spline
interpolation (AKISPL) works best on evenly spaced data. If the curve fails this check and the repair option is
selected, then the curve will be resampled. The new sampling rate is determined using either the smallest
interval of the existing data points or by the specified number of points.

Minimum Slope
This checks whether a minimum slope value is maintained. One can hereby detect constant values of the Y-
axis. If the curve fails this check and the repair option is selected, then the user will be warned and prompted
to manually modify the spline manually. If the Minimum Slope check is selected, the following monotony
checks are not available, since they are guaranteed to pass if the spline meets the minimum slope criterion.

Curve Monotony
This check is intended to ensure a monotonically consistent (always increasing or decreasing) curve. This is
useful, for example, because a damping curve with an inconsistent slope may lead to a self-exciting system. If
the curve fails this check and the repair option is selected, then the user is warned and prompted to repair this
manually.

Slope Monotony
This check is performed on the spline derivative. It is intended to ensure a monotonically consistent (always
increasing or decreasing) slope. If the curve fails this check and the repair option is selected, then a user-
specified filter will be applied to the spline in attempt to smooth the data.

In the Standard Interface, to use the Spline Check and Repair tool:
1. From the Tools menu, select Spline Check/Repair.
2. Press F1 and then follow the instructions in the dialog help for Spline Check and Repair.
3. Select OK.

Spline Comparison
The Spline Comparison tool allows you to plot data element splines loaded in session or from property files.
You can select two splines to plot simultaneously, and view the data in plot form, tabular form, or both. When
selecting a spline loaded in session, you may select any 2D or 3D spline. When selecting a spline from a
property file, you can only select property files pertaining to the following components:
 Bushings
38 Template based
Spline Gear Force

 Springs
 Dampers
 Bumpstops
 Reboundstops

In the Standard Interface, to compare two splines:

1. From the Tools menu, select Spline Comparison.
2. Press F1 and then follow the instructions in the dialog help for Spline Comparison.
3. Select Close.

Note: The Spline Comparison dialog box does not allow you to edit the spline data. To edit the data,
use the Curve Manager or Property File Editor.

Spline Gear Force

The spline gear force represents a force that couples two gear elements. The force is computed at the pitch
circle considering the pressure (tooth) angle, as well as the helix angle. This force is then resolved to the
appropriate forces and moments applied at the center of one gear, with the reaction force applied at the other
gear.
The contact force formulation is based on the oilfilm thickness theory. See Contact Force Formulation Based on
Oilfilm Thickness Theory.
The structural stiffness is obtained from a spline depending on the relative position of the gears. The spline
is contained in the stiffness property file. The stiffness should be expressed over one pitch, such that the pitch
value ranges from 0 to 1. This represents the most generic implementation to consider the change of
structural stiffness due to the number of teeth in contact and the profile.
The gear force lets you model gear interaction with backlash. When creating the gear force, the gears are
rotated automatically to ensure proper meshing of the gears. In addition to the GFORCE, your template-
based product creates an inplane joint primitive at the idealized point of contact with its normal tangential
to the pitch circle. The inplane joint primitive is only active during the initial condition Analysis phase of a
Simulation. This will ensure that the initial conditions (displacement, velocity, and accelerations) of the gears
are calculated appropriately.
This component allows you to model helical and spur gear forces, where the centers of the gears are not fixed
in space and the mesh frequency is considered. In addition to the 2D gear force component, this component
will consider the tilting of gears.
The component outputs the following results:
 total_force - Total force, same as normal_force since friction is not included in the gear force.
 normal_force - Resulting force normal to the gear tooth surface.
 tangential_force - Resulting force tangential to the gear pitch circle.
 axial_force - Resulting force in axial direction, zero if gears are straight.
Appendix 39
Static Analysis

 torque_g1 - Resulting torque applied to Gear 1 at the i-marker location.

 torque_g2 - Resulting torque applied to Gear 2 at the j-marker location.

Static Analysis
A static analysis attempts to find a configuration for the parts in your model for which all the forces balance.
This configuration is often referred to as an equilibrium configuration. Velocities and accelerations are set to
zero for static analyses, so inertial forces are not taken into consideration. A static analysis is for use with
models that have one or more Degrees of Freedom.

Status Bar
A line at the bottom of the Main Window that displays information about the element your cursor is currently
on, the action you should perform, or an error message.

Summary of Location Dependency Options

Learn about Summary of Orientation Dependency Options.

Option name: Option role:

Delta location from coordinate Used when a fixed value of x, y, and z in the global coordinate system
can be used to position the construction frame a fixed distance from a
known position.
Centered between coordinates Places the construction frame at the midpoint formed by a number of
points. You can define up to four points.
Located along an axis Places a new construction frame at a distance x, away from an existing
construction frame, along any of the three orthogonal axes defined by
the existing construction frame.
Located on a line Places the construction frame at a position along an axis that two points
define. You can set a percentage between 0 and 150%, where 0% is at
the first point location, and 150% is beyond both points 1 and 2, but
still on the axis they define.
Location input communicator Places the construction frame at a point that an input communicator
defines.
Located at flexible body node Places the construction frame at a node ID as defined during the
creation of the flexible body.

Summary of Orientation Dependency Options

Learn about Summary of Location Dependency Options.
40 Template based
Swept Sine

Option name: Option role:

Delta orientation from coordinate Defines a rotation about an already existing construction frame
using the default orientation system, typically
Euler 313.
Parallel to axis Aligns an axis on the new entity with a defined axis on an
already existing construction frame.
Oriented in plane Aligns a plane, zx or xz, of the new construction frame to lie in
the plane that points 1, 2, and 3 define. For zx, the z-axis points
from point 1 to point 2. The x-axis points from point 1 to point
3.
Orient to zpoint - xpoint Aligns the first axis, either z or x, from the current location to a
first point in space, and then the plane, zx or xz, to be defined
by a second point.
Orient axis along line Aligns a chosen axis, z or x, to point from one line to a another
line.
Orient axis to point Aligns a chosen axis, z or x, to point from one point to a
another point.
User-entered values You specify either Euler angles or direction vectors.
Orientation input communicator Orients the construction frame along an axis that an input
communicator defines.
Toe/Camber (Adams Car only) Orients a construction frame based on a pair of parameter
variables or communicators. The parameter variable and
communicator pair should contain the values for static toe and
camber. The resulting orientation represents the
spin-axis of the tires with positive-z pointing outboard and
positive-x pointing toward the aft of the vehicle.

Swept Sine
Swept sine defines a constant amplitude sine function being applied to the model. The amplitude of the sine
function and the starting phase angle are required.
f( ) = F . [cos( ) + j . sin( )]
where:
 f - Forcing function
 F - Magnitude of the force
 - Phase angle
 - Frequency
Appendix 41
Switch Part Example for Adams Car

Switch Part Example for Adams Car

For example, in an Adams Car suspension template, you may want to connect the drop-link of an anti-roll
bar (stabar) to either a suspension A-arm or the suspension upright (a damper in the context of a MacPherson
strut). In this case, you would connect a spherical joint between the end of the drop-link and A-arm or
suspension upright. By connecting either the I or J marker of the spherical joint to a switch part and adding
A-arm and upright to the parts list of the switch part, you enable the drop-link to be connected to either the
A-arm or the upright. Learn about Markers.

Target Database
A target Database is a writable database to which the assembly files will be published.

TeimOrbit File Format

The TeimOrbit file format is an ASCII format, which is traditionally used in Adams vertical applications. It
consists of a structured file format containing various blocks of information used to describe attributes, such
as file version, units data, data description, and linear/nonlinear data.

Test Rig
A test rig is a model designed to control an Analysis.
Note that creating your own test rig is not a trivial task, and should only be done by the very experienced user.

Three-Phase Gear Force

The three-phase gear force represents a force coupling two gear elements. The force is computed at the pitch
circle considering the pressure (tooth) angle, as well as the helix angle. This force is then resolved to the
appropriate forces and moments applied at the center of one gear, with the reaction force applied at the other
gear. See Contact Force Formulation Based on Oilfilm Thickness Theory for more information.
The gear force lets you model gear interaction with backlash. When creating the gear force, the gears are
rotated automatically to ensure proper meshing of the gears. In addition to the GFORCE, your template-
based product creates an inplane joint primitive at the idealized point of contact with its normal tangential
to the pitch circle. The inplane joint primitive is only active during the initial condition Analysis phase of a
Simulation. This will ensure that the initial conditions (displacement, velocity, and accelerations) of the gears
are calculated appropriately.
This component allows you to model helical and spur gear forces, where the centers of the gears are not fixed
in space and the mesh frequency is considered.
The component outputs the following results:
 total_force - Total force, same as normal_force since friction is not included in the gear force.
 normal_force - Resulting force normal to the gear tooth surface.
 tangential_force - Resulting force tangential to the gear pitch circle.
42 Template based
Timing Mechanism

 axial_force - Resulting force in axial direction, zero if gears are straight.

 torque_g1 - Resulting torque applied to Gear 1 at the i-marker location.
 torque_g2 - Resulting torque applied to Gear 2 at the j-marker location.

Timing Mechanism
Adams Engine displays the following pull-down menu when the major role of the template is
timing_mechanism. Learn about Building Models.

For the option: Do the following:

Timing Mechanism Specify the timing mechanism in the assembly for which the subsystem should be
used.

Toe and Camber

You can orient an entity (such as a wheel) according to toe and camber values obtained from Parameter Variables
or input Communicators.
Generally, the toe and camber define the global orientation of the wheel-spin axis.
When the toe and camber angles are zero, the entity will have its:
 z-axis pointing away from the line of symmetry (in terms of an automobile, out from the car)
 x-axis aligned with the global x (towards the rear of the car)
 y-axis defined by the right-hand rule
Toe angle is positive when the front of the wheel toes in, that is, it points inward, toward the vehicle center
line. Camber angle is positive when the top of the wheel tilts outward, away from the vehicle center line.

Toggle Kinematic Mode - Example Application

A typical example would be the lower control arm of a suspension subsystem. We could constrain this part
to the vehicle body in two ways:
 Kinematic constraint - Allows the control arm to rotate about a fixed axis (similar in concept to a
door swinging on its hinge; its only Degrees of Freedom is rotation about a direction which is
constrained by the physical location of the hinges).
 Compliant constraint - Allows the control arm to move in all directions based on a force-
displacement relationship in all six degrees of freedom.
If we used the kinematic and the compliant constraints at the same time, we would see no force components
in either the x, y, or z directions and only a torque in one of the rotational directions (typically the z-axis is
used to define the rotational axis; for example, the z-axis would point from one door hinge to the other door
hinge). The reason there is no force component is because the kinematic constraint (revolute joint) removes
the ability of the bushing to be deformed. In most cases, using the two constraints at the same time is
Appendix 43
Toggle Visibility

pointless. Typically we are either interested in the motion of the mechanism (Kinematic Analysis) or the
compliance of the system (compliant analysis).

Toggle Visibility
Toggle visibility of hotpoints for current data curve.

Tooth Stiffness Property File

The property file contains a translational stiffness expressed in force/length over one pitch. The stiffness
represents the structural stiffness of all teeth in contact at a given relative position of the gears. The values for
the pitch are relative to one full pitch, such that a range of 0 to 1 is required.

Types of Joints
You can use several types of joints, as follows:

translational revolute cylindrical spherical

planar fixed inline inplane
orientation parallel axes perpendicular convel
hooke/universal

Learn about Joints.

Setting the orientation of translational, revolute, cylindrical, planar, inline, inplane, orientation, and parallel
axes joints.
When you select translational, revolute, cylindrical, planar, inline, inplane, orientation, or parallel axes, your
template-based product displays the following option:
44 Template based
Types of Joints

For the option: Do the following:

Orientation Dependency Select one of the following:

 Delta Orientation From Coordinate

 Parallel To Axis
 Oriented In Plane
 Orient To Zpoint-Xpoint
 Orient Axis Along Line
 Orient Axis To Point
 User entered values
 Orientation Input Communicator
 Toe/Camber

Setting the orientation of spherical joints

When you select spherical, your template-based product displays the following option:

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
Orientation Select one of the following:

 None
 Using Two Axes
If you set Orientation to Using Two Axes, your template-based product enables the following options:
I-Part Axis Enter a Coordinate Reference to define the direction of the I-part axis, which will be
from the location coordinate reference to the coordinate reference you enter in this
field.
J-Part Axis Enter a Coordinate Reference to define the direction of the J-part axis, which will be
from the location coordinate reference to the coordinate reference you enter in this
field.

Setting the orientation of perpendicular, convel, and hooke/universal joints

When you select perpendicular, convel, hooke, or universal your template-based product displays the
following options:
Appendix 45
Types of Joints

For the option: Do the following:

Tips on Entering Object Names in Text Boxes.
I-Part Axis Enter a Coordinate Reference to define the direction of the I-part axis, which will be from
the location coordinate reference to the coordinate reference you enter in this field.
J-Part Axis Enter a Coordinate Reference to define the direction of the J-part axis, which will be from
the location coordinate reference to the coordinate reference you enter in this field.
46 Template based
Use Hardpoints

Notes: For perpendicular joints it is recommended that I-part construction frame Z-axis and J-part
construction frame Z-axis be perpendicular to each other.

Hooke and Universal joints represent the same idealized constraint. The difference is how the
axes of the joint are defined:

For a Hooke joint (as well as a Convel, or constant velocity joint), choose Coordinate
References that are offset from the location reference, along the spin axes of the I and J parts.

For a Universal joint, choose Coordinate References that are offset from the location reference,
along two vectors orthogonal to the spin axes of the I and J parts. Note that the Universal joint
icon may not appear as pictured above, but the joint will constrain the proper DOF if set up
correctly.

Use Hardpoints
When you select the install method Installed Length, you directly specify what the length of the spring is for
the given design positions of the I and J coordinate references.
Appendix 47
Use Hardpoints

When you select the install method Use Hardpoints:

 The length of the spring is the distance between the spring's I and J coordinate references (DM(I,J)).
 The spring deflection at the input position is the spring's free length minus the distance between the
I and J coordinate references.

For a linear spring:

Your template-based product, using the Adams Solver SPRINGDAMPER statement, calculates the spring force as
follows:
Spring Force = - K*(DM(I,J) - Free_Length)

Note: When you look at the ac_spring UDE definition in the Database Navigator, you will notice
an OffsetCalc variable. In the equation above, OffsetCalc = Free_Length.

For a nonlinear spring:

For nonlinear springs, the force in your template-based product is expressed using the Akima spline
interpolation of a force versus spring deflection or spring length. Because the distance between the I and J
coordinate references equals the installed length, OffsetCalc equals the free length:
Your template-based product, using the Adams Solver SFORCE statement, calculates the nonlinear spring force
as follows:
 When using a force versus deflection characteristic:
OffsetCalc = Free_Length
Spring Force = AKISPL(OffsetCalc - DM(I, J), 0, Spline)
 When using a force versus length characteristic:
OffsetCalc = 0
Spring Force = AKISPL(OffsetCalc + DM(I, J), 0, Spline)
48 Template based
User

User
You can define any function of the independent variable omega:
f( ) = g( )
where:
 is the frequency
 g( ) is the general function of omega
Being able to create your own function based on standard Adams functions is very useful when the required
function is not provided by Swept Sine, Rotating Mass, or PSD.

Vertical Hotpoints
Hotpoints are small squares that appear on plot curves when selected. You can modify the loaded curve by
dragging its hotpoints vertically.

To display hotpoints on a curve, select the Vertical Hotpoints tool .

Vibration Input Channel

A driver in the model, providing stimulus for the vibration Analysis.

Vibration Output Channel

Instrumentation on the model that records some quantity of interest.

Wheel-Envelope Property File

A wheel-envelope property file defines a wheel travel - steer travel relationship.

XML File Format

The XML file format is an established industry standard data format used in many Web applications. You
can open .xml files using an appropriate Web browser and view their contents in a tree-like structure.

A note regarding units

In xml files, units are usually defined in a block at the beginning of the file. The units are displayed in Header
tab if the .xml file is opened in Property File Editor as illustrated below. Adams Car considers the units block
and does the necessary conversions when it writes the .adm file.
<afc:Units>
<afc:UnitSetting name="angle" current="deg" />
Appendix 49
XML File Format

<afc:UnitSetting name="current" current="ampere" />

<afc:UnitSetting name="force" current="newton" />
<afc:UnitSetting name="length" current="mm" />
<afc:UnitSetting name="luminosity" current="candela" />
<afc:UnitSetting name="mass" current="kilogram" />
<afc:UnitSetting name="quantity" current="mole" />
<afc:UnitSetting name="solidAngle" current="steradian" />
<afc:UnitSetting name="temperature" current="kelvin" />
<afc:UnitSetting name="time" current="second" />
</afc:Units>

Note in some of .xml files such as bushing property files each individual spline curve may also have a unit tag
such as "xUnit" and "yUnit". These tags are used for the labels in the Curve Editor, but are not used for any
conversion in Adams Car.

<ConnectorBushingProperties active="true" shape="cylindrical" radius="30" height="80">

<ConnectorDirectionComponent name="x" active="true">
<ConnectorStiffness name="stiffness" active="true" type="spline">
<ConnectorLinearData name="linear_data" active="true" rate="0" />
<ConnectorSplineData name="spline_data" id="0" active="true"
interpolation_method="akima" xUnit="mm" yUnit="N">
<![CDATA[
-10 -45000
-8 -36000
-6 -27000...
50 Template based
Zoom In

Zoom In
Zoom in on an area of a displayed plot by using your pointer to draw a box.

Adams 2021 Getting Started Using Adams Explore
No ratings yet
Adams 2021 Getting Started Using Adams Explore
86 pages
View Dbox Help
No ratings yet
View Dbox Help
540 pages
Adams 2020 FP1 Adams View Function Builder User Guide
No ratings yet
Adams 2020 FP1 Adams View Function Builder User Guide
726 pages
View Dbox Help
No ratings yet
View Dbox Help
608 pages
Adams 2022.3 Getting Started Using Adams View
No ratings yet
Adams 2022.3 Getting Started Using Adams View
72 pages
Adams 2021.3 Getting Started Using Adams Controls
No ratings yet
Adams 2021.3 Getting Started Using Adams Controls
110 pages
Adams 2020 Adams View Command User Guide
No ratings yet
Adams 2020 Adams View Command User Guide
2,184 pages
Adams 2020 Getting Started Using Adams Vibration
No ratings yet
Adams 2020 Getting Started Using Adams Vibration
46 pages
Adams 2020 Getting Started Using Adams Car
No ratings yet
Adams 2020 Getting Started Using Adams Car
120 pages
Getting Started Using Adams/Car - MD Adams 2010
No ratings yet
Getting Started Using Adams/Car - MD Adams 2010
140 pages
Getting Started with Adams/Driveline
No ratings yet
Getting Started with Adams/Driveline
10 pages
Adams 2023.2 Adams Insight User Guide
No ratings yet
Adams 2023.2 Adams Insight User Guide
174 pages
Release Notes MD Adams 2010
No ratings yet
Release Notes MD Adams 2010
110 pages
Adams 2020 Adams Vibration User Guide
No ratings yet
Adams 2020 Adams Vibration User Guide
164 pages
Adams 2017.2 Training 740 Workbook
No ratings yet
Adams 2017.2 Training 740 Workbook
570 pages
Adams 2013 Training 740 Workbook
100% (1)
Adams 2013 Training 740 Workbook
458 pages
Adams 2020 Getting Started Using Adams Machinery
No ratings yet
Adams 2020 Getting Started Using Adams Machinery
148 pages
Adams Car Getting Started
No ratings yet
Adams Car Getting Started
140 pages
Adams 2023.3 Adams Car User Guide
No ratings yet
Adams 2023.3 Adams Car User Guide
1,642 pages
Adams/Driveline Setup Guide
No ratings yet
Adams/Driveline Setup Guide
58 pages
Using Adams/View - MD Adams 2010
100% (1)
Using Adams/View - MD Adams 2010
1,556 pages
Adams 2021.0.2 Adams Solver User Guide
No ratings yet
Adams 2021.0.2 Adams Solver User Guide
1,998 pages
Adams 2016 Doc Release
No ratings yet
Adams 2016 Doc Release
114 pages
Getting Started Using Adams Car MDR3
No ratings yet
Getting Started Using Adams Car MDR3
138 pages
DS MSCAdams A4 W
No ratings yet
DS MSCAdams A4 W
2 pages
Learn Basics Setup
No ratings yet
Learn Basics Setup
52 pages
MD Adams 2010 Release Guide
No ratings yet
MD Adams 2010 Release Guide
64 pages
Adams 2020 fp1 Doc Release
No ratings yet
Adams 2020 fp1 Doc Release
84 pages
Adams 2017.1 Doc Release
No ratings yet
Adams 2017.1 Doc Release
82 pages
Adams/View User Guide
No ratings yet
Adams/View User Guide
52 pages
Adams View Help
No ratings yet
Adams View Help
260 pages
Adams View 2014
No ratings yet
Adams View 2014
1,678 pages
ADM730 InstructorNotes
No ratings yet
ADM730 InstructorNotes
138 pages
Adm711 Course Notes MD r3
No ratings yet
Adm711 Course Notes MD r3
84 pages
Adams: Real Dynamics For Functional Virtual Prototyping
No ratings yet
Adams: Real Dynamics For Functional Virtual Prototyping
2 pages
WS16 - Using Admlin With Admcar
No ratings yet
WS16 - Using Admlin With Admcar
14 pages
Configuring MD Adams 2010
No ratings yet
Configuring MD Adams 2010
92 pages
Adm Simulation
No ratings yet
Adm Simulation
273 pages
Adams 2021.2 Getting Started Using Adams Car Ride
No ratings yet
Adams 2021.2 Getting Started Using Adams Car Ride
28 pages
Adams 2024.1 Adams Controls User Guide
No ratings yet
Adams 2024.1 Adams Controls User Guide
94 pages
ADAMS Getting Started
No ratings yet
ADAMS Getting Started
24 pages
Car Msc2011
No ratings yet
Car Msc2011
734 pages
ADS Tutorial: A Beginners Tutorial: Modes of Operation
No ratings yet
ADS Tutorial: A Beginners Tutorial: Modes of Operation
23 pages
Adams 2010 Tutorial
No ratings yet
Adams 2010 Tutorial
62 pages
Ads Circuit Simulation
100% (1)
Ads Circuit Simulation
100 pages
DiD Fixed Effects
No ratings yet
DiD Fixed Effects
15 pages
Researcher Reasoning Meets Computational Capacity Machine Learning For Social Science
No ratings yet
Researcher Reasoning Meets Computational Capacity Machine Learning For Social Science
23 pages
Pone 0288843
No ratings yet
Pone 0288843
32 pages
Fresco Ni 2018
No ratings yet
Fresco Ni 2018
26 pages
GOV-SBO (2023) 2 en
No ratings yet
GOV-SBO (2023) 2 en
19 pages
Optimal Control Methods For Missile Evasion
No ratings yet
Optimal Control Methods For Missile Evasion
214 pages
Missile Canard Design Analysis
No ratings yet
Missile Canard Design Analysis
10 pages
Missile Guidance Equations
No ratings yet
Missile Guidance Equations
8 pages
Belaidouni 2017
No ratings yet
Belaidouni 2017
11 pages
Füze Diş Konfigürasyonlarinin Aerodinamik Optimizasyonu
No ratings yet
Füze Diş Konfigürasyonlarinin Aerodinamik Optimizasyonu
103 pages
Military Engineering Manual Overview
No ratings yet
Military Engineering Manual Overview
328 pages
Forced Motions Design For Aerodynamic Identification A - 2018 - Aerospace Scienc
No ratings yet
Forced Motions Design For Aerodynamic Identification A - 2018 - Aerospace Scienc
13 pages
Yüksek Manevra Kabiliyetine Sahip Mermiler Için Teori, Rehberlik Ve Uçuş Kontrolü
No ratings yet
Yüksek Manevra Kabiliyetine Sahip Mermiler Için Teori, Rehberlik Ve Uçuş Kontrolü
60 pages
Path-Following Control For Thrust-Vectored Hyperso
No ratings yet
Path-Following Control For Thrust-Vectored Hyperso
21 pages
Numerical Study of Supercavitating Flow Around High Speed U - 2021 - Applied Oce
No ratings yet
Numerical Study of Supercavitating Flow Around High Speed U - 2021 - Applied Oce
9 pages
Non Random Vibration Analysis For General Viscou - 2019 - Chinese Journal of Aer
No ratings yet
Non Random Vibration Analysis For General Viscou - 2019 - Chinese Journal of Aer
12 pages
Target Enclosing Affine Formation Control of Two Layer - 2019 - Chinese Journal
No ratings yet
Target Enclosing Affine Formation Control of Two Layer - 2019 - Chinese Journal
15 pages
BWB Flight Test Risk Assessment
No ratings yet
BWB Flight Test Risk Assessment
15 pages
Metal Matrix Composite Materials: L. D. Blackburn, F. R. Bonanno, H. M. Burte, J. A. Herzog and Vv. F. Stuhrke
No ratings yet
Metal Matrix Composite Materials: L. D. Blackburn, F. R. Bonanno, H. M. Burte, J. A. Herzog and Vv. F. Stuhrke
13 pages
Variable Structure-Based Nonlinear Missile Guidance/Autopilot Design With Highly Maneuverable Actuators
No ratings yet
Variable Structure-Based Nonlinear Missile Guidance/Autopilot Design With Highly Maneuverable Actuators
7 pages
Fitting Guide Remote Support Phonak Target 6.0
No ratings yet
Fitting Guide Remote Support Phonak Target 6.0
7 pages
10th - Social Science - Reduced 2021-2022 Vetree Vikash Academy
No ratings yet
10th - Social Science - Reduced 2021-2022 Vetree Vikash Academy
7 pages
P2P Chat Node Architecture Overview
No ratings yet
P2P Chat Node Architecture Overview
20 pages
Design Thinking End Sem
No ratings yet
Design Thinking End Sem
6 pages
ME01059031-DPC Syllabus
No ratings yet
ME01059031-DPC Syllabus
3 pages
ADBMS - Lectures 1-5
No ratings yet
ADBMS - Lectures 1-5
109 pages
Computer Science Project
No ratings yet
Computer Science Project
9 pages
IR Global Brand Guidelines 2020
No ratings yet
IR Global Brand Guidelines 2020
17 pages
Cendence: User Manual
No ratings yet
Cendence: User Manual
21 pages
BaziaOpen Ended Lab
No ratings yet
BaziaOpen Ended Lab
14 pages
APC Smart-UPS RT 20kVA Specifications
No ratings yet
APC Smart-UPS RT 20kVA Specifications
4 pages
Holt Algebra 2 Homework Answers
100% (1)
Holt Algebra 2 Homework Answers
8 pages
CS001 Solved MCQS For Mid Term
No ratings yet
CS001 Solved MCQS For Mid Term
7 pages
JavaScript Dialogue Boxes
No ratings yet
JavaScript Dialogue Boxes
55 pages
08 - Squares and Square Roots-22-52
No ratings yet
08 - Squares and Square Roots-22-52
23 pages
IPsec VPN Troubleshooting
No ratings yet
IPsec VPN Troubleshooting
8 pages
Fortigate 200f Series
No ratings yet
Fortigate 200f Series
10 pages
Unit-2 Complete Python Program Flow Control Conditional Blocks 22nd Sept
No ratings yet
Unit-2 Complete Python Program Flow Control Conditional Blocks 22nd Sept
61 pages
Asian Paints Marketing Project Overview
No ratings yet
Asian Paints Marketing Project Overview
29 pages
Cs Practical 12
No ratings yet
Cs Practical 12
1 page
PlanetSpark Business Development Role
No ratings yet
PlanetSpark Business Development Role
4 pages
File - Lua
No ratings yet
File - Lua
5 pages
CA3-Part 2-Switching-and-Routing-Theory-questions-v1-12-24a
No ratings yet
CA3-Part 2-Switching-and-Routing-Theory-questions-v1-12-24a
3 pages
IoT-Based Predictive Maintenance
No ratings yet
IoT-Based Predictive Maintenance
10 pages
APT3200 Manual PDF
No ratings yet
APT3200 Manual PDF
46 pages
Ch3 Queries, Forms and Reports
100% (1)
Ch3 Queries, Forms and Reports
3 pages
Chapter 1
No ratings yet
Chapter 1
31 pages
Iems
No ratings yet
Iems
39 pages
Device Use Guidelines for Educators
No ratings yet
Device Use Guidelines for Educators
2 pages
Knight Frank Malaysia-Data-Centre-Research-Report-2023-10072
No ratings yet
Knight Frank Malaysia-Data-Centre-Research-Report-2023-10072
7 pages